Sony ILME-FR7K Fr7 Cinema Line Full-frame Ptz Robotic User Manual

Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K
This guide describes the configuration and operation of the ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K Interchangeable Lens Digital
Camera.
Refer to this manual and the operating instructions for related devices as required.
Overview
Typical Usage Applications
System Configuration
Controlling a Single Unit Using the Supplied Infrared Remote Control
Controlling a Single Unit Using a Tablet or Computer
Controlling a Single Unit Using an External Remote Controller
Controlling Multiple Units Using External Remote Controller
Location and Function of Parts
Front View
Rear View
Connector Block
Side View
Top View
Bottom View
Lens Support
Location and Function of Parts of the Infrared Remote Control (supplied)
Web App Screen
Web App Screen Overview
Structure of Common Area of Screens
Structure of the Live Operation Screen
Structure of the Playback Operation Screen
Structure of the Settings Screen
1

Preparation
Camera Menu
Camera Screen Display
Mounting the Unit
Mounting Upright in a Fixed Location
Mounting Upright in a High, Fixed Location
Mounting on a Ceiling
Attaching/Removing a Lens
Precautions when Attaching/Removing a Lens
Checking the Lens Switches
Precautions When Using a Zoom Lens
Attaching a Lens
Removing a Lens
Connecting Cables
Connecting the Unit to a Network Device Via Wired Connection
Connecting a Power Supply
Using AC Power
Using PoE++ Power
Resetting the Pan/Tilt
Configuring Before Shooting
Initializing the Unit Using the Web App
Accessing the Web App from a Web Browser
Initializing the Unit
Configuring Basic Operation
Preparing Memory Cards
Supported Memory Cards
Inserting Memory Cards
Ejecting a Memory Card
Formatting (Initializing) Memory Cards
2

Shooting
Checking the Remaining Recording Time
Restoring Memory Cards
Basic Operation
Starting/Stopping Recording
Switching Between Memory Cards
Checking the Audio
Specifying Time Data
Reviewing the Recording (Rec Review)
Adjusting the Framing
Framing Adjustment Screen
Adjusting the Shooting Direction
Adjusting the Shooting Direction Using the Web App
Setting the Pan/Tilt Operating Speed
Setting the Pan/Tilt Operation Acceleration
Adjusting the Shooting Direction Using the Supplied Infrared Remote Control
Adjusting the Zoom
Setting the Zoom Type
Adjusting the Zoom Using the Web App
Setting the Zoom Operating Speed
Adjusting the Zoom Using the Supplied Infrared Remote Control
Saving/Restoring the Camera Pan/Tilt/Zoom Position
Calibrating an E-Mount Lens
Saving/Restoring Pan/Tilt, Zoom Position, and Focus Setting Using the Web App
Renaming Position Presets Using the Web App
Replacing a Saved Position with a New Position Using the Web App
Deleting a Saved Position Using the Web App
Changing the Transition Speed of Position Presets
Saving/Restoring Pan/Tilt and Zoom Position Using the Supplied Infrared Remote Control
3

Adjusting the Focus
Focus Adjustment Screen
Adjusting the Focus Manually (Manual Focus)
Adjusting Manually Using the Web App
Adjusting Manually Using the Supplied Infrared Remote Control
Focusing by Specifying a Focus Position (Spot Focus)
Using Auto Focus Temporarily (Push Auto Focus (AF))
Using Single-Shot Auto Focus (Push Auto Focus (AF-S))
Adjusting the Focus Automatically (Auto Focus)
Adjusting Automatically Using the Web App
Adjusting Automatically Using the Supplied Infrared Remote Control
Setting the Auto Focus Area/Position (Focus Area)
Changing the Focus Area Quickly (Focus Setting)
Moving the Focus Area Frame Using Touch Operation (Touch Focus Area)
Adjusting the Auto Focus Operation (AF Transition Speed, AF Subject Shift Sensitivity)
Setting the Auto Focus Target Manually (AF Assist) Using the Web App
Focusing Manually During Auto Focus Using the Supplied Infrared Remote Control
Using Manual Focus Temporarily During Auto Focus (Push Manual Focus)
Tracking Using Face and Eye Detection (Face/Eye Detection AF)
Tracking a Specified Subject (Realtime Tracking AF)
Adjusting the Brightness
Brightness Adjustment Screen
Setting the Base Sensitivity
Setting the Target Level for Automatic Brightness Adjustment
Adjusting the Iris
Adjusting the Iris Automatically
Adjusting the Iris Manually
Adjusting the Gain
Adjusting the Gain Automatically
4

Useful Functions
Adjusting the Gain Manually
Adjusting the Shutter
Adjusting the Shutter Automatically
Adjusting the Shutter Manually
Adjusting the Light Level (ND Filter)
About the ND Filter
Adjusting in Preset Mode
Adjusting Automatically in Variable Mode
Adjusting Manually in Variable Mode
Adjusting for Natural Colors (White Balance)
White Balance Adjustment Screen
Adjusting the White Balance Automatically
Adjusting the White Balance Manually
Running Auto White Balance
Configuring the Audio to Record
Audio Configuration Screen
Selecting the Audio Input Device
Adjusting the Audio Recording Level Automatically
Adjusting the Audio Recording Level Manually
Direct Menu Operation
Assignable Buttons
Slow & Quick Motion
Recording Video Intermittently (Interval Rec)
Recording Cached Pictures (Picture Cache Rec)
Recording to Memory Cards A and B Simultaneously (2-slot Simul Rec)
Video Signal Monitor
Clip Flags
Breathing Compensation
5

Network Functions
Proxy Recording
Proxy Recording Overview
Recording a Proxy
Shooting with the Desired Look
Look Overview
Selecting a Look
Importing a Desired Base Look
Customizing a Look
Saving a Look
Deleting a Base Look
Shooting with Look Adjustment in Post-Production
Shooting with Look Adjustment in Post-Production
Applying a LUT to HDMI Output and Streaming
Changing a LUT
Changing the Distribution of Dark and Bright Areas in the Recorded Image
RAW Recording
Recording RAW Video
Recording RAW Video in Slow & Quick Motion Mode
Adjusting the Bokeh (Bokeh Control Function)
Switching the Bokeh Control Function On/Off
Adjusting the Degree of Bokeh
Saving and Loading Configuration Data
Saving and Loading Configuration Data Overview
Saving an ALL File
Loading an ALL File
Transferring Files
About File Transfer
6

Thumbnail Screen
Camera Menu and Detailed Settings
Registering a File Transfer Destination
Selecting a File and Uploading
Uploading a Proxy File on a Memory Card from the Thumbnail Screen
Uploading an Original File on a Memory Card from the Thumbnail Screen
Checking the File Transfer Status
Uploading Using Secure FTP
Configuring Streaming
About Streaming
Setting the Streaming Format
Setting the Video Codec for Streaming
Setting the Audio Codec for Streaming
Starting/Stopping Streaming
Thumbnail Screen
Playing Clips and Other Clip Operations
Playing Recorded Clips
Operations on Recorded Clips
Camera Menu Configuration 
Operating the Camera Menu
Operating the Camera Menu
Entering a Character String
User Menu
User
Edit User Menu
Edit User
Shooting Menu
ISO/Gain/EI
7

ND Filter
Shutter
Iris
Auto Exposure
White
White Setting
Offset White
Focus
S&Q Motion
LUT On/Off
Noise Suppression
Flicker Reduce
SteadyShot
Project Menu
Base Setting
Rec Format
Cine EI Setting
Simul Rec
Proxy Rec
Interval Rec
Picture Cache Rec
SDI/HDMI Rec Control
Assignable Button
Paint/Look Menu
Scene File
Base Look
Reset Paint Settings
Black
Knee
8

Detail
Matrix
Multi Matrix
Pan-Tilt Menu
P/T Acceleration
TC/Media Menu
Timecode
TC Display
Users Bit
HDMI TC Out
Clip Name Format
Update Media
Format Media
Media Life
Monitoring Menu
Output Format
Display On/Off
Video Signal Monitor
Marker
Audio Menu
Audio Input
Audio Output
Thumbnail Menu
Display Clip Properties
Set Clip Flag
Lock/Unlock Clip
Delete Clip
Transfer Clip
9

Web Menu and Detailed Settings
Transfer Clip (Proxy)
Filter Clips
Customize View
Technical Menu
Color Bars
Genlock
Tally
Rec Review
Zoom
Lens
APR
Network Menu
Wired LAN
File Transfer
Maintenance Menu
Language
Clock Set
Hours Meter
Shooting Menu Settings and Default Values
ISO/Gain Settings and Default Values
AGC Limit Settings and Default Values
Image Quality Settings Saved for Each Shooting Mode
Web Menu Configuration
Web Menu Operations
Shooting Menu
Focus
Project Menu
10

Base Setting
Rec Format
Simul Rec
Proxy Rec
Interval Rec
Picture Cache Rec
All File
Paint/Look Menu
Base Look
Pan-Tilt Menu
P/T Speed
P/T Acceleration
P/T Range Limit
P/T Direction
P/T Preset
Monitoring Menu
Output Format
Output Display
Audio Menu
Audio Input
Audio Output
Technical Menu
Tally
IR Remote
Network Menu
Camera Name
User
Wired LAN
11

External Device Connection
File Transfer
FTP Server 1 to 3
SSL
Referer Check
Brute Force Attack Protection
Stream Menu
Stream
Video Stream
Audio Stream
Maintenance Menu
Language
Accessibility
Clock Set
Reset
Information
System Log
HTTP Access Log
Service
EULA
Software
Connecting External Monitors and Recording Devices
Operating Using an RM-IP500 Remote Controller (Option)
About Operation Using an RM-IP500 Remote Controller (option)
Connecting an RM-IP500 Remote Controller
Synchronizing with an External Device
About Synchronizing with an External Device
Synchronizing the Phase of the Video Signal (Genlock)
12

Appendix
5-041-957-11(1)
 Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation
Locking the Timecode to Other Devices
Connecting an External Microphone or External Audio Device
Managing/Editing Clips Using a Computer
Outputting an Optical Fiber Signal
Connecting a Tally Signal
Usage Precautions
Output Formats and Limitations
Troubleshooting
Error/Warning Messages
List of Menu Items
Preset Position Saved Items
Block Diagrams
Updating E-Mount Lens Software
Attaching the Lens Release Button Cover
Licenses
Specifications
Trademarks
13

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

System Configuration

This unit can be combined with peripheral devices to form various system configurations.

E-mount lens1.

LA-EA3 / LA-EA4 A-mount Adaptor2.

Infrared remote control (supplied)3.

CFexpress Type A memory cards / SDXC memory cards4.

CFexpress Type A card reader / SD card reader5.

ECM-680S, ECM-678

, ECM-674

Microphone

EC-0.5X3F5M 3-pin → 5-pin XLR adaptor cable is required.

AC adaptor (supplied)7.

Video monitor8.

RM-IP500 Remote Controller9.

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Controlling a Single Unit Using the Supplied Infrared Remote Control

You can control a single unit remotely using the supplied infrared remote control.

Video signal

Signal flow

5-041-957-11(1)

Infrared remote control (supplied)1.

Video monitor2.

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Controlling a Single Unit Using a Tablet or Computer

You can connect a tablet or computer to the unit and then control unit using a web browser.

Video signal

Remote control signal

Signal flow

5-041-957-11(1)

Video monitor1.

Tablet2.

Computer3.

Access point4.

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Controlling a Single Unit Using an External Remote Controller

You can control the unit remotely using a remote controller.

Video signal

Remote control signal

Signal flow

5-041-957-11(1)

Video monitor1.

RM-IP500 Remote Controller2.

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Controlling Multiple Units Using External Remote Controller

You can control up to 100 units remotely using a single remote controller (RM-IP500).

Video signal

Remote control signal

Tally/contact signal

Signal flow

5-041-957-11(1)

Video monitor1.

Video switcher2.

Ethernet hub3.

RM-IP500 Remote Controller4.

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Front View

This topic describes the location and function of parts on the front of the unit.

Hint

This description refers to the illustration of the unit without an attached lens.

Camera head

Note

Do not subject the camera head to strong impacts.

Recording/tally lamp

When configured as a recording lamp, the lamp lights up red when recording to a memory card. The lamp blinks

when the remaining free space on the recording media is low or when an error occurs.

For details, see “Error/Warning Messages.”

When configured as a tally lamp, the lamp lights up red or green according to the external tally signal.

For details, see “Connecting a Tally Signal.”

Image sensor

Note

Do not touch directly with your hands.

Lens release button

Press to remove the lens.

For details, see “Removing a Lens.”

Lens signal contacts

Note

Do not touch directly with your hands.

POWER lamp6.

NETWORK lamp

The state of the unit is indicated by the combination of display color and lit status (lit, blinking, not lit) of the POWER

lamp and NETWORK lamp.

POWER

lamp

NETWORK

lamp

Unit status

Lit

green

Lit green Power-on (network connected)

Not lit Power-on (network not connected)

Blinking

green

Not lit Power-on process in progress

Lit

orange

Not lit Power standby state

Blinking

yellow

Not lit Software update in progress

Blinking

orange

slowly

Blinking

green

slowly

The unit cannot operate normally. For details, view the system log. If the problem

persists even after putting the unit in standby mode or turning the power off and then on

again, contact your Sony service representative.

Blinking

orange

rapidly

Blinking

green

rapidly

A malfunction occurred on the unit. Contact your Sony service representative.

Blinks green when a command is received from the supplied infrared remote control.

Blinking slowly: Blinking once per second

Blinking rapidly: Blinking four times per second

Infrared remote control sensor

Receives the control signal from the supplied infrared remote control.

Air inlet

Note

Do not block the air flow. Doing so may cause a malfunction.

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Rear View

This topic describes the location and function of parts on the rear of the unit.

Camera head lock lever

Locks the forward/rearward movement of the camera head.

Note

Turn off the power of the unit and lock the camera head horizontally using the pan/tilt lock lever before operating the lock

lever to avoid injury due to pinched fingers. For details about the pan/tilt lock lever, see “Pan/tilt lock lever” in “Side View.”

Slide base2.

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Connector Block

This topic describes the location and function of parts on the connector block of the unit.

(ground) connection

Connect to ground by connecting to the ground terminal of a power outlet or to a grounding bar.

DC IN connector (standard DC jack)

Connect to an AC adaptor.

Note

Do not use any AC adaptor other than the one provided. Connecting another adaptor may cause a fire or malfunction.

LAN (network) connector (RJ-45)

Connect a network cable (category 5e or higher) for network communication and PoE++

power supply.

Speed LED display status

Indicates the speed of the network connection.

PoE++: Power over Ethernet Plus Plus. Conforms to IEEE802.3bt (Type 4 Class 8). For details about connecting, refer to the operating

instructions for the power supply device.

Display Connection speed

Not lit 10 Mbps

Link/ACT LED display status

Indicates the status of the network connection.

Note

When connecting this product to the Internet, connect via a system that provides a protection function, such as a router or

firewall. If connected without such protection, security issues may occur.

Display Connection speed

100 Mbps

Lit orange 1000 Mbps

Display Connection status

Not lit No link

Blinking green Link established, data active

Lit green Active link

TC IN connector

Input an external reference timecode signal.

For details, see “Locking the Timecode to Other Devices.”

HDMI connector

Outputs the video from the unit as an HDMI signal.

For details, see “HDMI connector (Type A connector)” in “Connecting External Monitors and Recording Devices.”

HDMI cable retaining plate mounting screw

To prevent the HDMI cable from being removed, attach the supplied HDMI cable retaining plate using the supplied

mounting screw (M2.6×6), and attach the HDMI cable using a commercially available cable tie or band.

For details about attaching the HDMI cable retaining plate, see “Connecting Cables.”

OPTION connector

Use to connect a tally signal from an external device.

For details, see “Connecting a Tally Signal.”

Cord clamper

Use to secure the AC adaptor cord.

RESET switch

Press for at least 5 seconds using the tip of a pen or similar device to reset the settings of the unit to the factory

default values.

You can select whether to reset the network connection settings only or all settings using SETUP switch 1.

OPTICAL output connector

Outputs an SDI signal converted to optical format when an SFP+ module (option) is connected.

For details, see “Outputting an Optical Fiber Signal.”

10.

SETUP switches11.

Configures the following settings.

Switch 1: Sets which settings are reset when the RESET switch is pressed.

Switch 2: Sets whether the +48 V power supply (phantom power) is turned on/off when an audio input device is

connected. The setting is applied immediately.

This function is enabled when [Audio] > [Audio Input] > [AUDIO IN Select] is set to [MIC] in the camera menu.

Note

Setting switch 2 to the ON position and connecting a microphone that is not compatible with a +48 V source may damage the

connected device. Check the setting before connecting the device.

Switch 3: Enables/disables VISCA over IP communication. The settings are applied when the camera is turned on.

Set to the ON position to use the unit when connected to a remote controller (RM-IP500).

Note

If the administrator password has not been configured, VISCA over IP communication is disabled, regardless of the switch

setting. For details about configuring the administrator password, see “Initializing the Unit.”

Switch 4: Changes the speed of pan/tilt operations sent from the infrared remote control. The setting is applied

immediately.

Setting Description

OFF

(default)

Resets the network connection settings only. The network settings, security settings, and user

information (user name and password) of the unit will be reset.

ON Resets all settings to factory defaults.

Setting Description

OFF

(default)

Do not supply +48 V power (phantom power supply). Configure this setting when using an external

audio device (such as a mixer), dynamic microphone, or microphone with a built-in battery.

Supply +48 V power (phantom power supply) to a phantom power compatible microphone connected to

the AUDIO IN connector (CH-1 or CH-2).

Setting Description

OFF (default) Will not respond to VISCA over IP commands.

ON Accepts VISCA over IP commands.

Setting Description

OFF (default) Operates at normal speed.

ON Operates at maximum speed.

SDI OUT connector

Outputs the video from the unit as a 12G/6G/3G/HD-SDI signal.

The unit can also be configured for RAW signal output.

For details, see “SDI OUT connector (BNC type)” in “Connecting External Monitors and Recording Devices.”

12.

Infrared remote control sensor (rear)

Infrared sensor for the supplied infrared remote control.

13.

Fan/air outlet

Emits heat from inside the unit.

Note

Do not cover the air outlet. Doing so may cause a malfunction.

Note that the area near the air outlet may become hot.

14.

GENLOCK connector

Use to input an external sync signal.

For details, see “Synchronizing the Phase of the Video Signal (Genlock).”

15.

AUDIO IN connector (XLR type 5-pin connector)

Use to input the signal from an external microphone or audio device.

It functions as an AUDIO IN CH-1 connector or AUDIO IN CH-2 connector.

For details, see “Connecting an External Microphone or External Audio Device.”

16.

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Side View

This topic describes the location and function of parts on the side of the unit.

Hint

This description refers to the illustration of the unit without an attached lens.

Pan/tilt lock lever

Locks the pan/tilt mechanism of the unit. Use in the following cases.

When transporting or packing the unit.

When attaching or removing a lens. For details, see “Attaching a Lens” or “Removing a Lens.”

When using a lens that does not support pan/tilt operation (such as Sony SEL100400GM / SEL200600G /

SEL400F28GM / SEL600F40GM lenses).

Hint

The pan/tilt movement can be fixed at the following angles.

Slide base2.

Screw holes for external devices (4 places)

For M3 screws of up to 6 mm (1/4 inch) length.

Note

Do not use screws longer than 6 mm (1/4 inch). Doing so may cause a malfunction.

Access indicator A4.

Access indicator B

Indicator is lit or blinks when recording media is inserted.

For details, see “Inserting Memory Cards.”

CFexpress Type A / SD card slot (A)6.

CFexpress Type A / SD card slot (B)

Use for inserting recording media.

For details, see “Inserting Memory Cards.”

QR code for network connection

Use when configuring initial settings.

For details, see “Accessing the Web App from a Web Browser.”

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Top View

This topic describes the location and function of parts on the top of the unit.

Hint

This description refers to the illustration of the unit without an attached lens.

Screw holes for external devices (2 places)

Compatible with 1/4-20 UNC screws for a tripod.

Maximum length of 6 mm (1/4 inch).

ɸ (imager mark)

The imager mark is on the same plane as the image sensor.

To measure the distance between the unit and the subject accurately, use this imager mark as a reference point.

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Bottom View

This topic describes the location and function of parts on the bottom of the unit.

Hint

This description refers to the illustration of the unit without an attached lens.

Ceiling bracket mounting screw holes (6 places)

When mounting the unit on a ceiling or a shelf in a high location, attach the body bracket (option) to the base of the

unit using the six body bracket mounting screws in these screw holes.

For details about mounting, see “Mounting Upright in a High, Fixed Location” and “Mounting on a Ceiling.”

Tripod mounting screws (2 places)

Used when mounting the unit on a camera tripod (option, 1/4-20 UNC screws of up to 5.5 mm (1/4 inch) length).

Note

Do not use screws longer than 5.5 mm (1/4 inch). Doing so may cause a malfunction.

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Lens Support

This topic describes the location and function of parts of the lens support of the unit.

Hint

This description refers to the illustration of the unit without an attached lens.

Lens support rod (2)

Supports the lens.

Can also be used for mounting general Ø15 rod accessories.

Lens support unit

The lens support can slide forward/rearward according to the lens and then secured.

Lens support pedestal attachment screw

Attach to the lens support pedestal. You can adjust the screw up/down to match the height of the lens support

pedestal.

Lens support rod clamp lever (2 places)

Secures the forward/rearward position of the lens support unit.

Lens support pedestal attachment screw clamp lever

Secures the vertical position of the lens support pedestal attachment screw.

Hint

If a clamp lever is in a position that makes it difficult to turn, release the clamp lever and rotate it to an angle that will make

operation easier. When in the desired position, close the clamp lever.

A: Lens support pedestal attachment screw clamp lever

B: Lens support rod clamp lever

Note

To prevent the lens support unit from interfering with pan/tilt operation, move the lens support unit up against the camera

head when not using the lens support unit, and move the lens support pedestal attachment screw to its highest position

(closest to the lens).

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Location and Function of Parts of the Infrared Remote Control (supplied)

This topic describes the location and function of pars of the infrared remote control (supplied).

REC● (record START/STOP) button

Press to start or stop recording.

MENU button

Press to show or hide the camera menu.

GUI control buttons

Press to perform operations in the camera menu, in message dialogs that include buttons, and other screen display

functions.

CANC./BACK button

Press to cancel a setting or to return to the previous screen of the camera menu of the unit.

Infrared remote control battery

The infrared remote control requires two AA (LR6) batteries.

Insert the batteries into the infrared remote control as shown in the following diagram.

Pan and tilt control buttons

Press the arrow buttons to control the pan/tilt of the camera. Press the HOME button to return the orientation of the

camera to face the front.

Preset position control buttons

Press and hold the PRESET button and press one of the 1 to 3 buttons to store camera direction, zoom, and focus

adjustment status in the pressed number button.

Press a number button with stored settings to recall the saved state.

Focus control buttons

Use to adjust the focus.

To adjust the focus automatically, press the AF button.

To adjust the focus manually, press the MF button, then press either the F (Far) button to focus on far subjects or the

N (Near) button to focus on near subjects.

Assignable buttons 1 to 3

Executes the functions assigned to the assignable buttons using the camera menu.

If you assign the [Direct Menu] function to an assignable button, you can adjust the exposure, white balance, and

other settings using the GUI control buttons.

For details about assignment using the camera menu, see “Assignable Buttons.”

For details about the direct menu, see “Direct Menu Operation.”

(power) button

Press to turn on the unit or to switch the power supply to standby state.

THUMBNAIL button

Displays the thumbnail screen showing the clips recorded on the memory card of the unit.

For details about the thumbnail screen, see “Thumbnail Screen.”

You can select clips and control playback on the thumbnail screen using the GUI control buttons.

For details about selecting clips and controlling playback, see “Playing Recorded Clips” and “Operations on

Recorded Clips.”

10.

SLOT SEL (memory card slot (A)/(B) select) button

When two memory cards are inserted, press the button to switch between the memory cards for recording.

Press this button while the thumbnail screen is displayed to switch between the memory cards to view.

11.

P/T RESET (pan/tilt reset) button

Resets the pan/tilt functions. Press the button when the POWER lamp and NETWORK lamp are blinking

simultaneously or when [Execute Pan-Tilt Reset] is displayed in the framing control panel in the Web App.

12.

Zoom control buttons

To zoom in, press the T (telephoto) button.

To zoom out, press the W (wide) button.

13.

Note

Do not use any batteries other than manganese or alkaline batteries as they may rupture.

Dispose of used batteries according to the laws and regulations of the country or region.

5-041-957-11(1)

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Web App Screen Overview

By connecting a tablet or computer, you can pan/tilt, zoom, record, play recorded video, and configure the unit from a

web browser (hereinafter, this function is referred to as the “Web App”).

For details about launching the Web App, see “Accessing the Web App from a Web Browser.”

Note

The Web App does not support the camera audio output.

When the Web App launches, the following live operation screen appears.

Live operation screen

For details about the live operation screen, see “Structure of the Live Operation Screen.”

Buttons and icons common to the live operation screen and playback operation screen are displayed at the top of the

screen.

For details about the common area of the screens, see “Structure of Common Area of Screens.”

You can switch between screens by pressing the screen switching tabs in the common area.

Playback operation screen

Press the [Playback] tab to display the playback operation screen.

For details about the playback operation screen, see “Structure of the Playback Operation Screen.”

Settings screen

Press the [Settings] tab to display the settings screen (hereinafter referred to as the web menu).

Note

In the web menu, settings are not applied until you press the [OK] button. If you change settings on a page that has an [OK]

button, be sure to press the [OK] button.

For details about the settings screen, see “Structure of the Settings Screen.”

In this Help Guide, the settings screen of the Web App is referred to as the web menu.

5-041-957-11(1)

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Structure of Common Area of Screens

This topic describes the structure of the common area of screens.

Camera name

Displays the name of the camera.

You can change the name using [Network] > [Camera Name] in the web menu.

The background color changes according to the external tally signal.

Power switch

When the unit is turned on, [Power ON] is displayed. You can press the switch and select [Power Standby] to set the

power supply of the unit to standby state.

When [Power Standby] is displayed, you can press the switch and select [Power ON] to turn on the power supply of

the unit.

Operation screen switching tabs

Press a tab to display the corresponding operation screen.

[Live] tab: Display the live operation screen.

[Playback] tab: Display the playback operation screen.

[Settings] tab: Display the settings screen (web menu).

Notifications mark

When a message arrives, the mark indication changes as shown below.

(Notifications On)

Take the necessary action according to the message displayed in the camera image panel.

Note

Messages are not displayed when [Monitoring] > [Output Display] > [HDMI] is set to [Off] in the web menu. Set to [On] to

check the contents of messages.

(Camera Status) button

Press the button to display camera recorded image/output image signal information and lens information on a

separate screen.

Screen operation lock switch

(Operation Unlock): Set the switch to the left position to control operations on the live operation screen and

playback operation screen.

(Operation Lock): Set the switch to the right position to lock operations on the live operation screen and

playback operation screen to prevent accidental misoperation.

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Structure of the Live Operation Screen

This topic describes the structure of the live operation screen.

Preset position control panel

Displays the registered position of a preset using a thumbnail. Double-tap the thumbnail to return to the position

stored in the preset.

For details about preset position, see “Saving/Restoring Pan/Tilt, Zoom Position, and Focus Setting Using the

Web App.”

Camera image panel

Displays the current camera image and the status of the unit.

It displays the same image as the HDMI output.

The following status is displayed above the image. A red frame or green frame is also displayed around the image

according to the received external tally signal.

[Display] button

Press this button to display camera information on the image.

Press again while the camera information is displayed to hide the camera information.

In addition to markers, autofocus-related indicators and messages are displayed according to the status.

For details about the displayed camera information, see “Camera Screen Display.”

Realtime tracking AF stop button

Press the button to stop tracking a subject.

No. Display Description

2-1 Focus mode indicator See “Focus mode indicator” in “Camera Screen Display.”

2-2

Recording mode, slot A/B, Interval Rec

recording interval indicator

See “Recording mode, slot A/B, Interval Rec recording interval

indicator” in “Camera Screen Display.”

2-3 Streaming status indicator

Displayed during streaming (when [Stream Setting] is set to

[SRT-Caller] only)

2-4 RAW output operation status indicator

Displays the output status of the RAW signal. For details about

RAW, see “Recording RAW Video.”

2-5 Remaining media capacity indicator

See “Remaining media capacity indicator” in “Camera Screen

Display.”

2-6 Zoom position indicator See “Zoom position indicator” in “Camera Screen Display.”

2-7 AE mode/AE level indicator

Displays the AE mode/AE level indicator. For details about AE,

see “Adjusting the Brightness.”

For details about tracking, see “Tracking a Specified Subject (Realtime Tracking AF).”
Record START/STOP button
Press the button to start recording. During recording, the record START/STOP button lights up red.
Press during recording to stop recording.
You can set the Hold switch to the Hold state to prevent misoperation of the record START/STOP button.
3.
Camera basic configuration panel
Displays settings for basic functions required for shooting on buttons. Press a button to display the corresponding
setup screen for each function in the camera basic configuration adjustment panel below (5).
4-1 [FPS]
4-2 [ISO/Gain / Exposure Index]
4-3 [Shutter]
4-4 [Iris]
4-5 [ND Filter]
4-6 [Scene File / Base Look/LUT]
4-7 [White Balance]
For details, refer to the description of each function.
4.
Function Reference
FPS “Slow & Quick Motion”
ISO/Gain
“Setting the Base Sensitivity,” and “Adjusting the Gain Automatically” and “Adjusting the Gain
Manually” in “Adjusting the Gain”
Exposure
Index
“Setting the Base Sensitivity,” “Changing the Distribution of Dark and Bright Areas in the Recorded
Image”
Shutter “Adjusting the Shutter Automatically” and “Adjusting the Shutter Manually” in “Adjusting the Shutter”
Iris “Adjusting the Iris Automatically” and “Adjusting the Iris Manually” in “Adjusting the Iris”
ND Filter “About the ND Filter” in “Adjusting the Light Level (ND Filter)”
Scene File “Look Overview” and other topics in “Shooting with the Desired Look”
Base
Look/LUT
“Shooting with Look Adjustment in Post-Production”
White
Balance
“White Balance Adjustment Screen”
Assignable buttons/Camera basic configuration adjustment panel
Displays assignable buttons during normal operation. Press the “Camera setup panel” button to display the
corresponding setup items. Press the [X] button or press the camera setup panel button again to return to the
assignable button display.
5.
45

For details about assignable buttons, see “Assignable Buttons.”

For details about the camera basic configuration adjustment panel, refer to the description of each function.

Framing control panel / GUI control panel

Switch between the framing control panel / GUI control panel using the tabs at the top.

Use the framing control panel to adjust the framing. Press the [Pan-Tilt-Zoom] tab to display the framing control

panel.

For details about operation, see “Adjusting the Framing.”

Hint

The joystick part of the framing control panel is displayed as shown below when pan/tilt operation is disabled and when

pan/tilt initialization is required.

When pan/tilt operation is locked using the pan/tilt lock lever

When pan/tilt operation is not initialized

When pan/tilt operation needs to be reset

When pan/tilt operation is disabled

When pan/tilt is not initialized or needs to be reset, you can quickly access the [Pan-Tilt Reset] button in the camera control

panel by pressing the message displayed below the joystick.

Use the GUI control panel to operate the camera menu, clip playback, and other functions. Press the [Cam GUI] tab

to display the GUI control panel.

For details about operation, see “Operating the Camera Menu” and “Playing Clips and Other Clip Operations.”

Camera control panel

Use to configure the functions required to operate the camera.

Switch between the screens to display using the tabs at the top.

For details, see the description of each function.

(Main) tab

Displays the setup items for frequently used functions.

The top and bottom slider functions can be changed by pressing the [▼] button and selecting from the displayed list.

The following functions can be selected.

ND Filter

Iris

ISO

Gain

Exposure Index

AE Level

Zoom Speed

Pan-Tilt Speed

(Focus) tab

Displays the setup items related to focus.

(Audio) tab

Displays the setup items related to audio.

Displayed according to menu settings.

(Stream) tab

Displays the setup items related to streaming.

The items displayed will vary depending on the streaming format setting.

When set to [SRT-Caller], streaming can be started/stopped on this screen.

For details, see “About Streaming” and other topics in “Configuring Streaming.”

(Others) tab

Displays the setup items related to other functions.

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Structure of the Playback Operation Screen

This topic describes the structure of the playback operation screen.

Camera image panel

Displays the playback image and related information. When playback is stopped, the camera image screen appears.

1-1 Shooting date and time

1-2 Playback status indicator

1-3 Playback format (picture size) indicator

1-4 Playback format (codec) indicator

1-5 Clip name display

1-6 Clip number/total number of clips

1-7 Streaming status indicator

1-8 Playback format (frame rate and scan method) indicator

1-9 Base Look indicator

Playback control panel

Displays the playback control buttons.

[Display] button

Press to switch between the screen display on the image.

[Thumbnail] button

Displays the clips recorded on the memory card on the camera image panel as thumbnails.

Button Function

(Play/Pause) button Plays a clip. During playback, pauses the clip.

(Fast Forward) button, (Fast

Reverse) button

Plays a clip at high speed. When the button is pressed, the playback

speed changes in three steps.

(Next) button, (Previous)

button

Jumps to start of clip or the previous/next clip.

(Stop) button Stops playback.

Pressing the [Thumbnail] button during thumbnail screen display closes the thumbnail screen and returns to the

camera image.

For details about the thumbnail screen, see “Thumbnail Screen.”

[Slot Select] button

Switches between the target playback media.

Assignable buttons

Displays the assignable buttons assigned to functions of the unit.

For details about assignable buttons, see “Assignable Buttons.”

GUI control panel

Use the GUI control panel to operate the camera menu, clip playback, and other functions.

For details about operation, see “Operating the Camera Menu” and “Playing Recorded Clips.”

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Structure of the Settings Screen

Use the settings screen to configure the various setup items of the unit, including initial settings, network settings,

shooting/playback settings using the web menu.

Note

In the web menu, settings are not applied until you press the [OK] button as a general rule. If you change settings on a page that

has an [OK] button, be sure to press the [OK] button.

For details about the settings screen, see “Web Menu and Detailed Settings.”

5-041-957-11(1)

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Camera Menu

Press the [Menu] button in the GUI control panel of the live operation screen to display the camera menu in the camera

image panel.

You can configure the settings required for shooting and playback using the camera menu.

Press the [Menu] button while the camera menu is displayed to hide the camera menu.

The camera menu is operated using the GUI control panel.

For details about the camera menu, see “Camera Menu and Detailed Settings.”

Note

When [Monitoring] > [Output Display] > [HDMI/Stream] is set to Off in the web menu (disables information overlay on the screen

display), the camera menu is no longer displayed in the camera image panel. However, be aware that menu operations in the

GUI control panel are still active. To avoid inadvertent operation, take care to not perform any menu operations using the GUI

control panel when [HDMI/Stream] is set to Off.

5-041-957-11(1)

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Camera Screen Display

You can displays the status and settings of the unit superimposed on the output image from the camera. You can set the

outputs for which screen display is enabled using [Monitoring] > [Output Display] in the web menu.

You can show/hide the information using the [Display] button. Even when hidden, it will appear while performing direct

menu operations.

You can show/hide items individually using [Monitoring] > [Display On/Off] in the camera menu.

Information displayed on the screen while shooting

Upload indicator/remaining files indicator

For details about transferring files, see “About File Transfer” and other topics in “Transferring Files.”

Focus area indicator

Displays the focus area for auto focus.

For details about auto focus, see “Adjusting Automatically Using the Web App” and other topics in “Adjusting the

Focus Automatically (Auto Focus).”

Recording mode, slot A/B, Interval Rec recording interval indicator

For details about Interval Rec, see “Recording Video Intermittently (Interval Rec).”

Display Meaning

●Rec Recording

Stby Recording standby

Depth-of-field indicator4.

Imager scan mode indicator5.

A (mismatch) mark is displayed if there is a mismatch between the image circle size of the lens and the effective

picture size imager scan mode setting.

When Imager Scan Mode is set to FF, a “C” mark is displayed in modes with narrower angle of view (cropped).

Cropping occurs in the following modes.

When the recording format is 3840×2160 and S&Q Motion frame rate is 100 fps or 120 fps

When [Codec] is set to RAW or RAW & XAVC-I and the RAW output format is 3840×2160

For details about the imager scan mode, see “Setting the imager scan mode” in “Configuring Basic Operation.”

RAW output operation status indicator

Displays the output status of the RAW signal.

For details about RAW, see “Recording RAW Video.”

Slow & Quick Motion shooting frame rate indicator

For details about Slow & Quick Motion, see “Slow & Quick Motion.”

Focus position indicator

Displays the focus position.

Focus mode indicator

Face/eye detection AF

For details about face/eye detection AF, see “Tracking Using Face and Eye Detection (Face/Eye Detection AF).”

Display Meaning

Focus Hold Focus Hold mode

MF MF mode

AF AF mode

(Realtime tracking AF mode) Realtime tracking AF mode

Display Meaning

(Face/eye detection AF) Indicates face/eye detection AF is active

(face/eye only AF) Indicates face/eye only AF is active

(saved tracking face) Indicates a tracking face has been saved

(AF paused icon during face/eye detection AF)

Indicates that AF was paused during face/eye detection AF

Displayed when there is no saved tracking face and a face is not detected, or when there is a saved tracking face but the tracking target

face is not detected.

Zoom position indicator

Displays the zoom position in the range 0 (wide angle) to 99 (telephoto) (if a lens that supports zoom position display

is attached).

You can also change the indicator to a bar display or focal length display using the [Technical] > [Lens] > [Zoom

Position Display] setting in the camera menu.

The following items are added to the display when Clear Image Zoom is enabled.

10.

For details about zoom, see “Setting the Zoom Type” and other topics in “Adjusting the Zoom.”

Display MeaningDisplay Meaning

(Clear Image Zoom is enabled) Clear Image Zoom is enabled

Magnification value When using Clear Image Zoom

Image stabilization mode indicator11.

SDI output/HDMI output Rec Control status indicator

Displays the output status of the REC control signal.

For details, see “Connecting External Monitors and Recording Devices.”

12.

Focus indicator

For details, see “Using Single-Shot Auto Focus (Push Auto Focus (AF-S))” in “Adjusting the Focus.”

13.

Remaining media capacity indicator

(protect) icon appears if the memory card is write-protected.

14.

White balance mode indicator15.

Display Meaning

(ATW) Auto mode

(ATW Hold) Auto mode paused

W:P Preset mode

W:A Memory A mode

Timecode external lock indicator/time data display

Displays “EXT-LK” when locked to the timecode of an external device.

For details about timecode, see “Specifying Time Data.”

16.

ND filter indicator

For details about ND filters, see “Adjusting the Light Level (ND Filter).”

For details about bokeh control, see “Adjusting the Bokeh (Bokeh Control Function).”

17.

Display Meaning

(A) Auto mode

(B) Bokeh control mode

Scene file indicator

For details about scene files, see “Look Overview” and other topics in “Shooting with the Desired Look.”

18.

Iris indicator

Displays the iris position (F value) (if a lens that supports iris setting display is attached).

19.

For details about the iris, see “Adjusting the Iris Automatically” and “Adjusting the Iris Manually.”

Video level warning indicator20.

Gain indicator

Displays the EI value when in Cine EI mode.

For details about the gain, see “Adjusting the Gain Automatically” and “Adjusting the Gain Manually.”

For details about Cine EI mode, see “Setting the shooting mode” in “Configuring Basic Operation.”

21.

Display Meaning

(A) Auto mode

L Preset L mode

(Temporary adjustment mode) Temporary adjustment mode

(B) Bokeh control mode

Clip name display

Displays the name of the clip being recorded or to record next.

22.

Shutter indicator

For details about the shutter, see “Adjusting the Shutter Automatically” and “Adjusting the Shutter Manually.”

23.

AE mode/AE level indicator

For details about auto exposure (AE), see “Setting the Target Level for Automatic Brightness Adjustment.”

24.

Spirit level indicator

Displays the horizontal level in ±1° increments up to ±15°.

25.

Audio level meter

Displays the audio level of each channel.

26.

Video signal monitor

Displays a waveform, vectorscope, and histogram.

The orange line indicates the set value of the brightness level marker.

In Cine EI mode, it displays the LUT type of the signal being monitored.

For details, see “Video Signal Monitor.”

For details about Cine EI mode, see “Setting the shooting mode” in “Configuring Basic Operation.”

27.

Base Sensitivity indicator/Base ISO indicator

In Custom mode, it displays the base sensitivity set using the [ISO/Gain / Exposure Index] button in the camera basic

configuration panel or [Shooting] > [ISO/Gain/EI] > [Base Sensitivity] in the camera menu.

In Cine EI mode, it displays the Base ISO sensitivity set using the [ISO/Gain / Exposure Index] button in the camera

basic configuration panel or [Shooting] > [ISO/Gain/EI] > [Base ISO] in the camera menu.

For details about the base sensitivity, see “Selecting the Base Sensitivity.”

For details about Cine EI mode, see “Setting the shooting mode” in “Configuring Basic Operation.”

28.

Monitoring look indicator

In Cine EI mode, it displays the monitor LUT setting.

For details about the LUT setting, see “Shooting with Look Adjustment in Post-Production” and related topics.

29.

Information displayed on the screen during playback

The following information is superimposed on the playback picture.

For details about Cine EI mode, see “Setting the shooting mode” in “Configuring Basic Operation.”

Base look/recording look indicator

Displays the base look setting.

In Cine EI mode, it displays the video signal to record on the memory cards.

For details about the base look, see “Look Overview” in “Shooting with the Desired Look.”

For details about Cine EI mode, see “Setting the shooting mode” in “Configuring Basic Operation.”

30.

Proxy status indicator31.

Recording format (codec) indicator

Displays the name of the format for recording on the memory cards.

Set the recording format (codec) using [Project] > [Rec Format] > [Codec] in the web menu or camera menu.

32.

Recording format (frame rate and scan method) indicator33.

Recording format (picture size) indicator

Displays the picture size for recording on the memory cards.

Set the recording format (picture size) using [Project] > [Rec Format] > [Codec] in the web menu or camera menu.

34.

Tally indicator

Displays a red frame or green frame around the image according to the received external tally signal.

35.

Upload indicator/remaining files indicator1.

Clip number/total number of clips2.

Playback status indicator3.

Playback format (frame rate and scan method) indicator4.

Playback format (picture size) indicator5.

Playback format (codec) indicator6.

Media indicator

(protect) icon appears if the memory card is write-protected.

Time data display8.

Clip name display9.

Gamma display assist indicator10.

Audio level meter

Displays the playback audio level.

11.

Base look/recording look indicator12.

Tally indicator13.

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Mounting Upright in a Fixed Location

This topic describes mounting the unit on a desktop or tripod.

Installation note

To protect the lens and the lens connector block of the unit, keep the lens and the cap or cover of the unit attached

until you attach the lens.

To prevent lens failure, do not hold the lens parts while working.

To prevent unit failure, do not hold the camera head while working.

Check the mounting space.

When mounting on a desktop

Mount this unit on a flat surface, taking into consideration the space required for turning the lens and the wiring at

the rear of the unit.

Note

Mount it in a stable location that is not subject to vibration. Locations subject to vibration may cause vibration in the image.

If the unit must be mounted on an inclined surface, keep it within ±15° of the horizontal and take measures to prevent the

unit from falling.

When mounting on a tripod

Attach the tripod to the tripod mounting screw hole on the bottom.

Use a tripod mounting screw with the following amount of protrusion from the mounting surface, and tighten it with a

hand screwdriver.

A: Tripod mounting screws 1/4-20 UNC, ISO 1222 (6.35 mm)

B: Protrusion (4.5 mm to 5.5 mm)

Next, attach the lens. See “Attaching a Lens,” taking into account the information in “Precautions when

Attaching/Removing a Lens,” “Checking the Lens Switches,” and “Precautions When Using a Zoom Lens.”

5-041-957-11(1)

Do not use tripod screws for mounting the unit in a high location.

Note

Select a tripod that will not tip over even when the lens turns.

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Mounting Upright in a High, Fixed Location

This topic describes the procedure for mounting the unit upright in a high location using the ceiling bracket (CIB-PCM1

(option)).

To mount the unit in a high location, ask a professional contractor.

When mounting in a high location, make sure that the mounting surface and mounting material (excluding

accessories) can support 200 kg (440 lb 14.8 oz) or more, and mount the unit as described in this Help Guide. If the

mounting is not sturdy enough, the unit may fall and cause serious injury.

Attach the supplied fall prevention wire rope to the CIB-PCM1 Ceiling Bracket (option) to prevent the unit from falling.

When the unit is mounted in a high location, check that the mounting has not become loose once a year. Shorten the

inspection interval according to the usage conditions.

Installation note

To protect the lens and the lens connector block of the unit, keep the lens cap and cover on until the lens is attached.

To prevent lens failure, do not hold the lens parts while working.

To prevent unit failure, do not hold the camera head while working.

Check the high-location mounting accessories and mounting space.

CIB-PCM1 ceiling bracket kit (option)

Before you start, check that you have the following parts.

Body bracket (1)

Ceiling bracket (1)

Lens release button cover (1)

Fall prevention wire rope (1)

+PSW M3×8 screws (9)

+PSW M4x8 stainless steel screw for fall prevention wire rope (1)

Note

The fall prevention wire rope is designed to support the unit when suspended. Do not apply any load to it other than the

load of the unit.

Mounting space

Refer to the following drawing when determining the mounting location and direction, taking into consideration the

space required for turning the lens and the wiring at the rear of the unit.

A: Camera head range of movement (e.g. SEL70200GM2 (with SEL20TC attached): Ø340)

B: Ceiling bracket (hole on mounting surface side (Ø60))

C: Mounting alignment hole

Note

Mount it in a stable location that is not subject to vibration. Locations subject to vibration may cause vibration in the image.

If the unit must be mounted on an inclined surface, keep it within ±15° of the horizontal and take measures to prevent the

unit from falling.

Slide the pan/tilt lock lever to the LOCK position to lock the pan/tilt of the camera head.

Note

If the camera head pan/tilt does not lock when the lock lever is in the LOCK position, move the camera head manually until

it locks in position.

Attach the body bracket to the bottom of the unit using the six supplied screws (M3×8).

Use the supplied screws. The use of screws other than the supplied screws may damage the interior of the unit.

Attach the fall prevention wire rope to the body bracket.

A: Supplied wire rope

B: Supplied Phillips screw (M4×8)

C: Wire rope metal loop

Use the supplied screw. The use of a screw other than the supplied screw may reduce the effectiveness of the wire

rope function.

Attach the ceiling bracket to the surface, such as a shelf, where the unit will be mounted.

A: Wall

B: △ mark (camera forward direction)

C: Hole for connection cables

D: Shelf or other mounting surface

Attach the fall prevention wire rope to a point near the mounting surface.

Use an M5 (3/16 inch) hexagon socket head cap screw (option) and attach it to an object near the shelf or surface

to which the ceiling bracket is attached.

A: Wire rope

B: Hexagon socket head cap screw (M5, 3/16 inch)

Align the 〇 screw hole at the front of the body bracket with the ◇ hole of the ceiling bracket, insert the

unit, and temporarily fix the body bracket in the ceiling bracket by turning the unit clockwise.

A: 〇 hole

B: ◇ hole

Attach the body bracket and ceiling bracket using the three supplied rotation lock screws (M3×8).

Next, attach the lens. See “Attaching a Lens,” taking into account the information in “Precautions when

Attaching/Removing a Lens,” “Checking the Lens Switches,” and “Precautions When Using a Zoom Lens.”

Note

After attaching a lens, check that the lens is securely attached.

The lens does not have any protection against falling. Sony can assume no liability for a lens falling from the unit.

5-041-957-11(1)

Check the mounting status.

Specifically, check the following items.

Mounting screws are correctly attached.

Fall prevention wire rope is correctly attached and is not twisted.

Unit is mounted level (without tilt or wobble).

Unit does not spin freely when turned.

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Mounting on a Ceiling

This topic describes the procedure for mounting the unit on a ceiling using the ceiling bracket (CIB-PCM1 (option)).

To mount the unit on a ceiling, ask a professional contractor.

When mounting on a ceiling, make sure that the mounting surface and mounting material (excluding accessories)

can support 200 kg (440 lb 14.8 oz) or more, and mount the unit as described in this Help Guide. If the mounting is

not sturdy enough, the unit may fall and cause serious injury.

Attach the supplied fall prevention wire rope to the CIB-PCM1 Ceiling Bracket (option) to prevent the unit from falling.

When the unit is mounted on a ceiling, check that the mounting has not become loose once a year. Shorten the

inspection interval according to the usage conditions.

Installation note

To protect the lens and the lens connector block of the unit, keep the lens cap and cover on until the lens is attached.

To prevent lens failure, do not hold the lens parts while working.

To prevent unit failure, do not hold the camera head while working.

Check the ceiling mounting accessories and mounting space.

CIB-PCM1 ceiling bracket kit (option)

Before you start, check that you have the following parts.

Body bracket (1)

Ceiling bracket (1)

Lens release button cover (1)

Fall prevention wire rope (1)

+PSW M3×8 screws (9)

+PSW M4×8 stainless steel screw for fall prevention wire rope (1)

Note

The fall prevention wire rope is designed to support the unit when suspended. Do not apply any load to it other than the

load of the unit.

Mounting space

Refer to the following drawing when determining the mounting location and direction, taking into consideration the

space required for turning the lens and the wiring at the rear of the unit.

A: Camera head range of movement (e.g. SEL70200GM2 (with SEL20TC attached): Ø340)

B: Ceiling bracket (hole on ceiling side (Ø60))

C: Mounting alignment hole

Note

Mount on a ceiling (such as concrete) with sufficient strength.

To mount the unit on a ceiling with insufficient strength, provide sufficient reinforcement.

Mount it in a stable location that is not subject to vibration. Locations subject to vibration may cause vibration in the image.

If the unit must be mounted on an inclined surface, keep it within ±15° of the horizontal and take measures to prevent the

unit from falling.

The side opposite the △ hole on the ceiling bracket is the shooting direction (camera front side).

Slide the pan/tilt lock lever to the UNLOCK position to unlock pan/tilt and turn the camera head by 180° in

the tilt direction.

Slide the pan/tilt lock lever to the LOCK position to lock the pan/tilt of the camera head.

Camera head turned by 180°

Note

If the camera head pan/tilt does not lock when the lock lever is in the LOCK position, move the camera head manually until

it locks in position.

Attach the body bracket to the bottom of the unit using the six supplied screws (M3×8).

Use the supplied screws. The use of screws other than the supplied screws may damage the interior of the unit.

Attach the ceiling bracket to a mounting plate (option), and then attach the plate to the ceiling.

A: Ceiling bracket

B: Ceiling

C: Mounting plate

D: △ hole

Attach the bracket, according to the orientation of the ceiling bracket

Note that when mounted on a ceiling, the front of the camera is on the opposite side of the ceiling bracket in

comparison to a normal upright mounting. Mount correctly by referring to the diagram indicating the mounting

direction.

A: Front for upright mounting (△ hole orientation)

B: Front for ceiling mounting

Note

The mounting surface material is the responsibility of the customer.

Attach the fall prevention wire rope to the ceiling.

A: Ceiling bracket

B: Hexagon socket head cap screw (M5, 3/16 inch)

C: Wire rope (supplied)

D: Mounting plate

E: Ceiling

Pull the fall prevention wire rope through the hole in the center of the ceiling bracket, and attach it to the

body bracket.

Route the fall prevention wire rope through the wire rope metal loop of the body bracket and attach it securely to the

bracket using the supplied stainless steel screw (M4×8).

A: Supplied wire rope

B: Supplied Phillips screw (M4×8)

C: Wire rope metal loop

Use the supplied screw. The use of a screw other than the supplied screw may reduce the effectiveness of the wire

rope function.

Note

It is recommended that one person holds the unit as shown in the following diagram while another person mounts the unit.

Do not hold the camera head or lens support while mounting the unit. There is a risk of damage or injury if the unit is

dropped or falls.

Take care when wiring that electrical connectors and cables do not become short-circuited by the fall prevention wire rope.

The mount can support a suspended mass of up to 8.8 kg (19 lb 6.4 oz) (including the lens). To prevent the unit falling, do

not exceed the maximum expected mass.

Align the screw hole (A) on the body bracket with the ◇ hole (B) on the ceiling bracket, insert the unit and

turn it about 60 degrees clockwise until the screw hole (A) and the screw hole (C) are aligned.

A: Screw hole on the body bracket

B: Screw hole on the ceiling bracket (◇ hole)

C: Screw hole

D: Ceiling

E: Mounting plate

Attach the body bracket and ceiling bracket using the three supplied rotation lock screws (M3×8).

Next, attach the lens. See “Attaching a Lens,” taking into account the information in “Precautions when

Attaching/Removing a Lens,” “Checking the Lens Switches,” and “Precautions When Using a Zoom Lens.”

Note

To operate the pan/tilt correctly when the unit is mounted on a ceiling, set [Pan-Tilt] > [Direction] > [Ceiling] to [On] in the web

menu.

After attaching a lens, check that the lens is securely attached.

The lens does not have any protection against falling. Sony can assume no liability for a lens falling from the unit.

5-041-957-11(1)

Check the mounting status.

Specifically, check the following items.

Mounting screws are correctly attached.

Fall prevention wire rope is correctly attached and is not twisted.

Unit is mounted level (without tilt or wobble).

Unit does not spin freely when turned.

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Precautions when Attaching/Removing a Lens

Do not leave the lens facing the sun. Direct sunlight can enter through the lens, be focused in the unit, and may cause a

fire.

Note

Attach/remove a lens while the unit is turned off.

A lens is a precision component. Do not place the lens on a surface with the lens mount face down. Attach the supplied lens

mount cap.

Hint

For details about lenses supported by the unit, contact your Sony service representative.

5-041-957-11(1)

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Checking the Lens Switches

The following checks and settings are required, depending on the type of lens.

For a lens with a zoom switch

Set the switch to SERVO.

If the switch is set to MANUAL, the zoom can only be adjusted using the zoom ring. Zoom control from the unit has no

effect.

For a lens with a focus mode switch

Set the switch to AF/MF or AF.

If the switch is set to MF, the focus can only be adjusted using the lens ring or adjusted manually from a remote control

unit. If the switch is set to Full MF, the focus can only be adjusted using the lens ring.

Note

When using an A-mount lens, manual adjustment from a remote control unit may not be available.

For a lens with an Auto Iris switch

Set the switch to AUTO.

When not set to AUTO, the iris can only be adjusted using the lens ring. Iris operation from the unit has no effect.

For a lens with an image stabilization switch

Set the switch to OFF.

If the switch is set to ON, unexpected behavior may occur during pan/tilt operation.

SELP28135G

A: Set the ZOOM switch to SERVO.

B: Move the focus ring to the forward position (AF/MF mode).

C: Set the image stabilizer switch to OFF.

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Precautions When Using a Zoom Lens

When using a zoom lens other than a power zoom lens, the zoom position may change depending on the mounting

environment. Secure the zoom ring in position using tape according to the purpose of use.

Plastic film tape: 471 BLA 50 or equivalent

5-041-957-11(1)

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Attaching a Lens

This topic describes how to attach an E-mount lens or A-mount lens.

Note

When using an A-mount lens, the iris is set manually and focus is set to MF.

Slide the pan/tilt lock lever to the LOCK position to lock the pan/tilt of the camera head.

Note

If the camera head pan/tilt does not lock when the lock lever is in the LOCK position, move the camera head manually until

it locks in position.

Turn the clamp lever for the lens support pedestal attachment screw counterclockwise to loosen the lock,

then move the lens support pedestal attachment screw to a position that does not interfere with the lens.

A: Correct

B: Incorrect

Turn the camera head lock lever in the direction of the arrow to unlock the camera head.

Note

Until the camera head is locked again, there is a risk that the camera head may move under its own weight. Support the

camera head with your hand while performing the task.

Slide the camera head to the frontmost position.

Turn the camera head lock lever in the direction of the arrow to lock the camera head.

Remove the cap and cover from the unit and the lens.

Align the lens mount mark (white) with the unit, carefully insert the lens into the camera head, and then

turn the lens clockwise until it clicks into the locked position.

A: Mount marks (white)

Note

To use an A-mount lens, attach a lens mount adaptor (option) to the unit and then attach the A-mount lens.

Turn the camera head lock lever in the direction of the arrow to unlock the camera head.

Note

Until the camera head is locked again, there is a risk that the camera head may move under its own weight. Support the

camera head with your hand while performing the task.

Maintain the forward/rearward balance of the camera head so that the slide base is horizontal.

If you are using one of the following lenses, you can roughly balance the unit and lens by referring to the scale on

the slide base.

Scale position Lens name

0.5 SEL70200GM (with SEL20TC attached)

1.7 SEL70200GM

2.0 SEL70200GM2 (with SEL20TC attached)

3.0 SELP28135G, SEL70200GM2

3.5 SELP18110G

3.6 SELC1635G

4.3 SEL70200G

Note

Use the slide base scale as a reference for rough balance.

While attaching the lens, make appropriate adjustments to the balance so that the unit does not tilt back and forth.

Adjust the balance on a horizontal surface.

Scale position Lens name

5.0 or higher SEL1224GM, SEL1635GM, SELP1635G, SELP18105G, SELP1020G

Turn the camera head lock lever in the direction of the arrow to lock the camera head.

Turn the lens support clamp levers counterclockwise to loosen the lens support unit.

A: Lens support rod clamp lever (2 places)

B: Lens support unit

Move the lens support unit so that the lens support pedestal is aligned with the lens support pedestal

attachment screw, then turn the screw clockwise to secure the lens support pedestal.

Note

Make sure the lens support pedestal is perpendicular to the lens support pedestal attachment screw, and then tighten.

Turn the clamp lever for the lens support pedestal attachment screw clockwise to lock the lens support

pedestal attachment screw.

A: Lens support pedestal attachment screw

B: Attachment screw hole

C: Lens support pedestal attachment screw clamp lever

Hint

If a clamp lever is in a position that makes it difficult to turn, release the clamp lever and rotate it to an angle that will make

operation easier. When in the desired position, close the clamp lever.

A: Lens support pedestal attachment screw clamp lever

B: Lens support rod clamp lever

Turn the two lens support rod clamp levers clockwise to secure the lens support unit.

Check that both levers are tightened and not loose, the lens is attached correctly, and that the lens

switches are set correctly.

If a lever is loose or the lens is not attached correctly, the lens may fall and become damaged.

When using an E-mount power zoom lens, the lens must also be calibrated separately to accurately restore the

zoom positions stored in the camera as preset positions. For details, see “Calibrating an E-Mount Lens.”

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Removing a Lens

Remove a lens using the reverse procedure of attaching the lens.

Note

Grasp the lens securely in your hand to prevent the lens from falling.

If another lens will not be attached immediately, always attach the body cap.

5-041-957-11(1)

Check that the pin/tilt is locked.

Turn the clamp lever for the lens support pedestal attachment screw counterclockwise to loosen the lock.

Remove the lens support pedestal attachment screw on the lens support unit and move it to a position that

does not interfere with the lens.

Unlock the camera head and slide the camera head to the frontmost position.

For details, see steps 3 to 5 in “Attaching a Lens.”

Press and hold the lens release button and turn the lens counterclockwise while supporting the lens.

With the mount marks (white) of the camera and the lens aligned, pull out the lens toward the front.

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Connecting Cables

This topic describes cable connections.

5-041-957-11(1)

Connect the required cables to the connectors on the rear panel.

To prevent the HDMI cable from being removed, remove the HDMI cable retaining plate mounting screw (M2.6×6,

black) from the connector block and attach the supplied HDMI cable retaining plate using the mounting screw.

Secure the HDMI cable to the HDMI cable retaining plate using a commercially available cable tie or band.

A: HDMI cable retaining plate mounting screw (M2.6×6, black)

B: Commercially available cable tie or band

C: HDMI cable retaining plate (supplied)

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Connecting the Unit to a Network Device Via Wired Connection

This topic describes connecting the unit to a network device via a wired connection.

5-041-957-11(1)

Connect the unit to a network device (such as a Wi-Fi access point or switching hub) using a Category 5e

or higher LAN cable.

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Using AC Power

This topic describes the procedure to power the unit using AC power.

Slide the pan/tilt lock lever to the LOCK position to lock the pan/tilt of the camera head.

Connect the AC adaptor (supplied) to the DC IN connector on the unit, and connect the power cord

(supplied) to an AC power source.

A: DC IN connector

B: Power cord

C: AC adaptor

Secure the AC adaptor cord using the cord clamper if you want to prevent the cord from being

disconnected.

Unlock the cord clamper, route the cord through the clamper as shown below, and lock the clamper.

Note

Do not use any AC adaptor or power cord, other than those provided with the unit. Connecting another adaptor or power cord

may cause a fire or malfunction.

Do not connect and use an AC adaptor in a confined space, such as between a wall and furniture.

Do not short-circuit the metal parts of the plug of the AC adaptor. Doing so may cause a malfunction.

Connect the AC adaptor to the nearest AC power source. If a problem occurs during operation, immediately disconnect the

power cord from the AC power source.

A: Cord clamper

B: Cord clamper lock

C: AC adaptor cord

Check that the POWER lamp on the front of the unit changes from blinking green to solid green and that

startup has finished.

When the unit has started normally and connected to the network, the NETWORK lamp will light up green.

When using a lens that does not support pan/tilt operation, lock the pan/tilt lock lever and skip the following

steps. For details about lenses that support pan/tilt, contact your dealer or Sony service representative.

Slide the pan/tilt lock lever to the UNLOCK position to unlock the pan/tilt of the camera head.

Reset the pan/tilt.

For details, see “Resetting the Pan/Tilt.”

When disconnecting the AC adaptor from the unit, grasp the plug and pull it straight out. Pulling on the cable may cause a

malfunction.

5-041-957-11(1)

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Using PoE++ Power

When the unit is connected to a PoE++ compatible power delivery device, power is supplied to the unit via a

commercially available network cable.

This method enables power to be supplied to the unit without the need for power supply wiring in environments where

there is no power supply outlet near the mounting location.

Note

When power is supplied by PoE++, the recording and playback functions cannot be used with the recording media inserted in the

unit.

Slide the pan/tilt lock lever to the LOCK position to lock the pan/tilt of the camera head.

Connect the unit and a PoE++ compatible power delivery device using a commercially available network

cable.

A: Network cable

B: PoE++ compatible power delivery device

Note

The unit conforms to IEEE802.3bt Type 4 Class 8. For details about verified compatible PoE++ power delivery devices, contact

your dealer or Sony service representative.

The unit is compliant with soft authentication (LLDP), but it may be necessary to configure network devices (IEEE802.3bt

compliant).

Do not connect an AC adaptor when using PoE++ power delivery with soft authentication (LLDP) enabled.

If an AC adaptor and PoE++ power delivery device are connected at the same time, power is supplied from the AC adaptor.

When supplying power via PoE++, use a Category 5e or higher network cable.

Wait about 10 seconds after turning the unit on again when powered via PoE++.

When using PoE++ power delivery, connect the ground terminal to ground.

When connecting via PoE++ power delivery, do not run wiring outdoors.

5-041-957-11(1)

Check that the POWER lamp on the front of the unit changes from blinking green to solid green and that

startup has finished.

When the unit has started normally and connected to the network, the NETWORK lamp will light up green.

Note

When power is supplied by PoE++, initial authentication is performed during the interval until startup has finished.

When using a lens that does not support pan/tilt operation, lock the pan/tilt lock lever and skip the following steps. For

details about lenses that support pan/tilt, contact your dealer or Sony service representative.

Slide the pan/tilt lock lever to the UNLOCK position to unlock the pan/tilt of the camera head.

Reset the pan/tilt.

For details, see “Resetting the Pan/Tilt.”

100

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Resetting the Pan/Tilt

You can reset the pan/tilt, for example, when you replace the lens, using the following procedure.

5-041-957-11(1)

Slide the pan/tilt lock lever to the UNLOCK position and check that the pan/tilt of the camera head is

unlocked.

Execute the pan/tilt reset function.

Pan/tilt reset can be executed from the infrared remote control, Web App, or the RM-IP500 Remote Controller

(option).

Operation using the infrared remote control: Press the P/T RESET button.

Operation using the Web App: Press the [Pan-Tilt Reset] button on the

(Others) tab on the live operation

screen.

Operation using the RM-IP500: Refer to the operating instructions for the RM-IP500.

Note

Executing pan/tilt reset causes the camera head and lens to turn. Check that the lens is not obstructed before executing.

The unit has a function that limits the pan/tilt range, but this function is disabled when the unit is turned on or pan/tilt reset is

executed.

Hint

When pan/tilt reset is completed, the unit returns to the pre-execution position.

101

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Accessing the Web App from a Web Browser

By connecting the unit to a tablet or computer, you can operate and configure the unit from a web browser.

Check whether your tablet or computer supports Web App operations.

Note

If the required environment is not satisfied, or depending on the usage of the tablet/computer, video display in a web

browser may be adversely affected.

The Web App of this unit uses JavaScript. If using antivirus software on your tablet/computer, the web page may not be

displayed correctly.

Item Requirement

Display

1080×810 pixels or higher recommended

Tablet display size: 10-inch or larger

recommended

Supported OS and web

browser

Windows

OS Windows 10 or later

Web

browser

Google Chrome

Mac

OS macOS 10.15 or later

Web

browser

Google Chrome

Safari

iPad

OS iPadOS 15 or later

Web

browser

Google Chrome

Safari

Android

OS Android 12 or later

Web

browser

Google Chrome

Check that the unit, tablet or computer, and peripheral devices are turned on.

Check that the unit and tablet or computer are connected via Wi-Fi or wired LAN local area connection.

Connect to the unit from the web browser of your tablet or computer.

Connecting using a QR code

Scan the QR code printed on the media cover on the side of the unit using the camera of the tablet.

102

Note

If the HTTP port number was changed from a value of 80, enter “http://IP address of the unit:Port number” in the address bar.

When connecting using a QR code or by entering the URL in the address bar of a web browser, use a device that supports

mDNS

Hint

You can subsequently access the unit quickly using the bookmark function of the web browser.

5-041-957-11(1)

Open the displayed link on the tablet.

The web browser on the tablet launches and displays the Web App screen of the unit.

Connecting by entering a URL in the address bar of a web browser

Launch a web browser on the tablet or computer, and enter the URL printed on the media cover on the side of the

unit.

The web browser should display the Web App screen of the unit.

Connecting by entering the IP address of the unit in the address bar of a web browser

Launch a web browser on your tablet or computer and enter “http://IP address of the unit” in the address bar.

The web browser should display the Web App screen of the unit.

mDNS: A communication protocol used to determine the IP address from a host name on a local network.

103

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Initializing the Unit

Make sure to configure the unit using the following procedure when using the unit for the first time.

Hint

If the backup battery becomes completely discharged, you will need to configure the initial setup again.

Connect to the unit from a tablet or computer, and launch the Web App.

When the unit is used for the first time, you will be prompted to enter a user name and password in the web

browser. Enter the following settings.

User name: admin

Password: (leave blank)

Follow the on-screen instructions to configure the initial setup.

Enter the administrator (Administrator) user name and password, and press the [OK] button.

1: Enter the administrator user name.

2: Set the administrator password.

3: Enter the same password again for confirmation.

Note

The following characters can be used in the user name and password. The password must include at least one upper case

letter, one lower case letter, one number, and be 8 to 64 characters in length.

Alphanumeric characters

Symbols (!$%`*+-./<=>?@[]^_{|}~)

104

The live screen for shooting operations appears. Continue to configure the basic operation of the unit according to the

operation mode.

5-041-957-11(1)

Your web browser will reload and you will be prompted to enter the user name and password.

Enter the user name and password that were configured in step 2.

The language and clock setup screen appears.

Specify the following items and press the [OK] button.

[Language]

Select the language to use for the Web App and camera screen display. Changing the language will change the

Web App display language.

[Date & Time Format]

Select the display format for the date and time from the following options.

[yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss], [mm-dd-yyyy hh:mm:ss], [dd-mm-yyyy hh:mm:ss]

[y] indicates the year, [m] indicates the month, [d] indicates the day, [h] indicates the hour, [m] indicates the minute,

and [s] indicates the second, respectively.

[12 h/24 h]

Select [12 h] (12-hour clock) or [24 h] (24-hour clock) for the time display.

[Time Setting]

Select the method for setting the date/time.

[Synchronize with PC]: Synchronize to the date/time of the computer or tablet.

[Manual setting]: Set manually. When this method is selected, entry fields for the date and time appear.

[Time Zone]

Select the time zone.

105

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Configuring Basic Operation

This topic describes how to configure the unit for basic operations.

Setting the shooting mode

You can switch the shooting mode between “Custom mode” to create images flexibly while shooting, and “Cine EI mode”

to operate the unit similarly to a film camera with footage developed in post production.

Switch the shooting mode using [Project] > [Base Setting] > [Shooting Mode] in the web menu or camera menu.

Custom mode

In Custom shooting mode, you can select the video standard.

Switch using [Project] > [Base Setting] > [Target Display] in the web menu or camera menu.

[SDR(BT.709)]: Shooting according to HD broadcast standard

[HDR(HLG)]: Shooting according to next generation 4K broadcast standard

For details, see “Look Overview” and other topics in “Shooting with the Desired Look.”

Cine EI mode

When the shooting mode is set to Cine EI mode, select the base color space for the recording signal and output signal.

The color space selected here is the color space of the video output when [MLUT] is set to [Off].

Switch using [Project] > [Cine EI Setting] > [Color Gamut] in the camera menu.

[S-Gamut3.Cine/SLog3]: Easy to adjust color gamut for digital cinema (DCI-P3).

[S-Gamut3/SLog3]: Sony wide color gamut that covers the ITU-R BT.2020 color space.

For details, see “Shooting with Look Adjustment in Post-Production.”

Note

In Cine EI mode, the following functions cannot be adjusted automatically (tracking).

White balance

Gain

Shutter

In Cine EI mode, settings for the following functions cannot be changed.

ISO sensitivity/gain (set to base ISO sensitivity (fixed))

[Paint/Look] menu settings (excluding Base Look)

Scene File (disabled)

The following functions are available in Cine EI mode only.

Monitor LUT

Exposure Index

Hint

In Cine EI mode, shooting occurs at a base ISO sensitivity without using gain in order to maximize the performance of the image

sensor. The brightness is adjusted using lighting and the ND filter to adjust the amount of light that reaches the image sensor.

Setting the system frequency

106

Switch using [Project] > [Rec Format] > [Frequency] in the web menu or camera menu. The unit may reboot

automatically after switching, depending on the selected value.

Note

You cannot switch the system frequency during recording or playback.

Setting the imager scan mode

You can set the effective picture size and resolution of the image sensor.

Switch using [Project] > [Rec Format] > [Imager Scan Mode] in the web menu or camera menu.

[FF]: Full-frame size.

[S35]: Super 35mm size.

Note

You cannot switch the imager scan mode during recording or playback.

When set to S35, the video format is restricted to 1920×1080.

Setting the codec

You can set the codec for recording.

Switch using [Project] > [Rec Format] > [Codec] in the web menu or camera menu.

Note

You cannot switch the codec during recording or playback.

Setting the video format

You can set the video format for recording and the output format for output from the camera.

Switch the video format for recording using [Project] > [Rec Format] > [Video Format] in the web menu or camera

menu.

Switch the output format from the SDI OUT and HDMI OUT connectors using [Monitoring] > [Output Format] in the

web menu or camera menu.

Note

You cannot switch the video format during recording or playback.

Restrictions may apply to the signal from the SDI OUT and HDMI OUT connectors, depending on the video format setting.

5-041-957-11(1)

107

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Supported Memory Cards

The unit records audio and video on CFexpress Type A memory cards (available separately) or SDXC memory cards

(available separately) inserted in the card slots. The memory cards are also used for proxy recording.

CFexpress Type A memory cards

Use the Sony CFexpress Type A memory cards

listed in “Recommended media” in the unit.

For details on operations with media from other manufacturers, refer to the operating instructions for the media or

consult the manufacturer’s information.

SDXC memory cards

Use the SDXC memory cards

listed in “Recommended media” in the unit.

Recommended media

The guaranteed operating conditions will vary depending on the Rec Format and Recording settings.

CFexpress Type A

VPG400-compliant

Supported for all recording formats of the unit.

SDXC

Supported under the conditions in the following table. “Yes” indicates operation has been verified, and “No” indicates that

operation is not guaranteed.

RAW Out & XAVC-I, 4096×2160 Class 300, Normal mode

RAW Out & XAVC-I, 3840×2160 Class 300, Normal mode

Referred to as “CFexpress cards” in this Help Guide.

Referred to as “SD cards” in this Help Guide.

System frequency Class 10 U1 U3 VSC V10 VSC V30 VSC V60 VSC V90

59.94P No No No No No No Yes

50P No No No No No No Yes

29.97P No No No No No Yes Yes

25P No No No No No Yes Yes

24P No No No No No Yes Yes

23.98P No No No No No Yes Yes

System frequency Class 10 U1 U3 VSC V10 VSC V30 VSC V60 VSC V90

59.94P No No No No No No Yes

108

RAW Out & XAVC-I, 3840×2160 Class 300, S&Q (60 fps or lower)

RAW Out & XAVC-I, 3840×2160 Class 300, S&Q (100 fps, 120 fps)

Verified media not available.

XAVC-I, 4096×2160 Class 300, Normal mode

XAVC-I, 4096×2160 Class 300, S&Q (60 fps or lower)

System frequency Class 10 U1 U3 VSC V10 VSC V30 VSC V60 VSC V90

50P No No No No No No Yes

29.97P No No No No No Yes Yes

25P No No No No No Yes Yes

23.98P No No No No No Yes Yes

System frequency Class 10 U1 U3 VSC V10 VSC V30 VSC V60 VSC V90

59.94P No No No No No No Yes

50P No No No No No No Yes

29.97P No No No No No No Yes

25P No No No No No No Yes

23.98P No No No No No No Yes

System frequency Class 10 U1 U3 VSC V10 VSC V30 VSC V60 VSC V90

59.94P No No No No No No Yes

50P No No No No No No Yes

29.97P No No No No No Yes Yes

25P No No No No No Yes Yes

24P No No No No No Yes Yes

23.98P No No No No No Yes Yes

System frequency Class 10 U1 U3 VSC V10 VSC V30 VSC V60 VSC V90

59.94P No No No No No No Yes

50P No No No No No No Yes

29.97P No No No No No No Yes

25P No No No No No No Yes

24P No No No No No No Yes

23.98P No No No No No No Yes

109

XAVC-I, 3840×2160 Class 300, Normal mode

XAVC-I, 3840×2160 Class 300, S&Q (60 fps or lower)

XAVC-I, 3840×2160 Class 300, S&Q (100 fps, 120 fps)

Verified media not available.

XAVC-I, 1920×1080 Class 100, Normal mode

XAVC-I, 1920×1080 Class 100, S&Q (60 fps or lower)

System frequency Class 10 U1 U3 VSC V10 VSC V30 VSC V60 VSC V90

59.94P No No No No No No Yes

50P No No No No No No Yes

29.97P No No No No No Yes Yes

25P No No No No No Yes Yes

23.98P No No No No No Yes Yes

System frequency Class 10 U1 U3 VSC V10 VSC V30 VSC V60 VSC V90

59.94P No No No No No No Yes

50P No No No No No No Yes

29.97P No No No No No No Yes

25P No No No No No No Yes

23.98P No No No No No No Yes

System frequency Class 10 U1 U3 VSC V10 VSC V30 VSC V60 VSC V90

59.94P No No No No No Yes Yes

50P No No No No No Yes Yes

29.97P No No Yes No Yes Yes Yes

25P No No Yes No Yes Yes Yes

23.98P No No Yes No Yes Yes Yes

System frequency Class 10 U1 U3 VSC V10 VSC V30 VSC V60 VSC V90

59.94P No No No No No Yes Yes

50P No No No No No Yes Yes

29.97P No No No No No Yes Yes

25P No No No No No Yes Yes

23.98P No No No No No Yes Yes

110

XAVC-I, 1920×1080 Class 100, S&Q (100 fps, 120 fps)

XAVC-I, 1920×1080 Class 100, S&Q (150 fps, 180 fps)

Verified media not available.

XAVC-I, 1920×1080 Class 100, S&Q (200 fps, 240 fps)

Verified media not available.

XAVC-L, 3840×2160 420, Normal mode

XAVC-L, 3840×2160 420, S&Q (60 fps or lower)

XAVC-L, 3840×2160 420, S&Q (100 fps, 120 fps)

System frequency Class 10 U1 U3 VSC V10 VSC V30 VSC V60 VSC V90

59.94P No No No No No No Yes

50P No No No No No No Yes

29.97P No No No No No No Yes

25P No No No No No No Yes

23.98P No No No No No No Yes

System frequency Class 10 U1 U3 VSC V10 VSC V30 VSC V60 VSC V90

59.94P No No Yes No Yes Yes Yes

50P No No Yes No Yes Yes Yes

29.97P No No Yes No Yes Yes Yes

25P No No Yes No Yes Yes Yes

23.98P No No Yes No Yes Yes Yes

System frequency Class 10 U1 U3 VSC V10 VSC V30 VSC V60 VSC V90

59.94P No No Yes No Yes Yes Yes

50P No No Yes No Yes Yes Yes

29.97P No No No No No Yes Yes

25P No No No No No Yes Yes

23.98P No No No No No No Yes

System frequency Class 10 U1 U3 VSC V10 VSC V30 VSC V60 VSC V90

59.94P No No No No No Yes Yes

50P No No No No No Yes Yes

111

XAVC-L, 1920×1080 HD50, Normal mode

XAVC-L, 1920×1080 HD50, S&Q (60 fps or lower)

XAVC-L, 1920×1080 HD50, S&Q (100 fps, 120 fps)

XAVC-L, 1920×1080 HD50, S&Q (150 fps, 180 fps)

System frequency Class 10 U1 U3 VSC V10 VSC V30 VSC V60 VSC V90

29.97P No No No No No No Yes

25P No No No No No No Yes

23.98P No No No No No No No

System frequency Class 10 U1 U3 VSC V10 VSC V30 VSC V60 VSC V90

59.94P No No Yes No Yes Yes Yes

50P No No Yes No Yes Yes Yes

29.97P No No Yes No Yes Yes Yes

25P No No Yes No Yes Yes Yes

23.98P No No Yes No Yes Yes Yes

System frequency Class 10 U1 U3 VSC V10 VSC V30 VSC V60 VSC V90

59.94P Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

50P Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

29.97P No No Yes No Yes Yes Yes

25P No No Yes No Yes Yes Yes

23.98P No No Yes No Yes Yes Yes

System frequency Class 10 U1 U3 VSC V10 VSC V30 VSC V60 VSC V90

59.94P No No Yes No Yes Yes Yes

50P No No Yes No Yes Yes Yes

29.97P No No No No No Yes Yes

25P No No No No No Yes Yes

23.98P No No No No No Yes Yes

System frequency Class 10 U1 U3 VSC V10 VSC V30 VSC V60 VSC V90

59.94P No No No No No Yes Yes

50P No No No No No Yes Yes

29.97P No No No No No No Yes

112

XAVC-L, 1920×1080 HD50, S&Q (200 fps, 240 fps)

XAVC-L, 1920×1080 HD35, Normal mode

XAVC-L, 1920×1080 HD35, S&Q (60 fps or lower)

XAVC-L, 1920×1080 HD35, S&Q (100 fps, 120 fps)

System frequency Class 10 U1 U3 VSC V10 VSC V30 VSC V60 VSC V90

25P No No No No No No Yes

23.98P No No No No No No Yes

System frequency Class 10 U1 U3 VSC V10 VSC V30 VSC V60 VSC V90

59.94P No No No No No Yes Yes

50P No No No No No Yes Yes

29.97P No No No No No No Yes

25P No No No No No No Yes

23.98P No No No No No No Yes

System frequency Class 10 U1 U3 VSC V10 VSC V30 VSC V60 VSC V90

59.94P Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

50P Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

29.97P Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

25P Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

23.98P Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

System frequency Class 10 U1 U3 VSC V10 VSC V30 VSC V60 VSC V90

59.94P Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

50P Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

29.97P No No Yes No Yes Yes Yes

25P No No Yes No Yes Yes Yes

23.98P No No Yes No Yes Yes Yes

System frequency Class 10 U1 U3 VSC V10 VSC V30 VSC V60 VSC V90

59.94P No No Yes No Yes Yes Yes

50P No No Yes No Yes Yes Yes

29.97P No No Yes No Yes Yes Yes

25P No No Yes No Yes Yes Yes

113

XAVC-L, 1920×1080 HD35, S&Q (150 fps, 180 fps)

XAVC-L, 1920×1080 HD35, S&Q (200 fps, 240 fps)

5-041-957-11(1)

System frequency Class 10 U1 U3 VSC V10 VSC V30 VSC V60 VSC V90

23.98P No No No No No Yes Yes

System frequency Class 10 U1 U3 VSC V10 VSC V30 VSC V60 VSC V90

59.94P No No Yes No Yes Yes Yes

50P No No Yes No Yes Yes Yes

29.97P No No No No No Yes Yes

25P No No No No No Yes Yes

23.98P No No No No No Yes Yes

System frequency Class 10 U1 U3 VSC V10 VSC V30 VSC V60 VSC V90

59.94P No No Yes No Yes Yes Yes

50P No No Yes No Yes Yes Yes

29.97P No No No No No Yes Yes

25P No No No No No Yes Yes

23.98P No No No No No No Yes

114

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Inserting Memory Cards

This topic describes the precautions when inserting memory cards.

Open the media cover of the card slot section.

Insert a memory card.

For CFexpress cards, the label faces up.

Note

On a ceiling mounted unit, the label faces down.

For SD cards, the label faces down.

Note

On a ceiling mounted unit, the label faces up.

The access indicator is lit red, then changes to green if the card is usable.

115

Note

The memory card, memory card slot, and image data on the memory card may be damaged if the card is forced into the slot in

the incorrect orientation.

When recording to media inserted in both CFexpress Type A / SD card slots A and B, insert media in both slots that is

recommended for operation with the format of the recording.

5-041-957-11(1)

Note

If the access indicator blinks red continuously and does not change to green, temporarily turn off the unit, and remove and

reinsert the memory card.

Close the media cover.

116

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Ejecting a Memory Card

Open the media cover of the card slot section, and lightly press the memory card in to eject the card.

Note

If the unit is turned off or the memory card is removed while the memory card is being accessed, the integrity of data on the card

cannot be guaranteed. All data recorded on the card may be discarded. Always make sure the access indicator is green or off

before turning off the unit or removing the memory card.

When removing a memory card immediately after recording is finished, the memory card may be hot, but this does not indicate a

problem.

5-041-957-11(1)

117

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Formatting (Initializing) Memory Cards

If an unformatted memory card or a memory card that was formatted in a different specification is inserted, the message

“Media Needs to be Formatted” is displayed in the camera image panel.

Format the card using the following procedure.

Note

Formatting a memory card erases all data, including recorded video data and setup files.

Messages may appear during execution depending on the formatting process duration.

If formatting fails

Memory cards not supported by the unit cannot be formatted.

A warning message is displayed. Follow the instructions to replace the card with a supported memory card.

To use a card formatted on the unit in the slot of another device

First, make a backup of the card, then reformat the card in the device to be used.

5-041-957-11(1)

Select [TC/Media] > [Format Media] in the camera menu.

Select Media(A) (slot A) or Media(B) (slot B), then select the formatting method (Full Format or Quick

Format).

A confirmation message appears.

[Full Format]: Initializes the media completely, including the data region and data management information.

[Quick Format]: Initializes the data management information of the media only.

Select [Execute].

A message is displayed while formatting is in progress, and the access indicator is lit red.

When formatting ends, a completion message appears.

118

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Checking the Remaining Recording Time

When shooting (recording/standby), you can monitor the remaining capacity of the memory card in each slot using the

slot A/B remaining media indicators in the camera image panel.

The remaining recording time is calculated from the remaining capacity of the media in each slot and the current

recording format (recording bit rate), and is displayed in units of minutes.

Memory card replacement timing

When the total remaining recording time on the two memory cards becomes less than 5 minutes, the message “Media

Near Full” appears and the recording/tally lamp starts blinking to warn you.

Replace with media that has free space.

If you continue recording until the total remaining recording time reaches zero, the message changes to “Media Full” and

recording stops.

Note

Up to approximately 600 clips can be recorded on one memory card.

5-041-957-11(1)

119

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Restoring Memory Cards

If for any reason an error should occur in a memory card, the card must be restored before use.

When you load a memory card that needs to be restored, a message appears in the camera image panel asking whether

you want to restore it.

To restore a card

Select [Execute] using the arrow buttons in the GUI control panel and press the [Set] button.

A message and progress status (%) are displayed while formatting is in progress, and the access indicator is lit red.

When restoration ends, a completion message appears.

If restoration fails

Memory cards on which memory errors have occurred cannot be restored. A warning message is displayed. Follow

the instructions to replace the memory card.

Memory cards on which memory errors have occurred may become usable if they are reformatted.

In some cases, some clips can be restored while others cannot. The restored clips can be played normally.

Note

For restoration of media recorded with this unit, be sure to use this unit.

Media recorded with a device other than this unit or with another unit of different version (even of the same model) may not be

restored using this unit.

Clips shorter than 2 seconds cannot be restored.

5-041-957-11(1)

120

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Starting/Stopping Recording

This topic describes how to start/stop recording.

Note

Recording and playback are not supported when the unit is powered via PoE++ power delivery.

Attach the necessary devices, and check that power of the unit and peripheral devices is being supplied.

Insert the memory card(s).

Check the power status of the unit at the top left of the Web App screen.

When power supply is on

When the unit is turned on, [Power ON] is displayed on the power switch at the top of the Web App screen.

The POWER lamp lights up on the front of the unit and the camera image appears on the live operation screen of

the Web App.

Note

If the administrator password has not been configured, a screen prompting you to configure the password appears. See

“Initializing the Unit.”

When power supply is in standby state

When the power supply of the unit is in standby state, [Power Standby] is displayed on the power switch in the Web

App.

In this state, press the power switch and select [Power ON]. The unit turns on, the POWER lamp lights up on the

front of the unit, and the camera image appears on the live operation screen of the Web App.

121

To switch the power supply of the unit to standby state

Press the power switch in the Web App and select [Power Standby] to set the power supply of the unit to standby state.

Hint

You can also set the power supply to standby state using the power button on the supplied infrared remote control.

Hint

You can also turn on the unit using the power button on the supplied infrared remote control.

Press the record START/STOP button.

Recording starts, and the recording/tally lamp (2 places) of the unit lights up.

During recording, the record START/STOP button lights. Also, an icon for the target recording media and [●Rec] are

displayed.

To stop recording, press the record START/STOP button again.

Recording stops, and the recording/tally lamp (2 places) of the unit turns off.

During recording standby state, the record START/STOP button is not lit. Also, an icon for the target recording

media and [Stby] are displayed.

Hint

You can also start/stop recording using the record START/STOP button on the supplied infrared remote control.

122

123

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Switching Between Memory Cards

When two memory cards are inserted, you can press the [Slot Select] button on the playback control panel of the Web

App to switch memory cards.

Hint

You can also press the SLOT SEL (memory card slot (A)/(B) select) button on the supplied infrared remote control to switch

memory cards.

About relay recording

When recording, the unit automatically switches to the second memory card just before the remaining capacity on the

first card is reduced to zero (relay recording). You can continue recording continuously when switching memory cards by

replacing the memory card that is full with a new memory card.

Note

You cannot switch between memory cards during playback mode. Also, continuous playback of a clip spanning media in slot A

and slot B is not supported.

About recorded data

When you stop recording, the video, audio, and accompanying data from the start to the end of the recording are saved

as a single “clip” on a memory card.

Clip name of recorded data

The name of each clip recorded by the unit is automatically assigned using [TC/Media] > [Clip Name Format] in the

camera menu.

Maximum clip duration

Up to 6 hours per clip.

The maximum duration of continuous recording is the same as the maximum duration of a clip. If the recording time

exceeds the maximum duration of a clip, a new clip is created automatically and recording continues. The new clip

appears as a separate clip on the thumbnail screen.

Multiple clips are recorded in succession during relay recording, but recording will stop automatically after approximately

24 hours.

Note

Do not eject a memory card while recording to it is in progress. When recording, only change memory cards in slots for which the

slot access indicator is off.

When the remaining capacity on the memory card being recorded becomes less than one minute and a recordable memory card

is inserted in the other slot, a “Will Switch Slots Soon” message appears. The message disappears after switching memory card

slots.

Relay recording may not operate if recording is started when the remaining memory card capacity is less than one minute. For

correct relay recording, check that the remaining memory card capacity is more than one minute before starting recording.

Video created using the relay recording function of the unit cannot be played back seamlessly on the unit.

124

To combine video created using the relay recording function of the unit, use “Catalyst Browse” software.

5-041-957-11(1)

125

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Checking the Audio

Audio is output from the SDI and HDMI connectors of the unit. Select the combination of audio channels that are output

from the HDMI connector using [Audio] > [Audio Output] > [HDMI/Stream Output CH] in the camera menu.

CH1/CH2: CH1 and CH2 combination

CH3/CH4: CH3 and CH4 combination

When monitoring the audio in the Web App, use the audio level meter at the bottom right of the camera image.

5-041-957-11(1)

126

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Specifying Time Data

This topic describes how to set time data.

Setting the timecode

Set the timecode to record using [TC/Media] > [Timecode] in the camera menu.

Setting user bits

You can add an 8-digit hexadecimal number to the recorded image as user bits. You can also set the user bits to the

current time. Set using [TC/Media] > [Users Bit] in the camera menu.

Displaying time data

Set the timecode to display using [TC/Media] > [TC Display] > [Display Select] in the camera menu.

Pressing an assignable button with [DURATION/TC/U-BIT] assigned will switch the display between the timecode, user

bits, and duration in sequence.

5-041-957-11(1)

127

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Reviewing the Recording (Rec Review)

You can review the last recorded clip on the screen (recording review).

Note

Rec Review is not supported if the video format is changed after recording a clip.

Setting the Rec Review start position

You can set the playback start position to one of the following using [Technical] > [Rec Review] in the camera menu.

Last 3 seconds of the clip

Last 10 seconds of the clip

Start of the clip

Hint

If you want to review a specific clip after recording multiple clips, press the [Thumbnail] button to display the thumbnail screen,

and select the clip to start playback.

You can also press the THUMBNAIL button of the supplied infrared remote control to display the thumbnail screen.

Rec Review method

Assign the Rec Review function to one of the assignable buttons on the basic configuration adjustment panel

beforehand.

For details about assignment, see “Assignable Buttons” in “Useful Functions.”

Stop recording and then press an assignable button assigned with the Rec Review function to start playback of the

previously recorded clip.

128

The clip is played to the end, Rec Review ends, and the unit returns to Stby (standby) mode.

To stop Rec Review

Press an assignable button with Rec Review assigned or press the [Cancel/Back] button.

129

Hint

You can also press the [Cancel/Back] button of the supplied infrared remote control to stop the Rec Review function.

5-041-957-11(1)

130

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Framing Adjustment Screen

The framing is adjusted using the following parts of the live operation screen.

Note

Depending on the direction of the camera, the focal length of the lens, and the zoom position, part of the unit or cables connected

to the connector block may be visible. Before shooting, check the field of view for the lens and focal length you are using. You

can also control the pan/tilt range using [Pan-Tilt] > [P/T Range Limit] in the web menu. When the unit is turned on or pan/tilt

reset is executed, this range limit setting is ignored. For details, see [Pan-Tilt] > [P/T Range Limit] in the web menu.

Hint

You can also control the framing using the supplied infrared remote control.

5-041-957-11(1)

Preset position control panel1.

(Main) tab / (Others) tab2.

Framing control panel3.

131

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Adjusting the Shooting Direction Using the Web App

Moving the camera horizontally is called panning, and move the camera vertically is called tilting.

You can adjust the shooting direction using pan/tilt operations.

Hint

If [Execute Pan-Tilt Reset] is displayed below the joystick, an inconsistency has occurred in the pan/tilt control origin information

of the unit. Execute the pan/tilt reset function to update the origin information. For details, see “Resetting the Pan/Tilt.”

To face the camera back to the front

Press the [Pan-Tilt Home] button on the

(Others) tab in the camera control panel.

Note

Depending on the direction of the camera, the focal length of the lens, and the zoom position, part of the unit or cables connected

to the connector block may be visible. Before shooting, check the field of view for the lens and focal length you are using. You

can also control the pan/tilt range using [Pan-Tilt] > [P/T Range Limit] in the web menu. When the unit is turned on or pan/tilt

reset is executed, this range limit setting is ignored. For details, see [Pan-Tilt] > [P/T Range Limit] in the web menu.

5-041-957-11(1)

Press the [Pan-Tilt-Zoom] tab in the framing control panel to display the joystick.

Drag the center of the joystick in the direction you want to view while monitoring the camera image panel.

The direction and speed of the camera changes in response to the drag direction and level.

You can adjust the pan/tilt more precisely by pressing the peripheral areas of the joystick.

132

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Setting the Pan/Tilt Operating Speed

You can change the pan/tilt operating speed using the [Pan-Tilt Speed] slider in the camera control panel by operating

the joystick in the framing control panel.

Note

If there is a wall or other obstacle within the range of motion of the camera, be careful not to hit the camera or lens during pan/tilt

operation.

The pan/tilt acceleration depends on physical characteristics, such as the weight balance of the lens. You can change the

acceleration setting using [Pan-Tilt] > [P/T Acceleration] > [Ramp Curve] in the web menu or camera menu.

5-041-957-11(1)

Press the

(Main) tab in the camera control panel.

Select the [Pan-Tilt Speed] slider from the list.

If the [Pan-Tilt Speed] slider is not displayed, select either of the two slider function selection buttons to display the

slider.

Move the slider knob left or right.

Moving the knob to the left decreases the operating speed, while moving the knob to the right increases the

operating speed.

133

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Setting the Pan/Tilt Operation Acceleration

You can set the acceleration operation in nine gradations using [Pan-Tilt] > [P/T Acceleration] > [Ramp Curve] in the web

menu or camera menu. Increase the value for more rapid changes in speed, or decrease the value for more gradual

changes in speed.

For greater responsiveness when operating the pan/tilt, select a value in the range 7 to 9.

For greater positional accuracy at the start/end of the movement to a preset position, a value in the range 1 to 6 is

recommended.

For details about preset position, see “Saving/Restoring Pan/Tilt and Zoom Position.”

Note

When the value is set high, the function may not work properly if a heavy lens is attached. Check the operation before actual use.

Relationship between [Ramp Curve] setting and pan/tilt operation

When pan/tilt is operated

When a preset position is recalled

134

135

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Adjusting the Shooting Direction Using the Supplied Infrared Remote Control

You can adjust the shooting direction using the pan/tilt operation buttons of the supplied infrared remote control.

To face the camera back to the front

Press the HOME button.

Note

Depending on the direction of the camera, the focal length of the lens, and the zoom position, part of the unit or cables connected

to the connector block may be visible. Before shooting, check the field of view for the lens and focal length you are using. You

can also control the pan/tilt range using [Pan-Tilt] > [P/T Range Limit] in the web menu. When the unit is turned on or pan/tilt

reset is executed, this range limit setting is ignored. For details, see [Pan-Tilt] > [P/T Range Limit] in the web menu.

5-041-957-11(1)

Press the arrow buttons to control the pan/tilt.

Press the arrow button of the direction you want to view while monitoring the camera image.

To move a short distance, press the arrow button briefly.

To move a large distance, press and hold the arrow button.

To move diagonally, press and hold the

(up arrow) or (down arrow) button and press the (left arrow) or

(right arrow) button.

136

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Setting the Zoom Type

Set the type of zoom using [Technical] > [Zoom] > [Zoom Type] in the camera menu.

The type of zoom will vary depending on the type of lens that is attached.

Note

Clear Image Zoom is not available in the following cases.

When the [Shooting] > [S&Q Motion] > [Setting] is set to On and the [Frame Rate] setting in the camera menu is higher than 60

fps

When [Project] > [Rec Format] > [Codec] in the camera menu is set to [RAW] or an option that includes RAW

Operating the SERVO/MANUAL select switch on a lens resets the magnification of Clear Image Zoom to 1×.

During Clear Image Zoom operation, the focus area is set to Wide. Also, face/eye detection AF is disabled.

When set to [On(Clear Image Zoom)], the pan/tilt preset function is disabled.

Clear Image Zoom

The unit is equipped with a zoom function that uses image signal processing called Clear Image Zoom. When Clear

Image Zoom is enabled, zoom is supported even for fixed-focus lenses. It can also be used to extend the range beyond

the optical range on a power zoom lens.

The maximum zoom ratio using Clear Image Zoom varies depending on the recording resolution.

For QFHD/4K recording resolution: 1.5×

For HD recording resolution: 2×

5-041-957-11(1)

Type of attached lens

[Zoom Type] setting

[Optical Zoom Only] [On(Clear Image Zoom)]

Fixed-focus lens/Manual zoom

lens

Zoom operation is not

supported.

Clear Image Zoom is supported.

Power zoom lens

Optical zoom only is

supported.

Optical zoom and Clear Image Zoom are

supported.

137

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Adjusting the Zoom Using the Web App

You can adjust the zoom of the unit using optical zoom or Clear Image Zoom. This topic describes how to make

adjustments using the Web App. For details about Clear Image Zoom, see “Setting the Zoom Type.”

Note

Depending on the direction of the camera, the focal length of the lens, and the zoom position, part of the unit or cables connected

to the connector block may be visible. Before shooting, check the field of view for the lens and focal length you are using. You

can also control the pan/tilt range using [Pan-Tilt] > [P/T Range Limit] in the web menu. When the unit is turned on or pan/tilt

reset is executed, this range limit setting is ignored. For details, see [Pan-Tilt] > [P/T Range Limit] in the web menu.

5-041-957-11(1)

Press the [Pan-Tilt-Zoom] tab in the framing control panel to display the pan/tilt control panel.

Slide the [Zoom] slider knob in the [T] (Telephoto) direction or [W] (Wide) direction to adjust the zoom.

138

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Setting the Zoom Operating Speed

You can change the zoom operating speed of the [Zoom] slider in the framing control panel using the [Zoom Speed]

slider in the camera control panel.

5-041-957-11(1)

Press the

(Main) tab in the camera control panel.

Select the [Zoom Speed] slider from the list.

If the [Zoom Speed] slider is not displayed, select either of the two slider function selection buttons to display the

slider.

Move the [Zoom Speed] slider knob left or right.

Moving the knob to the left decreases the operating speed, while moving the knob to the right increases the

operating speed.

139

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Adjusting the Zoom Using the Supplied Infrared Remote Control

You can adjust the zoom of the unit using optical zoom or Clear Image Zoom. This topic describes how to make

adjustments using the supplied infrared remote control. For details about Clear Image Zoom, see “Setting the Zoom

Type.”

Note

Depending on the direction of the camera, the focal length of the lens, and the zoom position, part of the unit or cables connected

to the connector block may be visible. Before shooting, check the field of view for the lens and focal length you are using. You

can also control the pan/tilt range using [Pan-Tilt] > [P/T Range Limit] in the web menu. When the unit is turned on or pan/tilt

reset is executed, this range limit setting is ignored. For details, see [Pan-Tilt] > [P/T Range Limit] in the web menu.

5-041-957-11(1)

Press the zoom button to adjust the zoom.

Press the T (Telephoto) or W (Wide) button while monitoring the screen to adjust the zoom.

To zoom in, press the T button.

To zoom out, press the W button.

140

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Calibrating an E-Mount Lens

Calibration corrects for differences in the zoom position due to differences in individual lenses when using an E-mount

power zoom lens.

To calculate the zoom position accurately, calibrate your lens to correct for individual differences in the lens using the

following procedure.

Calibration data

Calibration data for up to five lenses can be saved in the unit. The oldest data will be overwritten when a 6th or

subsequent lens is calibrated.

You can check whether calibration data is available for the attached lens by pressing the

(Camera Status) button

in the common area of the Web App screen and selecting [Lens] > [Calibration Data].

5-041-957-11(1)

If the lens has a SERVO/MANUAL switch, set to the SERVO position.

Note

The lens will be unable to receive zoom instructions from the unit if the switch is set to MANUAL.

Run the calibration using [Technical] > [Lens] > [Lens Calibration] in the camera menu.

During calibration, the zoom lens moves automatically and is measured.

141

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Saving/Restoring Pan/Tilt, Zoom Position, and Focus Setting Using the Web App

You can save the pan/tilt, zoom position, and focus setting and recall them when required using the Web App.

For details about the items that can be saved/restored, see “Preset Position Saved Items.”

Note

This function is disabled when [Technical] > [Zoom] > [Zoom Type] is set to [On(Clear Image Zoom)] in the camera menu

If the [Pan-Tilt] > [P/T Direction] [Ceiling] setting in the web menu is changed, all the saved preset positions are deleted.

Determine the position that you want to save using pan/tilt and zoom operations.

Press the [+] button in the preset position control panel.

The image with the saved position is displayed in the preset position control panel.

Hint

If the preset position control panel is not displayed, press the

(Open) button to display it.

Positions are saved in sequence from [Preset1].

If there are unused presets within a sequence of presets, positions will be saved in presets starting with the unused

presets. For example, if position presets are saved in [Preset1] and [Preset3] but not in [Preset2], the next position presets

will be saved in [Preset2] and then in [Preset4].

Up to 100 position presets can be saved.

You can rename each position preset. For details, see “Renaming Position Presets Using the Web App.”

Restore a saved position.

142

Double-press the position thumbnail you want to restore in the preset position control panel to restore the

corresponding position.

Hint

You can also restore a position by pressing the image, pressing the

(Preset Position Menu) button that appears and

selecting [Recall].

The transition speed to a saved position is determined by the [Pan-Tilt] > [P/T Preset] > [Common Speed] setting in the

web menu when the position was saved. You can also change the transition speed after saving. For details, see “Changing

the Transition Speed of Position Presets.”

The degree of change in the pan/tilt position when moving to a preset position can be adjusted using the transition speed

and [Ramp Curve] settings. For details, see “Changing the Transition Speed of Position Presets” and “Setting the Pan/Tilt

Operation Acceleration.”

143

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Renaming Position Presets Using the Web App

You can rename position presets.

5-041-957-11(1)

Press the position preset you want to rename.

The

(Preset Position Menu) button appears at the top right of the image.

Press the

(Preset Position Menu) button and select [Rename] from the displayed menu.

Enter a new preset name.

144

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Replacing a Saved Position with a New Position Using the Web App

You can replace a saved position with a new position.

5-041-957-11(1)

Determine the position that you want to save using pan/tilt and zoom operations.

Press the position image you want to replace in the preset position control panel.

The

(Preset Position Menu) button appears at the top right of the screen.

Press the

(Preset Position Menu) button and select [Replace] from the displayed menu.

The new position replaces the current setting.

145

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Deleting a Saved Position Using the Web App

You can delete position presets.

5-041-957-11(1)

Press the position image you want to delete in the preset position control panel.

The

(Preset Position Menu) button appears at the top right of the image.

Press the

(Preset Position Menu) button and select [Delete] from the displayed menu.

The saved position is deleted.

146

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Changing the Transition Speed of Position Presets

You can change the transition speed when restoring a saved position.

Hint

When [Pan-Tilt] > [P/T Preset] > [Speed Select] is set to [Common], all positions will be restored at the set speed using [Pan-Tilt]

> [P/T Preset] > [Common Speed].

5-041-957-11(1)

Set [Pan-Tilt] > [P/T Preset] > [Speed Select] to [Separate] in the web menu.

Press the image for the position for which you want to change the transition speed in the preset position

control panel.

The

(Preset Position Menu) button appears at the top right of the image.

Press the

(Preset Position Menu) button and select [Speed] from the displayed menu.

Select the desired transition speed.

The next time a saved position is restored, the camera will move at the configured speed.

147

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Saving/Restoring Pan/Tilt and Zoom Position Using the Supplied Infrared Remote

Control

You can save the pan/tilt and zoom position and recall them when required using the supplied infrared remote control.

5-041-957-11(1)

Adjust the pan/tilt and zoom of the camera.

Press and hold the PRESET button and press one of the 1 to 3 buttons.

The position is saved.

Restore a saved position.

Press one of the 1 to 3 buttons with a saved position to restore that position.

Hint

In the case of the infrared remote control, the image moves to the saved position at the maximum speed.

You can also change the transition speed after saving. For details, see “Changing the Transition Speed of Position

Presets.”

148

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Focus Adjustment Screen

The focus is adjusted using the following parts of the live operation screen.

Camera image panel

You can adjust the focus by touching the camera image. You can disable touch operation by turning off the [Touch

Focus] switch on the

(Focus) tab in the camera control panel.

Camera control panel

(Focus) tab2.

GUI control panel3.

149

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Adjusting Manually Using the Web App

You can adjust the focus manually, for example, in the following cases.

Subjects partially obscured by water droplets

Subjects with low contrast against the background

Subjects further away than nearby subjects

Hint

You can also use auto focus when manual adjustment is the main method of operation. For details, see “Setting the Auto Focus

Target Manually (AF Assist) Using the Web App.”

5-041-957-11(1)

If the lens is fitted with a focus selector switch, set the switch to the “AF/MF” or “AF” position.

Note

If the switch is set to the “Full MF” or “MF” position, lens focusing cannot be operated from the unit. See “Focus

adjustments for lenses with focus mode switch” in “Checking the Lens Switches.”

Slide the [Auto Focus] switch to the left position in the camera control panel to turn auto focus off.

Manual focus mode is activated.

(MF)

Adjust using the slider at the bottom of the

(Focus) tab.

150

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Adjusting Manually Using the Supplied Infrared Remote Control

You can adjust the focus manually using the supplied infrared remote control.

Hint

You can also use auto focus when manual adjustment is the main method of operation. For details, see “Focusing Manually

During Auto Focus Using the Supplied Infrared Remote Control.”

5-041-957-11(1)

Press the MF button on the infrared remote control.

Adjust the focus manually using the F (Far) button and N (Near) button.

To focus on a far subject, press the F button.

To focus on a near subject, press the N button.

151

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Focusing by Specifying a Focus Position (Spot Focus)

In manual focus mode, you can specify the position where you want to adjust the focus in the camera image panel.

Note

The spot focus function does not operate if the lens is set for manual focusing.

Hint

In spot focus mode, you can press an assignable button assigned with [Push AF/MF] to temporarily stop spot focus and enable

auto focus while the button is pressed. The focus returns to manual focus when you release the button.

5-041-957-11(1)

Set [Shooting] > [Focus] > [Touch Function in MF] to [Spot Focus] in the web menu or camera menu.

Slide the [Touch Focus] switch on the

(Focus) tab to the right position to turn it on.

Slide the [Auto Focus] switch on the

(Focus) tab to the left position to turn it off.

Specify the focus position.

The spot focus marker appears and the image is adjusted to be in focus at that position.

Example of specifying the position by touch operation

152

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Using Auto Focus Temporarily (Push Auto Focus (AF))

When in manual focus mode, you can adjust the focus temporarily using auto focus by pressing the [Push AF/MF] button

to focus automatically while the button is pressed.

This is useful when you want to move the focus slowly from one subject to another subject during manual focus.

Note

The push auto focus function does not operate if the lens is set for manual focusing.

Hint

The same operation is supported using an assignable button assigned with [Push AF/MF].

5-041-957-11(1)

Set [Shooting] > [Focus] > [Push AF Mode] to [AF] in the camera menu.

Slide the [Auto Focus] switch on the

(Focus) tab to the left position to turn it off.

Press the [Push AF/MF] button.

Auto focus is active while the button is pressed.

Push auto focus is released and the focus returns to manual focus when you release the button.

153

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Using Single-Shot Auto Focus (Push Auto Focus (AF-S))

You can press the [Push AF/MF] button when in manual focus mode to focus automatically at high speed.

This function is convenient when you focus on a subject before shooting.

Note

The push auto focus function does not operate if the lens is set for manual focusing.

The focus area frame is not hidden when using the [Display] button.

During Clear Image Zoom operation, the [Focus Area (AF-S)] frame position cannot be set. During push auto focus operation, the

AF operation also gives priority to the center portion.

Set [Shooting] > [Focus] > [Push AF Mode] to [Single-shot AF(AF-S)] in the web menu or camera menu.

Specify the position for which you want to adjust the focus using [Shooting] > [Focus] > [Focus Area (AF-

S)] in the camera menu.

Hint

You can change the position by pressing an assignable button assigned with [Focus Setting] to display an orange frame

around the focus area and selecting a position using touch operation.

Slide the [Auto Focus] switch on the

(Focus) tab to the left position to turn it off.

Press the [Push AF/MF] button.

If you release the button before focusing finishes, push auto focus will stop.

During push auto focus, the focus status is displayed by the focus indicator.

On: The focus is fixed at the focus position.

Blinking: Out of focus. As the unit will not focus automatically, change the composition and focus settings to

achieve focus.

The focus returns to manual focus when you release the button.

154

Hint

The same operation is supported using an assignable button assigned with [Push AF/MF].

You can also assign [Push AF Mode] to an assignable button.

You can also assign [Focus Area (AF-S)] to an assignable button.

You can display/hide the focus area frame using [Monitoring] > [Display On/Off] > [Focus Area Ind.(AF-S)] in the camera menu.

5-041-957-11(1)

155

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Adjusting Automatically Using the Web App

The unit uses phase detection AF for high-speed focusing and contrast AF for high-accuracy focusing.

The combination of these two AF methods provides auto focus with both high speed and high accuracy.

Note

A lens that supports auto focus is required.

Accuracy may not be obtained depending on the shooting conditions.

The focus cannot be adjusted automatically on an A-mount lens.

Hint

During auto focus mode, you can adjust the focus using the Focus slider in the camera control panel. For details, see “Setting the

Auto Focus Target Manually (AF Assist) Using the Web App.”

5-041-957-11(1)

If the lens is fitted with a focus selector switch, set the switch to the “AF/MF” or “AF” position.

Note

If the switch is set to the “Full MF” or “MF” position, lens focusing cannot be operated from the unit. See “Focus

adjustments for lenses with focus mode switch” in “Checking the Lens Switches.”

Slide the [Auto Focus] switch to the right position in the camera control panel to turn it on.

Auto focus mode is activated.

(AF)

156

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Adjusting Automatically Using the Supplied Infrared Remote Control

You can adjust the focus automatically using the supplied infrared remote control.

Note

You can also use auto focus when manual adjustment is the main method of operation. For details, see “Focusing Manually

During Auto Focus Using the Supplied Infrared Remote Control.”

5-041-957-11(1)

Press the AF button on the infrared remote control.

The focus on a subject is adjusted automatically.

157

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Setting the Auto Focus Area/Position (Focus Area)

You can set the target area for auto focus and adjust the focus for that area.

Press the [Menu] button GUI control panel to open the camera menu.

Set the target area for auto focus using [Shooting] > [Focus] > [Focus Area] in the camera menu.

[Wide]:

Searches for a subject over a wide angle of the image when focusing. A frame is not displayed.

[Zone]:

Automatically searches for a focus position within the specified zone.

After selection, specify the position using the arrow buttons in the GUI control panel.

You can return to the center position by pressing and holding the [Set] button.

[Flexible Spot]:

Focuses on a specified position in the image.

After selection, specify the position using the arrow buttons in the GUI control panel.

158

Note

The focus area frame is not hidden when using the [Display] button on the camera image panel.

During Clear Image Zoom, the focus area is set to [Wide] (fixed).

Hint

You can display/hide the focus area frame using [Monitoring] > [Display On/Off] > [Focus Area Indicator] in the camera menu.

5-041-957-11(1)

You can return to the center position by pressing and holding the [Set] button.

159

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Changing the Focus Area Quickly (Focus Setting)

You can change the position and size of the auto focus area quickly during shooting by assigning [Focus Setting] to an

assignable button.

For details about assignable buttons, see “Assignable Buttons.”

The operation varies depending on the focus area setting.

When [Shooting] > [Focus] > [Focus Area] is set to [Flexible Spot] or [Zone] in the camera

You can change the position of the focus area by pressing an assignable button assigned with [Focus Setting] and

adjusting using the arrow buttons in the GUI control panel. You can return the position of the focus area to the center

while adjusting the position by pressing the [Set] button.

You can change the size of the focus area by pressing and holding an assignable button assigned with [Focus

Setting]. After changing the size, you can change the position of the focus area by pressing the [Set] button. When

finished, press an assignable button assigned with [Focus Setting] to return to the original screen.

When [Shooting] > [Focus] > [Focus Area] is set to [Wide] in the camera menu

You can only change the size of the focus area by pressing and holding an assignable button assigned with [Focus

Setting]. The position can be also be changed by first changing the type to [Flexible Spot] or [Zone].

Hint

When both [Shooting] > [Focus] > [Push AF Mode] is set to [Single-shot AF(AF-S)] in the camera menu and the [Auto Focus]

switch is set to the off position (manual focus mode), you can change the [Focus Area (AF-S)] focus area position.

The focus area frame is displayed orange when the position of the focus area can be changed.

5-041-957-11(1)

160

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Moving the Focus Area Frame Using Touch Operation (Touch Focus Area)

You can change the position of the focus area by pressing an assignable button assigned with [Focus Setting] to change

the focus area display to orange, and then move the focus area frame using touch operation in the camera image panel.

Tap the screen to move the focus area, with the focus area centered on the tapped position. Drag on the screen to move

the focus area to the position traced by your finger.

Hint

You can enable/disable the touch focus area on the shooting screen using an assignable button assigned with [Focus Setting].

Tap any position.

The tapped position becomes the center of the focus area.

Drag to move the focus area, tracing your finger position.

161

Note

If you tap a position or drag the focus area to a position that exceeds the setting range, the focus area is set to the

top/bottom/left/right edge of the setting range.

This function is not available in the following circumstances.

When the [Auto Focus] switch is turned off in the camera control panel

When the [Touch Focus] switch is turned off in the camera control panel

When the focus area frame is displayed in gray or is not displayed at all

5-041-957-11(1)

162

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Adjusting the Auto Focus Operation (AF Transition Speed, AF Subject Shift

Sensitivity)

You can adjust the auto focus operation by changing the transition speed and the subject shift sensitivity.

Setting the AF transition speed

You can set the speed of the focus drive for when the subject changes using the [AF Transition Speed] button in the

camera control panel.

Select the speed from the range [Speed 1] (Slow) to [Speed 7] (Fast) in increments of 1. Press the < button to decrease

the value (slower) or the > button to increase the value (faster).

When set to low speed, the focus moves slowly when the subject to be focused changes, enabling the shooting with

impressive image expression.

When set to high speed, the focus switches between subjects quickly. In the example below, the focus changes quickly

from the building in the background to the person walking in the foreground. The subject that enters the frame is

immediately focused, making this setting ideal for documentary shooting which requires quick focusing.

AF subject shift sensitivity

You can set the sensitivity for changing between subjects using [AF Subj. Shift Sens.] button in the camera control panel.

163

Select the sensitivity from the range [Sens 1] (Locked On) to [Sens 5] (Responsive) in increments of 1. Press the <

button to decrease the value (change slowly) or the > button to increase the value (change rapidly).

When set to a low sensitivity, the focus does not readily shift even if another subject moves in front of the in-focus

subject.

When set to a high sensitivity, the focus shifts to give priority to the subject that moves in front.

Hint

If [AF Speed/Sens.] is assigned to an assignable button, the level bars for adjusting values are displayed in the camera image

panel in the following order each time the button is pressed, allowing you to change the AF transition speed and AF subject shift

sensitivity settings.

AF transition speed → AF subject shift sensitivity → No display …

5-041-957-11(1)

164

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Setting the Auto Focus Target Manually (AF Assist) Using the Web App

After shifting and adjusting the focus manually, you can pass focus control to auto focus for fine focus adjustment.

Note

In the AF assist state, shifting the focus becomes difficult, regardless of the [Shooting] > [Focus] > [AF Subj. Shift Sens.] setting in

the camera menu.

The AF assist state is canceled by the following.

When the subject focused using the [Focus] slider is no longer visible

When switching to manual focus

When a face is registered

Hint

The AF assist state can be canceled quickly by using an assignable button assigned with [Push AF/MF].

Operating the [Focus] slider clears the registered face selection.

In Face/Eye Only AF mode, auto focus focuses on the face closest to the focus position of the [Focus] slider.

Set [Shooting] > [Focus] > [AF Assist] to [On] in the camera menu.

Set [Shooting] > [Focus] > [AF Assist Control] to [On] in the web menu.

Slide the [Auto Focus] switch to the right position in the camera control panel to turn it on.

Auto focus mode is activated.

Set the focus target using the [Focus] slider in the camera control panel.

[Near]: Focus on a near subject.

[Far]: Focus on a far subject.

In the AF assist state, a subject at the distance set with the [Focus] slider will be focused automatically.

165

166

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Focusing Manually During Auto Focus Using the Supplied Infrared Remote Control

When [Shooting] > [Focus] > [AF Assist] is set to [On] in the camera menu, you can use the F (Far) button and N (Near)

on the supplied infrared remote control even during auto focus to adjust the focus on a subject.

5-041-957-11(1)

167

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Using Manual Focus Temporarily During Auto Focus (Push Manual Focus)

Press the [Push AF/MF] button when in auto focus mode to focus manually while the button is pressed. The focus

returns to auto focus when you release the button.

This allows you to temporarily stop auto focus and focus manually when something that is not the subject of shooting

crosses in front of the subject.

Hint

The same operation is supported using an assignable button assigned with [Push AF/MF].

5-041-957-11(1)

168

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Tracking Using Face and Eye Detection (Face/Eye Detection AF)

The unit can detect people’s faces and eyes as a target to track, and then adjust the focus on faces and eyes within the

focus area.

When faces are detected, gray face/eye detection frames are displayed. When auto focusing is possible, the frames

change to white and tracking starts. When eyes are detected and the focus is adjusted, the face/eye detection frame is

displayed on the eyes. When multiple individuals are detected, the main subject is automatically determined.

This function is available only when the focus mode is AF mode or during push auto focus.

Hint

When the focus area is set to [Zone] or [Flexible Spot] and faces or eyes overlap within the specified focus area, the face/eye

detection frames change to white, and the unit focuses on those faces/eyes automatically.

When push auto focus (AF-S) is used, the face/eye detection frames for the faces/eyes that are in focus change to green.

Setting using the [Face/Eye Detection AF] button in the camera control panel

Press the [Face/Eye Detection AF] button and set the face/eye detection AF operation.

[Face/Eye Only AF]: The camera detects the faces/eyes of subjects (people) and focuses and tracks only on their

faces/eyes. While a face or eye is not detected, AF is temporarily stopped and the

(Face/Eye Only AF mode auto

focus paused) icon is displayed. This mode is effective when you want to auto focus and track faces/eyes only.

[Face/Eye Priority AF]: The camera detects the faces/eyes of subjects (people) and prioritizes the focusing/tracking on

the faces/eyes. When a face or eye is not detected, focusing is in AF mode (default setting).

[AF]: The face/eye detection AF function is disabled.

Note

During push auto focus operation, [Face/Eye Priority AF] is activated even if [Face/Eye Only AF] is currently selected.

When the [Auto Focus] switch is set to the off position, face/eye detection AF is disabled (excluding during push auto focus

operation).

If you turn the camcorder off while [Face/Eye Only AF] is selected, the mode automatically switches to [Face/Eye Priority AF]

when the camcorder is next turned on.

Hint

169

You can set the face/eye detection AF operation using [Shooting] > [Focus] > [Face/Eye Detection AF] in the camera menu.

To hide face/eye detection frames

You can show/hide face/eye detection frames using [Monitoring] > [Display On/Off] > [Face/Eye Detection Frame] in the

camera menu.

Note

Green face/eye detection frames are displayed for faces and eyes that are in focus using push auto focus (AF-S), and are not

hidden using the [Display] button or when [Face/Eye Detection Frame] is set to [Off].

To switch the face/eye detection AF operation using an assignable button

Assign [Face/Eye Detection AF] to an assignable button. You can then switch face/eye detection AF operation in the

order [Face/Eye Priority AF], [Face/Eye Only AF], and [AF] each time you press the button.

Setting using the direct menu

You can also set the face/eye detection AF operation using the direct menu.

For details about the direct menu, see “Direct Menu Operation.”

5-041-957-11(1)

170

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Tracking a Specified Subject (Realtime Tracking AF)

You can maintain focus on a subject by specifying the subject by touch operation or by selecting a face detection frame

in the camera control panel.

When a subject is selected, a white tracking frame is displayed and tracking starts.

Hint

Tracking occurs over the entire image area, regardless of the focus area setting.

When [Shooting] > [Focus] > [Touch Function in MF] is set to [Tracking AF] in the web menu or camera menu, realtime tracking

AF is supported even when the focus mode is MF mode.

The following actions occur for the tracking target, depending on the face/eye detection AF operating mode setting.

[Face/Eye Only AF] or [Face/Eye Priority AF]: Focusing and tracking of the specified subject.

If the tracking target is a person and a face/eye is detected, the camera focuses on that face/eye.

When a tracking target face/eye is detected, the tracking target face is saved. When saved, a

(saved tracking face

icon) is displayed.

Note

If tracking AF is started during manual focus, the tracking target face is not saved.

[AF]: Focusing and tracking of the specified subject. Face/eye detection does not occur, even if the tracking target is a

person.

Note

The realtime tracking AF function does not operate if the lens is set for manual focusing.

Starting realtime tracking AF

When a specific subject is specified as the tracking target, tracking of that target starts.

To specify by touch operation

171

Slide the [Touch Focus] switch on the (Focus) tab in the camera control panel to the right position to turn it on, then

tap the target subject to track in any of the following states.

During manual focus or during push manual focus, and when [Shooting] > [Focus] > [Touch Function in MF] is set to

[Tracking AF] in the web menu or camera menu

During auto focus or during push auto focus (AF)

To specify by face detection frame selection

Move the face selection cursor (orange underline) to the target subject to track using the arrow buttons in the GUI control

panel, and press the [Set] button.

A: Face detection frames (gray)

B: Tracking frame

C: Face selection cursor (orange)

Note

During manual focus, tracking cannot be started by face detection frame selection.

Hint

You can also change the target to track during realtime tracking AF.

Stopping realtime tracking AF

Press the

(realtime tracking AF stop) button.

Hint

Realtime tracking AF will stop in the following cases:

When the [Auto Focus] switch or AUTO/MANUAL control on the lens is switched

When the focus mode is changed

172

When AF assist is executed

When the focus area setting or face/eye detection AF action is changed

When an assignable button assigned with [Push AF/MF] is pressed

When the tracking target is not within the shooting screen or when the subject is out of focus for a few seconds

When a tracking face is saved (when the

(saved tracking face icon) is displayed), realtime tracking AF will resume when the

saved tracking face enters the image area. To clear the tracking face, stop realtime tracking AF as described above.

5-041-957-11(1)

173

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Brightness Adjustment Screen

You can adjust the brightness by adjusting the iris, gain, shutter speed, and by adjusting the light level using ND filters in

the following control panels of the Web App live operation screen. You can also adjust the brightness automatically.

Note

The gain cannot be adjusted when [Shooting Mode] is set to [Cine EI]. Also, the brightness cannot be adjusted automatically

using the shutter speed. Brightness auto adjustment using the iris and ND filter is supported.

Hint

Cine EI mode is a mode for shooting at a base sensitivity without using gain in order to maximize the performance of the image

sensor. The brightness is adjusted using lighting and the ND filter to adjust the amount of light that reaches the image sensor. For

details about Exposure Index (EI), see “Changing the Distribution of Dark and Bright Areas in the Recorded Image.”

Camera control panel –

(Main) tab1.

Camera basic configuration panel

Displays the setting status of basic functions required for shooting on buttons. Press a button to display the

corresponding setup screen for each function in the camera basic configuration adjustment panel below.

Camera basic configuration adjustment panel

Displays the adjustment panel for the setup item selected on the camera basic configuration panel.

174

175

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Setting the Base Sensitivity

You can set the base sensitivity before starting to adjust the brightness.

When [Shooting Mode] is set to [Custom]

Press the [ISO/Gain] button in the camera basic configuration panel and set [Base Sensitivity] on the ISO/gain

adjustment panel to [High] or [Low].

Select [Low] in normal lighting conditions and select [High] in low lighting conditions.

Screen when [AGC] is turned off

Screen when [AGC] is turned on

When [Shooting Mode] is set to [Cine EI]

Press the [Base ISO/Exposure Index] button in the camera basic configuration panel and set [Base ISO] on the Base

ISO/Exposure Index adjustment panel to [ISO 12800] or [ISO 800].

Select [ISO 800] in normal lighting conditions and select [ISO 12800] in low lighting conditions.

176

Hint

You can also set this on the

(Main) tab in the camera control panel.

Can also be set using [Shooting] > [ISO/Gain/EI] > [Base Sensitivity] or [Base ISO] in the camera menu.

You can also assign [Base ISO/Sensitivity] to an assignable button.

5-041-957-11(1)

177

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Setting the Target Level for Automatic Brightness Adjustment

The target level for automatic brightness adjustment is set using the [AE Level] slider in the camera control panel.

5-041-957-11(1)

Press the

(Main) tab in the camera control panel.

If the [AE Level] slider is not displayed, select either of the two slider function selection buttons and select the [AE

Level] slider from the list.

The [AE Level] slider appears.

Set the target level using the slider.

Move the slider knob to the left to make the image darker. Move the slider knob to the right to make the image

brighter.

Hint

Can also be set using [Shooting] > [Auto Exposure] > [Level] in the camera menu.

178

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Adjusting the Iris Automatically

You can adjust the brightness automatically according to the subject. A compatible lens is required.

Note

The iris cannot be adjusted automatically on an A-mount lens.

Hint

You can also assign [Auto Iris] to an assignable button.

5-041-957-11(1)

If a lens with an Auto Iris switch is attached, set the switch to AUTO.

Press the [Iris] button in the camera basic configuration panel.

The frame of the [Iris] button changes to orange.

The Iris adjustment panel appears.

Slide the [Auto] switch to the right position to turn it on.

The iris switches to auto adjustment mode. The auto adjusted iris value is displayed on the right side of the switch.

179

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Adjusting the Iris Manually

You can adjust the brightness manually.

To temporarily adjust the iris automatically

You can also press the [Push Auto] button on the Iris adjustment panel to adjust the iris automatically while the button is

pressed.

If a lens with an Auto Iris switch is attached, set the switch to AUTO.

Note

When the Auto Iris switch of the lens is set to MANUAL, the [Auto Iris] and [Push Auto Iris] functions on the unit have no

effect. Manual iris adjustments on the unit also have no effect.

Press the [Iris] button in the camera basic configuration panel.

The frame of the [Iris] button changes to orange.

The Iris adjustment panel appears.

Slide the [Auto] switch to the left position to turn it off.

The iris switches to manual adjustment mode.

Adjust the iris using the [Iris] slider or [Iris] adjustment buttons.

Hint

The slider and adjustment button settings are linked.

You can also assign the iris to the slider on the

(Main) tab in the camera control panel.

180

Hint

Press an assignable button assigned with the [Push Auto Iris] function to adjust the iris automatically while the button is pressed.

The iris returns to manual mode when you release the button.

5-041-957-11(1)

181

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Adjusting the Gain Automatically

You can adjust the brightness automatically using the gain setting when [Shooting Mode] is set to [Custom].

5-041-957-11(1)

Set [Project] > [Shooting Mode] to [Custom] in the web menu or camera menu.

Press the [ISO/Gain] button in the camera basic configuration panel.

The frame of the [ISO/Gain] button changes to orange.

The ISO/Gain adjustment panel appears.

Slide the [AGC] switch to the right position to turn it on.

The gain switches to auto adjustment mode. The auto adjusted gain value is displayed on the right side of the

switch.

Hint

You can also perform the same action by setting [Shooting] > [Auto Exposure] > [AGC] to [On] in the camera menu.

You can also assign [AGC] to an assignable button.

182

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Adjusting the Gain Manually

You can adjust the brightness manually using the gain setting when [Shooting Mode] is set to [Custom].

You can control the gain when you want to adjust the exposure while using a fixed iris setting or when you want to

prevent the gain increasing due to AGC.

To temporarily adjust the gain manually

You can also adjust the gain temporarily by assigning [ISO/Gain] to a slider function selection button on the

(Main)

tab in the camera control panel and using the slider.

This is useful when you want to adjust the exposure by one step without changing the depth of field.

The adjustment result returns to the preset value configured using [ISO/Gain<L>] after performing any of the following

operations.

Changing ISO/Gain adjustment items

Set [Project] > [Shooting Mode] to [Custom] in the web menu or camera menu.

Press the [ISO/Gain] button in the camera basic configuration panel.

The frame of the [ISO/Gain] button changes to orange.

The ISO/Gain adjustment panel appears.

Slide the [AGC] switch to the left position to turn it off.

The gain switches to manual adjustment mode.

Adjust the gain using the [ISO/Gain] slider or [ISO/Gain] adjustment buttons.

Hint

The slider and adjustment button settings are linked.

183

Switching the base sensitivity

Setting the AGC switch to the on position

Switching the power supply of the unit to standby

To temporarily adjust the gain automatically using an assignable button

Press an assignable button assigned with the [Push AGC] function to adjust the gain automatically while the button is

pressed.

The gain returns to manual mode when you release the button.

The adjustment result returns to the preset value configured using [ISO/Gain<L>] after performing any of the following

operations.

Changing ISO/Gain adjustment items

Switching the base sensitivity

Setting the AGC switch to the on position

Switching the power supply of the unit to standby

Note

This function cannot be executed when [Shooting] > [Iris] > [Bokeh Control] is set to [On] in the camera menu.

5-041-957-11(1)

184

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Adjusting the Shutter Automatically

You can adjust the shutter automatically in response to the brightness of the image.

5-041-957-11(1)

Press the [Shutter] button in the camera basic configuration panel.

The frame of the [Shutter] button changes to orange.

The Shutter adjustment panel appears.

Press the [Shutter Type] button and select [Auto] from the list.

Hint

You can also perform the same action by setting [Shooting] > [Auto Exposure] > [Auto Shutter] to [On] in the camera menu.

You can also assign [Auto Shutter] to an assignable button.

185

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Adjusting the Shutter Manually

You can adjust the shutter manually.

Press the [Shutter] button in the camera basic configuration panel.

The frame of the [Shutter] button changes to orange.

The Shutter adjustment panel appears.

Press the [Shutter Type] button and select [Speed] from the list.

Adjust the shutter using the [Speed] slider or [Speed] adjustment buttons.

To adjust the exposure time to match the frame interval, select [Off] in step 2. You can also set a fixed value using

[ECS] (frequency) or automatically adjust it using [Auto].

Example: Set using [ECS] (frequency)

Hint

The slider and adjustment button settings are linked.

To use [Angle] instead of [Speed] or [Off], set [Shooting] > [Shutter] > [Mode] to [Angle] in the camera menu.

186

187

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

About the ND Filter

In conditions where the lighting is too bright, you can set the appropriate brightness by changing the ND filter.

When shooting a brightly lit subject, closing the iris too much may cause diffraction blur, producing an image starting to

go out of focus (typical phenomena in video cameras). You can suppress this effect to obtain better shooting results

using the ND filter.

The unit features the following ND filter modes.

Preset mode

See “Adjusting in Preset Mode.”

Variable mode (automatic adjustment)

See “Adjusting Automatically in Variable Mode.”

Variable mode (manual adjustment)

See “Adjusting Manually in Variable Mode.”

5-041-957-11(1)

188

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Adjusting in Preset Mode

You can select three ND filter transmittance values beforehand and quickly switch between them when shooting.

Hint

When an assignable button assigned with [ND Filter Position] is pressed, the ND filter changes in the sequence [Clear] →

[Preset1] → [Preset2] → [Preset3] → [Clear].

5-041-957-11(1)

Set [Shooting] > [ND Filter] > [Mode] to [Preset] in the camera menu.

Press the [ND Filter] button in the camera basic configuration panel.

The frame of the [ND Filter] button changes to orange.

The ND Filter adjustment panel appears.

Press the [ND Filter] button and select one of the following from the list.

[Clear]: No ND filter.

[Preset1]: Transmittance set by [Shooting] > [ND Filter] > [Preset1] in the camera menu.

[Preset2]: Transmittance set by [Shooting] > [ND Filter] > [Preset2] in the camera menu.

[Preset3]: Transmittance set by [Shooting] > [ND Filter] > [Preset3] in the camera menu.

When one of [Preset1] to [Preset3] is selected for the ND filter, the transmittance value is displayed beside the ND

filter name.

189

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Adjusting Automatically in Variable Mode

You can enable auto exposure adjustment using the ND filter.

Note

When the ND filter is switched to or from [Clear] during shooting, the ND filter frame is displayed on the image and an operating

sound is emitted.

Hint

You can also assign [Auto ND Filter] to an assignable button, and press the button to switch between [Auto] and [Manual].

5-041-957-11(1)

Set [Shooting] > [ND Filter] > [Mode] to [Variable] in the camera menu.

Press the [ND Filter] button in the camera basic configuration panel.

The frame of the [ND Filter] button changes to orange.

The ND Filter adjustment panel appears.

Press the [ND Filter] button and select [Auto] from the list.

The automatically adjusted ND filter transmittance value is displayed beside the [ND Filter] button.

190

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Adjusting Manually in Variable Mode

You can perform manual exposure adjustment using the ND filter.

To temporarily adjust automatically

You can assign [Push Auto ND] to an assignable button, and temporarily turn auto ND filter on while the button is

pressed. Releasing the button sets auto ND filter back to off.

Set the ND filter to [Manual].

Note

When the ND filter is switched to or from [Clear] during shooting, the ND filter frame is displayed on the image and an operating

sound is emitted.

Set [Shooting] > [ND Filter] > [Mode] to [Variable] in the camera menu.

Press the [ND Filter] button in the camera basic configuration panel.

The frame of the [ND Filter] button changes to orange.

The ND Filter adjustment panel appears.

Press the [ND Filter] button and select [Manual] from the list.

Adjust the transmittance of the ND filter using the [ND Filter] slider or [ND Filter] adjustment buttons.

Hint

The slider and adjustment button settings are linked.

You can also adjust the ND filter on the

(Main) tab in the camera control panel.

191

Hint

You can also assign [ND Filter Position] to an assignable button, and press the button to switch between [Manual] and [Clear].

You can also press the [Push Auto] button on the ND Filter adjustment panel to turn auto ND filter on while the button is pressed.

5-041-957-11(1)

192

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

White Balance Adjustment Screen

You can adjust the white balance using the live operation screen of the Web App to obtain a white balance that makes

the image look more natural.

Camera basic configuration panel1.

Camera basic configuration adjustment panel

Displays the adjustment panel for the setup item selected on the camera basic configuration panel.

193

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Adjusting the White Balance Automatically

You can obtain an appropriate adjusted white balance at all times using ATW (auto tracking white balance).

When ATW is enabled, the white balance is automatically adjusted as the color temperature of the light source changes.

Note

ATW cannot be used when [Shooting Mode] is set to [Cine EI].

It may not be possible to adjust to the appropriate color using ATW, depending on the lighting and subject conditions.

Examples:

When a single color dominates the subject, such as sky, sea, ground, or flowers.

When the color temperature is extremely high or extremely low.

If the ATW auto tracking speed is slow or the appropriate effect cannot be obtained, press the [WB SET] button to run auto white

balance.

Hint

You can select the response speed when in ATW mode from five steps (1, 2, 3, 4, 5) using [Shooting] > [White Setting] > [ATW

Speed] in the camera menu. The lower the number, the faster the response speed.

You can freeze the current white balance setting by assigning the [ATW Hold] function to an assignable button, and pressing the

assignable button to temporarily pause ATW during ATW mode.

5-041-957-11(1)

Press the [White Balance] button in the camera basic configuration panel.

The frame of the [White Balance] button changes to orange.

The White Balance adjustment panel appears.

Press the [White Mode] button and select [ATW] from the list.

194

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Adjusting the White Balance Manually

You can adjust the white balance manually.

Press the [White Balance] button in the camera basic configuration panel.

The frame of the [White Balance] button changes to orange.

The White Balance adjustment panel appears.

Press the [White Mode] button and select one of the following from the list.

[Memory A(T/T)]

[Memory A(R/B)]

[Preset]

Adjust the white balance using the sliders or adjustment buttons.

Hint

The slider and adjustment button settings are linked.

The difference between [Memory A(T/T)] and [Memory A(R/B)] is that the axis of adjustment is different, but the adjustment

results are linked.

For [Memory A(T/T)]

This mode adjusts the white balance saved in memory A by adjusting the color temperature (Temp) and Tint.

You can set the color temperature in 20 K increments in the range 2000 K to 5600 K. Values above 5600 K can be

set at intervals equal to the amount of color change (mired) from 5580 K to 5600 K.

195

Pressing the [Reset] button restores the [Temp] (color temperature) or [Tint] setting to the default value.

For [Memory A(R/B)]

This mode adjusts the white balance saved in memory A by adjusting the R Gain and B Gain.

Pressing the [Reset] button restores the corresponding gain setting to the default value.

For [Preset]

This mode adjusts the color temperature to a preset value.

You can set the value in 100 K increments.

In preset mode, you can also assign [Preset White Select] to an assignable button, and press the button to change

to a preconfigured preset value.

[Custom] mode: 3200 K → 4300 K → 5600 K → 6300 K → 3200 K…

[Cine EI] mode: 3200 K → 4300 K → 5500 K → 3200 K…

196

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Running Auto White Balance

In memory A mode, the white balance to save is adjusted automatically.

Press the [White Balance] button in the camera basic configuration panel.

The frame of the [White Balance] button changes to orange.

The White Balance adjustment panel appears.

Press the [White Mode] button and select [Memory A(T/T)] or [Memory A(R/B)] from the list.

[Memory A(T/T)]

[Memory A(R/B)]

Place white paper (or other object) in a location with the same lighting source and conditions as the

subject, then zoom in on the paper to show white on the screen.

Adjust the brightness.

Adjust the iris using the procedure in “Adjusting the Iris Manually.”

Press the [WB SET] button on the white balance adjustment panel.

[Memory A(T/T)]

[Memory A(R/B)]

197

Note

If the adjustment is not successful, an error message is displayed on the screen for about three seconds. If the error message

persists after repeated attempts to set white balance, contact your Sony service representative.

Hint

You can also run it in ATW mode. You can use this when you want to quickly adjust the white balance during ATW operation.

After adjustment, the mode returns to normal ATW operation.

If auto white balance is run in memory mode, the result of auto adjustment is saved in memory A.

198

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Audio Configuration Screen

You can adjust the audio level to be recorded by the unit on the live operation screen of the Web App. Configure the

switches on the connector block of the unit and configure the audio using the web menu.

Camera control panel –

(Audio) tab1.

199

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Selecting the Audio Input Device

Set the following switches according to the device connected to the AUDIO IN connector.

Note

Audio is not recorded in Interval Rec mode or Slow & Quick Motion mode.

5-041-957-11(1)

When a microphone is connected, set SETUP switch 2 on the connector block on the rear of the unit.

CH-1 and CH-2 have common settings.

Setting Description

OFF

(default)

Select when using a dynamic microphone or battery-operated microphone. This turns off the +48 V

phantom power supply and sets the LINE or MIC input as the CH-1 and CH-2 audio source.

Select when using a +48 V phantom power supply compatible microphone. This turns on the +48V

phantom power supply and sets the phantom power supply compatible microphone as the CH-1 and

CH-2 audio source.

Set the type of connected device using [Audio] > [Audio Input] > [AUDIO IN Select] in the camera menu.

Select the audio input using [Audio] > [Audio Input] > [CH1 Input Select] to [CH4 Input Select] in the web

menu or camera menu.

200

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Adjusting the Audio Recording Level Automatically

Set the channel for which you want to adjust the audio recording level automatically to [Auto] on the [Audio] page of the

web menu or using [Audio] > [Audio Input] > [CH1 Level Control] to [CH4 Level Control] in the camera menu.

The channels specified for auto adjustment are indicated by an

(Auto) icon beside the corresponding channels on the

(Audio) tab of the live operation screen.

5-041-957-11(1)

201

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Adjusting the Audio Recording Level Manually

You can adjust the audio recording level manually.

5-041-957-11(1)

Set the channel for which you want to adjust the audio recording level manually to [Manual] on the [Audio]

page of the web menu or using [Audio] > [Audio Input] > [CH1 Level Control] to [CH4 Level Control] in the

camera menu.

Press the

(Audio) tab in the camera control panel.

On the [Audio] screen in the camera control panel, set the audio recording level using the slider or

adjustment buttons for the channel whose audio recording level you want to set manually.

Note

Channels for which the

(Auto) icon is displayed are adjusted automatically. Changes to values using the slider or

buttons are not applied to the recorded audio.

Hint

The slider and adjustment button settings in each row are linked.

You can check the audio input level in realtime using the audio level meter display on the shooting screen.

202

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Direct Menu Operation

You can check the status and settings of the unit displayed overlaid on the camera image, and select and change the

settings using the GUI control buttons on the infrared remote control.

The following items can be configured.

[Face/Eye Detection AF]

[SteadyShot]

[White Mode]

[Color Temp]

[Scene File]

[ND Filter Position]

[Auto ND Filter]

[ND Filter] value

[Auto Iris]

[Iris] value

[AGC]

[Gain] value

[ISO] value

[Exposure Index]

[Shutter Type]

[Auto Shutter]

[Shutter]

[Auto Exposure Mode]

[Auto Exposure Level]

[S&Q Motion] and [Frame Rate]

Hint

You can also perform the same function using an assignable button and the GUI control panel of the Web App.

5-041-957-11(1)

Press an assignable button assigned with [Direct Menu] on the infrared remote control.

The [Direct Menu] button is assigned to assignable button 1 by factory default.

Only the items on the screen that can be configured using the direct menu are selectable using the orange cursor.

Move the cursor to the item you want to set using the arrow buttons in the GUI control panel and press the

[Set] button.

A menu is displayed or the item is displayed on a white background.

Select a setting using the arrow buttons and press the [Set] button.

The menu or white background disappears and the new setting is displayed with an orange cursor.

Press an assignable button assigned with [Direct Menu] again or wait 3 seconds without performing any action to

exit the direct menu.

203

204

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Assignable Buttons

There are ten assignable buttons in the Web App of the unit to which you can assign functions.

The assignable buttons are displayed on the live operation screen and playback operation screen.

Note

The list of assignable buttons is not displayed when configuring settings in the camera basic operation panel of the live operation

screen. To end the operation, press the [X] button at the top right of the adjustment panel.

The following functions are assigned to the buttons by factory default.

Button 1: [Direct Menu]

Button 2: [Focus Setting]

Button 3: [Rec Review]

Buttons 1 to 3 are equivalent to the same number buttons on the supplied infrared remote control.

Button 4: [Push Auto ND]

Button 5: [Crop Select]

Button 6: [Marker]

Button 7: [Video Signal Monitor]

Button 8: [Clip Flag OK]

Button 9: [Color Bars]

Focus Hold button: [Focus Hold]

The Focus Hold button is equivalent to the Focus Hold button on an E-mount lens.

To change a button function

Use [Project] > [Assignable Button] in the camera menu.

When you change an assignment, the display of the assignable button list changes.

For details about the assignable functions, see “Assignable Button” in “Camera Menu and Detailed Settings.”

5-041-957-11(1)

205

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Slow & Quick Motion

When the recording format is set to the following values, you can specify different values for the shooting frame rate and

playback frame rate.

The following table shows the configurable frame rates.

System frequency: 59.94/50/29.97/25/23.98, Imager scan mode: FF

System frequency: 59.94/50/29.97/25/23.98, Imager scan mode: S35

System frequency: 24, Imager scan mode: FF

Note

Slow & Quick Motion cannot be set during recording, playback, or while the thumbnail screen is displayed.

Audio recording is not supported in Slow & Quick Motion mode.

The auto focus function, auto iris function, and auto shutter function are disabled in Slow & Quick Motion mode. However, the

auto focus function can be used when the frame rate is set to the following.

Frame rate when the system frequency is set to 59.94/29.97/23.98: 30, 60, 120, 240

Frame rate when the system frequency is set to 50/25: 25, 50, 100, 200

For details about using RAW output, see “Recording RAW Video.”

Codec Video format Configurable frame rates

RAW 3840×2160P 1–60, 100, 120

RAW & XAVC-I 3840×2160P 1–60, 100, 120

XAVC-I

4096×2160P 1–60

3840×2160P 1–60, 100, 120

1920×1080P 1–60, 100, 120, 150, 180, 200, 240

XAVC-L

3840×2160P 1–60, 100, 120

1920×1080P 1–60, 100, 120, 150, 180, 200, 240

Codec Video format Configurable frame rates

XAVC-I 1920×1080P 1–60, 100, 120

XAVC-L 1920×1080P 1–60, 100, 120

Codec Video format Configurable frame rates

XAVC-I 4096×2160P 1–60

206

207

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Recording Video Intermittently (Interval Rec)

The Interval Rec function allows you to capture video intermittently to the unit’s internal memory. This function is an

effective way to shoot slow-moving subjects.

When you start recording, the unit automatically records a specified number of frames (Number of Frames) at a specified

interval time (Interval Time).

A: Shooting interval (Interval Time)

B: Number of frames in one take (Number of Frames)

Note

Only one special recording function, such as Interval Rec recording, can be used at any one time.

If another special recording mode is enabled while Interval Rec is in use, Interval Rec is automatically released.

Interval Rec mode is automatically released after changing system settings, such as the video format.

Interval Rec settings cannot be changed during recording or playback, or when the thumbnail screen is displayed.

Limitations during recording

Audio is not recorded.

Reviewing the recording (Rec Review) is not possible.

If the unit is turned off during recording

If the power switch on the unit is set to the standby state, the media is accessed for several seconds to record the

images stored in memory up till that moment, and then the unit switches to standby state automatically.

If the DC power cord is disconnected, the power is turned off from the AC adaptor, or the PoE++ power delivery is

disconnected, then the shots taken up to that point may be lost (maximum 10 seconds). Care should be exercised.

Setting the number of frames and the interval between shooting

Set [Project] > [Interval Rec] > [Setting] to [On] in the web menu, and set [Number of Frames] and [Interval Time].

The unit exits Interval Rec mode when it is powered off, but the [Number of Frames] and [Interval Time] settings are

retained. You do not need to set them again the next time you shoot in Interval Rec mode.

208

Hint

Can also be set using [Project] > [Interval Rec] in the camera menu.

Starting shooting

Press the record START/STOP button to start recording. “Int●Rec” and “Int●Stby” appear alternately.

Stopping shooting

Stop the recording.

When shooting ends, the video data stored in memory up to that point is written to the media.

To exit Interval Rec mode, do one of the following.

Set the power supply of the unit to standby.

In recording standby mode, set [Project] > [Interval Rec] > [Setting] to [Off].

Also, Interval Rec mode is automatically released when the unit is rebooted.

5-041-957-11(1)

209

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Recording Cached Pictures (Picture Cache Rec)

The Picture Cache Rec function allows you to capture video retroactively when you start recording by maintaining an

internal cache memory of a specified duration when shooting.

Setting the cache size

Set [Project] > [Picture Cache Rec] > [Setting] to [On] in the web menu, and set the cache size using [Cache Size].

Note

Picture Cache Rec cannot be used in combination with Interval Rec, 2-slot simultaneous recording, or proxy recording. When

Picture Cache Rec is set to On, these other special recording modes are forcibly set to Off.

Picture Cache Rec mode cannot be selected while recording or Rec Review is in progress.

When Picture Cache Rec is set to On, the timecode is recorded in [Free Run] mode even if set to [Regen] or [Rec Run].

The [Output Format] setting may not be configurable in Picture Cache Rec mode. If this occurs, temporarily set Picture Cache

Rec to Off, and then change the setting.

Hint

The cache time may be shorter, depending on the recording format. Check the time displayed in [Project] > [Picture Cache Rec] >

[Cache Rec Time] in the web menu.

Can also be set using [Project] > [Picture Cache Rec] in the camera menu.

You can also switch [Picture Cache Rec] between On and Off using an assignable button.

Starting Picture Cache Rec

When [Picture Cache Rec] is set to On, “●Cache” (● is green) appears.

When you press the record START/STOP button, recording starts and video is written to memory cards starting from the

video stored in the cache memory.

Note

Changing the recording format or basic look clears the video in cache memory stored up to that point, and starts caching new

video. Consequently, picture cache recording of pictures before changing format is not possible, even if you start recording

immediately after changing format.

If Picture Cache Rec is set to On or Off immediately after inserting a memory card, cache data may not be recorded on the card.

[Cache Size] setting Cache time (approximate)

[Short] 5 seconds

[Medium] 10 seconds

[Long] 20 seconds

[Max] Maximum value for each recording format

210

Video is stored in cache memory when the Picture Cache Rec function is set to On. Video prior to the function being set to On is

not cached.

Video is not stored in cache memory while a memory card is being accessed, such as during playback, Rec Review, or thumbnail

screen display. Picture cache recording of video during that interval is not possible.

Canceling Picture Cache Rec

Set [Project] > [Picture Cache Rec] > [Setting] to [Off] in the web menu, or press an assignable button assigned with the

[Picture Cache Rec] function.

5-041-957-11(1)

211

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Recording to Memory Cards A and B Simultaneously (2-slot Simul Rec)

You can record to both memory card A and memory card B simultaneously by setting [Project] > [Simul Rec] > [Setting]

to [On] in the web menu or camera menu.

Recording separately to memory card A and memory card B

You can start/stop recording to each memory card independently using the record START/STOP button or the [2nd Rec

START/STOP] button on the

(Others) tab.

By factory default, both buttons are set to start/stop simultaneous recording to both memory cards A and B.

When the buttons are set to control recording for different memory cards, the [SDI/HDMI Rec Control] record start/stop

control follows the recording state of slot A.

Changing the setting

Set the following using [Project] > [Simul Rec] > [Rec Button Set] in the camera menu.

5-041-957-11(1)

[Rec Button

Set] setting

Buttons and memory cards

Rec Button:

[SlotA SlotB]

2nd Rec

Button: [SlotA

SlotB]

Starts/stops simultaneously recording to memory cards A and B using either button.

Rec Button:

[SlotA]

2nd Rec

Button: [SlotB]

The record START/STOP button starts/stops recording to memory card A, and the [2nd Rec

START/STOP] button on the (Others) tab starts/stops recording to memory card B.

Rec Button:

[SlotB]

2nd Rec

Button: [SlotA]

The record START/STOP button starts/stops recording to memory card B, and the [2nd Rec

START/STOP] button on the (Others) tab starts/stops recording to memory card A.

212

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Video Signal Monitor

You can set the type of video signal to display in the camera image panel to waveform, vectorscope, or histogram using

[Monitoring] > [Video Signal Monitor] > [Setting] in the camera menu.

The orange line indicates the set values of [Level Marker 1] and [Level Marker 2].

You can also assign the [Video Signal Monitor] function to an assignable button.

Monitoring target display

In Cine EI mode, the color space setting or monitor LUT setting information is displayed at the top right of the video

signal monitor to indicate the target of monitoring.

213

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Clip Flags

You can add an [OK] clip flag to a clip by pressing an assignable button assigned with the [Clip Flag OK] function and

selecting [Add OK].

You can delete an [OK] clip flag by pressing the button twice and selecting [Delete Clip Flag].

Hint

You can also add a clip flag using [Thumbnail] > [Set Clip Flag] in the camera menu.

The thumbnail screen can be displayed sorted by clip flag type (filtered clip thumbnail screen). For details, see “Operations on

Recorded Clips” in “Thumbnail Screen.”

5-041-957-11(1)

214

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Breathing Compensation

You can set whether to perform breathing compensation for the lens using [Technical] > [Lens] > [Breathing

Compensation] in the camera menu.

This function corrects for the phenomenon in which changes in the angle of view occur as the focus position varies.

When breathing compensation is executed, a portion of the image is electronically cropped to maintain a constant angle

of view so that the breathing phenomenon does not appear.

Note

When breathing compensation is enabled, the angle of view and image quality may change slightly.

Depending on the lens, it may not be possible to correct the change in the angle of view when breathing compensation is

enabled.

Compensation is not possible when a lens that does not support breathing compensation is attached.

This function is set to Off (fixed) in the following cases.

When [Technical] > [Lens] > [Distortion Comp.] is set to [Off] in the camera menu

When [Shooting] > [S&Q Motion] > [Setting] is set to [On] in the web menu or camera menu

When [Project] > [Rec Format] > [Codec] is set to [RAW] or [RAW & XAVC-I] in the web menu or camera menu

5-041-957-11(1)

215

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Proxy Recording Overview

This function allows you to simultaneously record low-resolution proxy data at the same time as recording high-resolution

original data video.

For details about supported memory cards, formatting memory cards, and checking the remaining capacity, see

“Supported Memory Cards” in “Preparing Memory Cards.”

About the recorded file

The file name extension is “.mp4”.

The timecode is also recorded simultaneously.

Storage destination of the recorded file

The recorded file is stored in the following directory.

About the file name

The file name consists of the clip name recorded on the memory card and an “S03” suffix.

For clip names, see [TC/Media] > [Clip Name Format] in the camera menu.

5-041-957-11(1)

Recording media Folder path

SDXC /PRIVATE/XDROOT/Sub

CFexpress Type A /XDROOT/Sub

216

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Recording a Proxy

You can start recording when proxy recording is enabled.

To stop shooting

Stop the recording.

To set the audio channel for proxy recording

Set the audio channel for proxy data recording using [Project] > [Proxy Rec] > [Audio Channel] in the camera menu.

5-041-957-11(1)

Set [Project] > [Proxy Rec] > [Setting] to [On] in the web menu or camera menu.

Insert a memory card into a CFexpress Type A / SD card slot.

For CFexpress cards, insert with the label facing up.

For SD cards, insert with the label facing down with the beveled corner at the bottom.

Note

Proxy Rec cannot be set to On at the same time as S&Q Motion or Interval Rec. When Proxy Rec is set to On, these other

recording modes are forcibly set to Off.

Press the record START/STOP button.

Proxy recording starts.

Note

If the unit is turned off or the memory card is removed while the memory card is being accessed, the integrity of data on the

card cannot be guaranteed.

All data recorded on the memory card may be discarded. Always make sure the memory card access indicator is off before

turning off the unit or removing the memory card.

Make sure that the memory card does not pop out when inserting or removing it.

217

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Look Overview

When the unit is in Custom mode, you can add adjustments to the black, matrix, and other parameters to create a “look”

based on the base look.

You can also quickly select a different look by saving different combinations of settings in scene files.

The unit is provided with a total of six preset looks.

5-041-957-11(1)

218

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Selecting a Look

This topic describes how to select a look.

Check that [Project] > [Base Setting] > [Shooting Mode] is set to [Custom] in the web menu or camera

menu.

Hint

In [Custom] mode, the [ISO/Gain] button and [Scene File] button are displayed in the camera basic configuration panel.

Press the [Scene File] button in the camera basic configuration panel.

The frame of the [Scene File] button changes to orange.

The Scene File adjustment panel appears.

Press the [Scene File] button on the adjustment panel and select a scene file with the desired look from the

list.

The following presets are configured by factory default.

Hint

You can also select a look using [Paint/Look] > [Scene File] > [Recall] in the camera menu. You can also recall a preset

look using [Scene File] > [Preset Recall].

[Target Display] [SDR(BT.709)] [HDR(HLG)]

Scene file 1 [S-Cinetone] [HLG Live]

Scene file 2 [Standard] [HLG Natural]

Scene file 3 [Still] (Not registered)

Scene file 4 [ITU709] (Not registered)

Scene files 5 to 16 (Not registered) (Not registered)

219

220

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Importing a Desired Base Look

You can import a 3D LUT file, created on a computer or other device, as a base look. Up to 16 files can be imported.

File format: CUBE file (*.cube) for a 17-point or 33-point 3D LUT created using Catalyst Browse, RAW Viewer, or DaVinci

Resolve

(by Blackmagic Design Pty. Ltd.).

Input color space/Gamma: [S-Gamut3.Cine/S-Log3] or [S-Gamut3/S-Log3]

To adjust for underexposure

Verified with Resolve V9.0, V10.0, and V11.0.

Save the 3D LUT file on the device running the Web App.

Open [Paint/Look] > [Base Look] in the web menu.

A list of registered base looks appears.

Press the [Import] button in the row where you want to import the file.

The file selection dialog appears.

Select the prepared 3D LUT file.

The imported 3D LUT file becomes the base look of the unit.

Select the imported 3D LUT file using [Paint/Look] > [Base Look] > [Select] in the camera menu.

Configure [Paint/Look] > [Base Look] > [Input] and [Output] in the camera menu to match the attributes of

the imported 3D LUT file.

221

If there is a tendency for underexposure when auto exposure is selected when using the imported base look, adjust the

look using [Paint/Look] > [Base Look] > [AE Level Offset] in the web menu.

Note

Just importing a 3D LUT file does not affect the image. Load the imported 3D LUT file using [Paint/Look] > [Base Look] > [Select]

in the camera menu.

If [Input] is not set correctly, the proper look will not be obtained.

The [Input], [Output], and [AE Level Offset] menu item settings are applied to the base look selected using [Select]. If multiple 3D

LUT files are imported, select each 3D LUT file using [Select], and configure [Input], [Output], and [AE Level Offset] individually

for each file.

The configured [Input], [Output], and [AE Level Offset] settings are saved for each 3D LUT file.

The base look/LUT selection options for imported 3D LUT files are common to [SDR(BT.709)], [HDR(HLG)], and Cine EI modes,

but color space and gamma conversion is not performed according to these modes.

3D LUT files are not deleted when [Maintenance] > [Reset] > [All Reset (except for Network Settings)] is executed in the web

menu.

5-041-957-11(1)

222

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Customizing a Look

You can customize the look based on the base look using the [Master Black], [R Black], and [B Black] sliders in the

Scene File adjustment panel in the camera basic configuration panel and [Paint/Look] > [Matrix] and other setup items in

the camera menu.

Connect the unit to a TV or monitor, and adjust the picture quality while observing the picture on the TV or monitor

screen.

1: [R Black] slider/adjustment buttons

2: [B Black] slider/adjustment buttons

3: [Master Black] slider/adjustment buttons

Note

When you import a 3D LUT file and apply it to the image, the desired look defined in the 3D LUT file will not be obtained if

[Paint/Look] > [Matrix] and settings other than the base look settings in the camera menu are changed.

You can reset all customized settings using [Paint/Look] > [Reset Paint Settings] > [Reset without Base Look] in the camera

menu.

5-041-957-11(1)

223

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Saving a Look

You can save the current look as a scene file in internal memory using [Paint/Look] > [Scene File] > [Store] in the camera

menu.

You can quickly recall a saved look using the Scene File adjustment panel or using direct menu operations.

Note

If you select another look without saving the current look, the current look is discarded.

Hint

You can overwrite the preset scene files. To restore a preset scene file, load the look to be restored using [Paint/Look] > [Scene

File] > [Preset Recall] in the camera menu, and then save the scene file using [Scene File] > [Store].

To delete a saved look

You can delete a scene file saved in internal memory using [Paint/Look] > [Scene File] > [Delete] in the camera menu.

Hint

When deleted, it is no longer displayed in the Scene File adjustment panel or the direct menu.

5-041-957-11(1)

224

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Deleting a Base Look

You can delete imported 3D LUT files individually using [Paint/Look] > [Base Look] > [Delete] in the camera menu.

You can delete all imported 3D LUT files using [Paint/Look] > [Base Look] > [Delete All] in the camera menu.

Note

Before deleting, check that the base look is not being used in any scene files. If a base look that is being used is deleted, the look

of the corresponding scene files will be incorrect.

Imported 3D LUT files are not deleted when [Maintenance] > [Reset] > [All Reset (except for Network Settings)] is executed in the

web menu.

A deleted base look can no longer be used as a LUT in Cine EI mode.

5-041-957-11(1)

225

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Shooting with Look Adjustment in Post-Production

By using the unit in Cine EI mode and recording gradations evenly from dark areas to bright areas, you can make fine

adjustments, such as locally restoring the gradations of dark areas and bright areas, in post production.

However, when viewing the recorded images on a conventional monitor, the overall contrast will appear low, making

focus and exposure adjustments difficult.

You can apply a LUT to the monitor target on the unit to assist various adjustments during shooting. You can also apply a

LUT to the playback video to check the finished result.

LUTs are applied by the following systems. However, only one LUT can be applied.

SDI output

HDMI output and streaming

Proxy clip recorded on recording media

High-res (main) clip recorded on recording media

5-041-957-11(1)

226

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Applying a LUT to HDMI Output and Streaming

You can apply a LUT to HDMI output and streaming.

Note

The image in the Web App camera image panel is also included in the streaming image.

Hint

This can also be set using [Shooting] > [LUT On/Off] > [HDMI/Stream] in the camera menu.

SDI output can be set in the same way.

For video on recording media, you can set this using [Shooting] > [LUT On/Off] > [Internal Rec] and [Proxy] in the camera menu.

5-041-957-11(1)

Check that [Project] > [Base Setting] > [Shooting Mode] is set to [Cine EI] in the web menu or camera menu.

Hint

In [Cine EI] mode, the [Base ISO/Exposure Index] button and [Base Look/LUT] button are displayed in the camera basic

configuration panel.

Press the [Base Look/LUT] button in the camera basic configuration panel.

The frame of the [Base Look/LUT] button changes to orange.

The Base Look/LUT adjustment panel appears.

Select [HDMI/Stream] > [MLUT].

227

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Changing a LUT

You can change the LUT to apply.

Hint

The unit provides [s709], [709(800%)], and [S-Log3] as preset LUTs.

You can also import and apply a 3D LUT file. For details, see “Importing a Desired Base Look” and “Deleting a Base Look.”

This can also be set using [Paint/Look] > [Base Look] > [Select] in the camera menu.

5-041-957-11(1)

Press the [Base Look/LUT] button in the camera basic configuration panel.

The frame of the [Base Look/LUT] button changes to orange.

The Base Look/LUT adjustment panel appears.

Press the [Base Look/LUT] button and select the base look to apply.

228

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Changing the Distribution of Dark and Bright Areas in the Recorded Image

You can change the distribution of dark areas and bright areas, for example, if you want to prioritize the tone of dark

areas over bright areas, by changing the Exposure Index from the base sensitivity.

Press the [Base Look/LUT] button in the camera basic configuration panel.

The frame of the [Base Look/LUT] button changes to orange.

The Base Look/LUT adjustment panel appears.

Select [HDMI/Stream] > [MLUT].

A LUT is applied to HDMI output and streaming.

Press the [Base ISO/Exposure Index] button in the camera basic configuration panel.

The frame of the [Base ISO/Exposure Index] button changes to orange.

The Base ISO/Exposure Index adjustment panel appears.

Adjust the exposure index according to the desired distribution of dark and bright areas using the

[Exposure Index] slider or [Exposure Index] adjustment buttons.

Adjust the lighting and/or ND filter so that the camera image output from [HDMI/Stream] has the

appropriate exposure.

229

Hint

This can also be set using [Shooting] > [ISO/Gain/EI] > [Exposure Index] in the camera menu.

SDI output can be used in the same way.

The second numerical value of the setting indicates how many steps of brightness information are assigned for bright areas

(brightness higher than 18% gray). Areas brighter than these are overexposed.

Example: In “400EI/5.0E,” 5.0 steps are assigned on the bright side.

You can also use this as a guide to check the tone of dark and bright areas during shooting. Remember to return to the original EI

value after checking the exposure.

5-041-957-11(1)

230

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Recording RAW Video

You can record the RAW video signal output from the SDI OUT connector of the unit to a supported external recorder.

The supported RAW output formats are shown below.

System frequency [Codec] [RAW Output Format]

59.94 / 50 / 29.97 / 25 / 23.98

RAW 4096×2160

RAW 3840×2160

RAW & XAVC-I 4096×2160

RAW & XAVC-I 3840×2160

RAW 4096×2160

RAW & XAVC-I 4096×2160

Connect an external RAW recorder to the SDI OUT connector of the unit.

Set [Project] > [Base Setting] > [Shooting Mode] to [Cine EI] in the web menu or camera menu.

Set the angle of view (FF only) using [Project] > [Rec Format] > [Imager Scan Mode] in the web menu or

camera menu.

Set [Project] > [Rec Format] > [Codec] to [RAW] in the web menu or camera menu.

Selecting [RAW&XAVC-I] will simultaneously record video to the external RAW recorder and video to the memory

cards in the unit.

Set the resolution using [Project] > [Rec Format] > [RAW Output Format] in the web menu or camera menu.

Check that the external recorder is turned on, then press the record START/STOP button on the live

operation screen.

The RAW video recording status is indicated by an icon in the camera image panel.

231

Note

When recording is started on an external recorder without using the record START/STOP button on the live operation screen,

clips may not be recorded properly.

5-041-957-11(1)

Note

The recording control signal is output from the SDI OUT connector of the unit, but it is not possible to get the status of the

external recorder. Accordingly, the unit may indicate RAW video recording is in progress when the external recorder is not

actually recording. Check the indicator on the external recorder to obtain the correct operating status.

232

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Recording RAW Video in Slow & Quick Motion Mode

You can record RAW video in Slow & Quick Motion mode.

For details about the supported frame rates for shooting, see “Slow & Quick Motion.”

5-041-957-11(1)

233

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Switching the Bokeh Control Function On/Off

You can easily adjust the degree of bokeh by linking the ND filter and gain to the iris operation.

Switching the bokeh control function on/off

This function can be enabled only when adjusting the exposure manually. Set the ND filter to variable mode, then set the

iris, gain, shutter, and ND filter to manual adjustment.

You can switch the bokeh control function on/off using [Shooting] > [Iris] > [Bokeh Control] in the camera menu.

When the bokeh control function is set to On, a

(B) icon is displayed on the ND filter and gain indicators.

Note

This function is enabled only on E-mount lenses that can communicate with the unit.

The maximum effect of this function can be obtained using a Sony E-mount lens.

You can also assign the [Bokeh Control] function to an assignable button and switch the bokeh control function between On and

Off using the button.

The bokeh control function is set to Off when any of the following operations is performed.

When the unit is turned off

When any of the iris, gain, shutter, or ND filter is set to Auto

When the shooting mode is switched

When the ND filter is set to clear or preset mode

When the lens is removed

When the unit reboots, for example, after switching the frequency

5-041-957-11(1)

234

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Adjusting the Degree of Bokeh

Note

The appearance may vary depending on the operation speed, lens, shooting settings, and subject, and also the brightness may

change. Performing a camera test before shooting is strongly recommended.

The brightness may change when the iris operation direction changes, such as when opening the iris after closing it or when

closing the iris after opening it. In this case, adjust slightly more than required beforehand and then back up a little, check the

brightness, and then start shooting. For example, if you want to open the iris to F8 aperture and blur the background, first close

the aperture past F8 and then return to F8, check the brightness, and start shooting.

Perform bokeh control operations slowly. If you need to speed up the operation, try adjusting gradually while checking the

changes to the image.

Hint

When the bokeh control function is set to On, the ND filter and gain operate together to offset changes in exposure due to iris

adjustment, allowing you to change the degree of bokeh.

The bokeh control is first linked to the ND filter in response to the iris operation. When the ND filter can no longer be changed, the

gain is linked.

In MF mode, it is recommended that you first open the iris and then adjust the focus.

If you use the auto ND filter instead of the bokeh control function, the ND filter follows the change in the brightness of the subject.

Display during gain link operation

When the bokeh control function is set to On, the gain may change as the iris is adjusted.

When the gain link is active and the gain changes, a message appears at the top of the screen and the

(B) icon on

the gain indicator blinks.

5-041-957-11(1)

Set the bokeh control function to On.

Adjust the ND filter and gain to determine the exposure.

Adjusts the iris.

The degree of bokeh changes.

235

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Saving and Loading Configuration Data Overview

You can save the settings of the unit as configuration data using the Web App. This allows you to quickly recall an

appropriate set of menu settings for the current situation.

With this unit, you can save almost all settings related to camera functions, other than the following note, as an ALL file

(file with all settings).

Note

Network function settings and authentication information are not saved. For details about saved items, see “List of Menu Items.”

5-041-957-11(1)

236

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Saving an ALL File

This topic describes how to save an ALL file.

5-041-957-11(1)

Open [Project] > [All File] in the web menu.

Press the [Save All File] > [Save] button.

The web browser will download a file named all-file.ALL momentarily.

Specify a location and file name for the downloaded all-file.ALL file, and save the file.

For details about file operations, refer to the operating instructions of your device.

237

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Loading an ALL File

This topic describes how to load an ALL file.

Note

The unit will reboot automatically after loading configuration data. After rebooting, reload the page in the web browser.

5-041-957-11(1)

Open [Project] > [All File] in the web menu.

Press the [Load All File] > [Load] button.

The open file dialog appears on the device running the Web App.

Open the file you want to load.

For details about file operations, refer to the operating instructions of your device.

When the load file name confirmation screen appears, press the [OK] button.

When the execution result screen appears, press the [OK] button.

Wait for the unit to reboot, then reconnect the Web App.

238

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

About File Transfer

You can upload a proxy file or original file that is recorded on the unit to a server on the Internet or a server on a local

network.

Note

When the power supply is set to standby state, file transfers are placed on hold even though the unit is still powered.

5-041-957-11(1)

239

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Registering a File Transfer Destination

You can register a transfer destination server before starting a file transfer.

Select [Network] > [File Transfer] > [Default Upload Server] > [Server Settings1] (or [Server Settings2],

[Server Settings3]) in the web menu.

Hint

The name of the selection option will change according to [Display Name] configured in the next step.

Configure the following items for [Network] > [FTP Server 1] to [FTP Server 3] in the web menu.

[Display Name]

Enter the name of the server to display in the transfer job list when selecting a transfer destination server.

[Service]

Displays the server type.

[FTP]: FTP server

[Host Name]

Enter the address or host name of the server.

[Port]

Enter the port number of the server to connect.

[User Name]

Enter the user name.

[Password]

Enter the password.

[Passive Mode]

Turn passive mode on/off.

[Destination Directory]

Enter the name of the directory on the destination server.

Note

If characters that are invalid on the destination server are entered in [Destination Directory], files will be transferred to the

user’s home directory. Invalid characters will vary depending on the server.

[Using Secure Protocol]

Set whether to perform secure FTP transfer.

[Root Certificate]

Load/clear a certificate.

[Load]: Load a CA certificate. Loads PEM-format certificates.

[Clear]: Clear the CA certificate.

[None]: Do not load or clear a certificate.

Note

Set the clock of the unit to the correct time before loading a CA certificate.

When recording in XAVC-I 4096×2160P/3840×2160P 59.94/50P, [Load] cannot be selected.

[Root Certificate Status]: Displays the load status of the certificate.

240

[Reset]: Resets the Server Settings settings to the defaults.

241

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Uploading a Proxy File on a Memory Card from the Thumbnail Screen

You can upload proxy files on a memory card individually from the thumbnail screen.

Note

Up to 200 transfer jobs can be registered.

5-041-957-11(1)

Press the [Thumbnail] button on the live operation screen of the Web App.

The display changes from the camera image to the thumbnail screen.

Select [Thumbnail] > [Transfer Clip (Proxy)] > [Select Clip] in the camera menu.

To transfer all proxy files simultaneously, select [Transfer Clip (Proxy)] > [All Clips].

Clips can be transferred from the thumbnail screen or the filtered clip thumbnail screen.

Select the clip you want to transfer using the [Set] button, and press the [Menu] button.

A transfer confirmation screen appears.

Select [Execute].

The proxy file corresponding to the selected clip is registered as a transfer job, and uploading begins.

When the transfer job is successfully registered, the transfer result screen appears.

Press the [OK] button.

242

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Uploading an Original File on a Memory Card from the Thumbnail Screen

You can upload an original file on a memory card from the thumbnail screen.

Note

Up to 200 transfer jobs can be registered.

5-041-957-11(1)

Press the [Thumbnail] button on the live operation screen of the Web App.

The display changes from the camera image to the thumbnail screen.

Select [Thumbnail] > [Transfer Clip] > [Select Clip] in the camera menu.

To transfer all original files simultaneously, select [Transfer Clip] > [All Clips].

Clips can be transferred from the thumbnail screen or the filtered clip thumbnail screen.

Select the clip you want to transfer using the [Set] button, and press the [Menu] button.

A transfer confirmation screen appears.

Select [Execute].

The original file of the selected clip is registered as a transfer job, and uploading begins.

When the transfer job is successfully registered, the transfer result screen appears.

Press the [OK] button.

243

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Checking the File Transfer Status

You can check the status of file transfer by selecting [Network] > [File Transfer] > [View Job List] in the camera menu.

Note

Up to 200 transfer jobs can be registered.

The transfer jobs are retained when the unit is switched to standby state, but up to 10 minutes of recent progress information may

be lost if the power is disconnected by any other means.

If an error occurs during file transfer, the transfer of a clip with the same name as a transferred clip may not be resumed

depending on the settings and status of the transfer destination server. In this case, check the transfer destination server settings

and status.

Hint

If [Network] > [File Transfer] > [Auto Upload (Proxy)] is set to [On] in the camera menu and a network connection exists, proxy

files are automatically uploaded to the server specified using [Default Upload Server] when recording ends.

5-041-957-11(1)

244

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Uploading Using Secure FTP

You can upload files with encryption using FTPS in Explicit mode (FTPES) for the connection with the destination file

server.

For secure FTP transfer, set [Using Secure Protocol] to [On] in the destination file server settings and load a certificate.

For details about configuration, see “Registering a File Transfer Destination.”

5-041-957-11(1)

245

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

About Streaming

The unit can simultaneously stream the video and audio that is output from the HDMI connector.

Note

To use streaming as the main video, set [Monitoring] > [Output Display] > [SDI] to [On] and [HDMI/Stream] to [Off] in the web

menu, and monitor the camera status on an SDI monitor.

If a monitor connected to the HDMI connector does not support the HDMI output format configured using the [Monitoring] menu in

the web menu or camera menu, the camera image will not be output to the Web App. Streaming video also cannot be output.

The streaming resolution cannot be set higher than the HDMI output signal resolution.

When viewed by multiple users, the image may become distorted depending on the codec settings.

The unit supports the following streaming methods. The video codecs available for selection are shown in parentheses.

RTSP (H.264, H.265)

SRT-Caller (H.264)

SRT-Listener (H.264)

NDI|HX (H.264, H.265)

Configure the streaming format setting, video codec setting, and audio codec setting in that order.

●: Enabled, –: Disabled

Hint

The image in the Web App camera image panel is also a streaming system.

5-041-957-11(1)

Streaming format

Codec setting

Video Stream 1 Video Stream 2 Video Stream 3 Audio Stream

RTSP

●

video 1

●

video 2

– ●

SRT ● – – ●

NDI|HX

●

Main

●

Sub

– ●

Web App – – ● –

246

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Setting the Streaming Format

Set the streaming format using [Stream] > [Stream] > [Stream Setting] > [Setting] in the web menu.

When [Setting] is set to [RTSP]

In RTSP streaming, the image from a single camera can be viewed simultaneously by up to five users.

You can set up to two video codec modes.

[Port Number]

Sets the port number to use for RTSP streaming. The default value is 554.

Changing the setting will reboot the RTSP server.

[Time Out]

Specifies the timeout time of the Keep-Alive command for RTSP streaming. The timeout time can be set in the range 0

seconds to 600 seconds. The default value is 60 seconds.

When set to 0 seconds, timeout due to the Keep-Alive command does not occur.

[Authentication]

Sets whether authentication is required.

[Video Port Number 1], [Video Port Number 2]

Specifies the image data communications port number to use for RTSP unicast streaming. The factory default value for

Video Port Number 1 is 51000. The factory default value for Video Port Number 2 is 53000. Specify an even number in

the range 1024 to 65534. The number set here and the subsequent odd number, obtained by adding 1, become the two

port numbers used for image data communications and control.

[Video Port Number 1] and [Video Port Number 2] correspond to [Stream] > [Video Stream] > [Video Stream 1] and

[Video Stream 2].

[Audio Port Number]

Specifies the audio data communications port number used for RTSP unicast streaming. The default value is 57000.

Specify an even number in the range 1024 to 65534. The number set here and the subsequent odd number, obtained by

adding 1, become the two port numbers used for audio data communications and control.

When [Setting] is set to [SRT-Caller] or [SRT-Listener]

The video codec mode is H.264 only.

[Destination]

Displayed when the streaming mode is set to [SRT-Caller]. Sets the connection destination URL.

[Port Number]

Displayed when the streaming mode is set to [SRT-Listener]. Sets the port number on which to listen. The default value

is 4201.

[Latency]

Sets the latency in the range 20 ms to 8000 ms. The default value is 120.

[TTL]

Sets the TTL value in the range 1 to 255. The default value is 64.

[Encryption]

Selects the encryption method. Select Off, AES128, or AES256. The default value is Off.

[Passphrase]

Sets the passphrase used for encryption. Pressing the [Reset] button will reset the configured passphrase.

[ARC]

To enable the Adaptive Rate Control function, set to On.

When the Adaptive Rate Control function is enabled, interruptions in the image caused by communication line

congestion can be reduced.

When [Setting] is set to [NDI|HX]

247

The unit complies with NDI|HX version 2 from NewTek.

To use NDI|HX, a license key must be purchased.

Purchasing a license key

Purchase at the following NewTek URL.

http://new.tk/ndi_sony

Note

Download the latest NDI|HX driver and install it in a NewTek product.

For details about NDI|HX registration and operation, refer to the operating instructions for the NewTek product.

[License]

Displays the license information for an enabled license.

[Source Name]

Displays the source name.

[Group]

To enable the NDI grouping function, set to On.

[Group Name]: Sets the NDI group name. Multiple settings can be configured separated by a comma.

[Discovery Server 1], [Discovery Server 2]

Sets NDI discovery server 1 and NDI discovery server 2.

[Reliable UDP Mode]

To enable Reliable UDP mode, set to On.

[Multicast Mode]

To enable multicast streaming, set to On.

[Multicast Prefix]: Sets the prefix to use for multicast streaming.

[Multicast Netmask]: Sets the netmask that determines the multicast address range.

[Multicast TTL]: Sets the TTL value for multicast streaming in the range 1 to 256. The default value is 3.

[Multi-TCP Mode]

To enable Multi-TCP mode, set to On.

[Unicast UDP Mode]

To enable Unicast UDP mode, set to On.

About 3rd-party services and software

Different terms of use may apply.

The provision of services and software updates may be interrupted or terminated without notice.

The description of services and software is subject to change without notice.

Separate registration and subscription may be required.

Sony will not be liable for any claims made by users or a third party due to the use of services and software of other

companies.

5-041-957-11(1)

248

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Setting the Video Codec for Streaming

Set the video codec using [Stream] > [Video Stream] in the web menu.

[Video Stream 1], [Video Stream 2], [Video Stream 3]

You can set up to three image codec modes. Configure the following settings separately for each image mode.

[Video Stream 3] is used for the Web App camera image panel display.

Note

When [Stream] > [Stream Setting] > [Setting] is set to [SRT-Caller] or [SRT-Listener], some of the [Video Stream 1], [Video

Stream 2], and [Video Stream 3] settings ([Codec], [Size], [Frame Rate], [Bit Rate Compression Mode]) have default values.

[Codec 1], [Codec 2], [Codec 3]

Select [H.264], [H.265], or [Off]. Note that [Codec 1] cannot be set to [Off]. Also, [Codec 3] is set to [JPEG] (fixed).

Note

The following symptoms may occur depending on the combination of various settings, such as the picture size, frame rate, and

bit rate of [Codec 1], [Codec 2], and [Codec 3].

Increased video latency.

Frame skipping during video playback.

Intermittent audio.

Slow camera response to various commands.

Slow camera response to operations from a remote controller.

Slow monitor screen display and configuration operations.

If you experience these symptoms, reduce the values of the picture size, frame rate, and bit rate parameters, or change the

values of other setup parameters to resolve the issue.

When [Stream] > [Stream Setting] > [Setting] is set to [SRT-Caller] or [SRT-Listener], [Codec 1] is set to [H.264] (fixed). [Codec 2]

is set to [Off] (fixed).

When the picture size or system frequency of the HDMI output is changed, [Codec 2] is set to [Off].

[Size 1], [Size 2], [Size 3]

Selects the picture size to stream from the camera.

The available picture size options will vary depending on the picture size of the HDMI output.

Note

When the picture size or system frequency of the HDMI output is changed, the maximum picture size will be selected.

[Frame Rate 1], [Frame Rate 2], [Frame Rate 3]

Sets the frame rate of the image.

“fps” units indicate the number of frames streamed per second.

The available frame rate options will vary depending on the picture size of the HDMI output.

Note

When the picture size or system frequency of the HDMI output is changed, the maximum frame rate will be selected.

249

[I-Picture Mode 1], [I-Picture Mode 2]

Sets the method for specifying the I-picture insertion interval for H.264 and H.265 to [Time] or [Frame].

Cannot be set for [Codec 3].

[Time]: Sets the I-picture insertion interval as a time.

[Frame]: Sets the I-picture insertion interval as a number of frames.

[I-Picture Interval 1], [I-Picture Interval 2]

Sets the I-picture insertion interval in units of seconds. Sets a value in the range 1 second to 5 seconds. The default

value is 1 second.

Cannot be set for [Codec 3].

[I-Picture Ratio 1], [I-Picture Ratio 2]

Sets the I-picture insertion interval for H.264 and H.265 as a number of frames in the range 15 to 300. The default value

is 300 frames.

Cannot be set for [Codec 3].

[Profile 1], [Profile 2]

Sets the H.264 or H.265 image codec profile.

[H.264]: Select [high], [main], or [baseline] profile.

[H.265]: Select [main] or [main10] profile. When two video codecs are enabled, only the [main] profile selection option is

available.

Image compression efficiency increases in the order of [high], [main], and [baseline]. Select a profile supported by your

system.

When [H.265] is set to [main10], operation is in [main10] when the HDMI output is YCrCb or [main] when the HDMI

output is RGB.

Cannot be set for [Codec 3].

[Bit Rate Compression Mode 1], [Bit Rate Compression Mode 2]

Select [CBR] or [VBR].

To maintain a constant bit rate, select [CBR]. To maintain image quality, select [VBR].

Cannot be set for [Codec 3].

Note

The frame rate and bit rate actually streamed may differ from the set values, depending on the picture size, shooting scene,

network environment, and other factors.

When [Stream] > [Stream Setting] > [Setting] is set to [SRT-Caller] or [SRT-Listener], [Bit Rate Compression Mode 1] is set to

[CBR] (fixed).

[Bit Rate 1], [Bit Rate 2]

You can set the bit rate per video stream when [Bit Rate Compression Mode] is set to [CBR]. Setting a high bit rate

allows you to stream high image quality video.

Cannot be set for [

Codec 3].

[Quality 1], [Quality 2], [Quality 3]

Sets the image quality in the range 1 to 10. A value of 10 sets the highest image quality. The default value is 6.

For [Quality 1] and [Quality 2], you can set H.264 image quality by setting [Bit Rate Compression Mode] to [VBR] and

[Codec] to [H.264]. You can set H.265 image quality by setting [Bit Rate Compression Mode] to [VBR] and [Codec] to

[H.265].

5-041-957-11(1)

250

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Setting the Audio Codec for Streaming

Set the audio codec using [Stream] > [Audio Stream] in the web menu.

[Setting]

To enable audio streaming, set to On.

[Codec]

Selects the type of codec to use for streaming audio.

[AAC (256kbps)]: Select to prioritize the sound quality.

[AAC (128kbps)]: Select to prioritize the data capacity.

This setting has no affect on the clip recorded by the unit or the audio signal embedded in the HDMI/SDI signal.

5-041-957-11(1)

251

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Starting/Stopping Streaming

For [RTSP], [SRT-Listener], and [NDI|HX]

The unit waits for a streaming delivery request.

Launch a client app for viewing streaming and access the URL shown in the following table.

Enter the values for the user name and password that are configured on the unit.

<camera_address>: IP address of the unit

<Port>: Listener port configured using [Port Number]

RTSP streaming example

Up to two streams can be enabled on the unit. The URL of each stream is shown below.

rtsp://<camera_address>:<Port>/video1 ([Video Stream 1])

rtsp://<camera_address>:<Port>/video2 ([Video Stream 2])

Note

Playback in all applications or devices is not guaranteed.

For [SRT-Caller]

Press the [Stream now] button on the

(Stream) tab of the live operation screen to start streaming. The button label

changes to [Stop stream], and the [Stream] icon appears at the top of the camera image panel.

Press the [Stop stream] button during streaming to stop streaming. The button label changes back to [Stream now], and

the [Stream] icon at the top of the camera image panel disappears.

SRT-Listener streaming example

The URL of the stream is shown below.

srt://<camera_address>:<Port>

<camera_address>: IP address of the unit

<Port>: Listener port configured using [Port Number]

Note

Playback in all applications or devices is not guaranteed.

5-041-957-11(1)

Streaming format URL

RTSP

Video Stream 1 rtsp://<camera_address>:<Port>/video1

Video Stream 2 rtsp://<camera_address>:<Port>/video2

SRT-Listener srt://<camera_address>:<Port>

NDI|HX Refer to the operating instructions for the NDI|HX compatible client device.

252

253

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Thumbnail Screen

When you press the [Thumbnail] button on the playback operation screen or the THUMBNAIL button on the infrared

remote control, clips recorded on the memory card are displayed in the camera image panel. This display on the camera

image panel is referred to as the thumbnail screen.

You can select a clip on the thumbnail screen and start playback of that clip.

Pressing the [Thumbnail] button during thumbnail screen display closes the thumbnail screen and returns to the shooting

image display.

Note

Only the clips recorded in the currently selected recording format are displayed on the thumbnail screen. If an expected recorded

clip is not displayed, check the recording format. Take special note of this fact before formatting (initializing) media.

Screen layout

The thumbnail of a selected clip is displayed with an orange background.

Information for the selected clip is displayed at the bottom of the screen.

254

Selected memory card

A lock icon appears on the right if the memory card is write-protected.

Clip number/total number of clips2.

Thumbnail (index picture)

Displays the index picture of a clip. When a clip is recorded, its first frame is automatically set as the index picture.

Clip/frame information is displayed below the thumbnail. You can change the information displayed using [Thumbnail]

> [Customize View] > [Thumbnail Caption] in the camera menu.

Clip name

Displays the name of the selected clip.

Recording format

Displays the file format of the selected clip.

Special recording information

Displays the recording mode only if the clip was recorded using a special recording mode.

For Slow & Quick Motion clips, the frame rate is displayed on the right.

Clip duration7.

Creation date8.

255

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Playing Recorded Clips

You can play recorded clips when the unit is in recording standby (Stby) mode.

This topic describes how to play recorded clips using the GUI control panel.

Insert the memory card to play.

Press the [Thumbnail] button.

The clip thumbnails appear.

Use the arrow buttons in the GUI control panel to move the cursor to the thumbnail for the clip you want to

play.

256

Note

There may be momentary picture breakup or still image display at the boundary between clips. You cannot operate the unit

during this period.

When you select a clip in the thumbnail screen and begin playback, there may be momentary picture breakup at the start of the

clip. To view the start of the clip without breakup, put the unit into playback mode, pause, press the

(Previous) button to

return to the start of the clip, and start playback again.

Note

Clips cannot be selected by touch operation.

Press the [Set] button in the GUI control panel.

Playback begins from the start of the selected clip.

Operate the playback control panel as required.

Hint

You can also control operation using the GUI control panel.

Play: Press the [Set] button.

Playback pause: Press the [Set] button during playback. Press again to return to normal playback.

Jump to start of clip/start of next clip: Press the left button/right button.

Fast forward/reverse: Press and hold the left button/right button. The playback returns to normal speed when you release

the button.

Stop playback: Press the [Cancel/Back] button.

Button Function

(Play/Pause) button Plays a clip. During playback, pauses the clip.

(Fast Forward) button, (Fast

Reverse) button

Plays a clip at high speed. When the button is pressed, the playback

speed changes in three steps.

(Previous) button, (Next)

button

Jumps to start of clip or the previous/next clip.

(Stop) button Stops playback.

257

258

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Operations on Recorded Clips

On the thumbnail screen, you can operate the clips or check clip properties using the [Thumbnail] menu in the camera

menu.

Press the [Menu] button on the playback operation screen to display the camera menu in the camera image panel.

You can perform the following operations using the [Thumbnail] menu in the camera menu.

259

Hint

You can also press the [Menu] button on the live operation screen to display the camera menu.

Operations using the [Thumbnail] menu in the camera menu

260

Select a function to operate using the arrow buttons in the GUI control panel and press the [Set] button.

Press the [Cancel/Back] button to return to the previous screen.

Note

Some items cannot be selected, depending on the state when the menu was displayed.

Menu items for clip operations

The [Thumbnail] menu in the camera menu has the following menu items related to clip operations.

[Display Clip Properties]

[Set Clip Flag]

[Lock/Unlock Clip]

[Delete Clip]

[Transfer Clip]

[Transfer Clip (Proxy)]

[Filter Clips]

[Customize View]

For details about each menu item, see the “[Thumbnail] menu.”

To display the clip properties screen

Select [Thumbnail] > [Display Clip Properties] in the camera menu to display the clip properties screen.

Press the

(Previous) button or (Next) button to jump to the previous/next clip.

To add clip flags

You can add clip flags (OK, NG, or KP marks) to clips to filter the display of clips based on the clip flags.

Select the thumbnail for the clip to which you want to add a clip flag, then select the clip flag using [Thumbnail］] > [Set

Clip Flag] in the camera menu.

Hint

You can also use an assignable button assigned with the clip flag function to add clip flags.

To display the filtered clip thumbnail screen

Select [Thumbnail] > [Filter Clips] in the camera menu, and select a clip flag type to display only those clips that have the

specified flag.

To display all clips, select [All].

You can also press the [Display] button to sort the thumbnail display by flags.

To delete clips

You can delete clips from memory cards.

Select [Thumbnail] > [Delete Clip] > [Select Clip] or [All Clips] in the camera menu.

[Select Clip]: Deletes the selected clip. Multiple clip selection is supported.

[All Clips]: Deletes all of the displayed clips.

To change the information displayed on the thumbnail screen

Setting Added clip flag

[Add OK] OK

[Add NG] NG

[Add KEEP] KP

261

You can change the clip/frame information displayed below the thumbnail.

Select [Thumbnail] > [Customize View] > [Thumbnail Caption] in the camera menu, and select the information to display.

[Date Time]: Displays the date and time the clip was created and last modified.

[Time Code]: Displays the timecode.

[Duration]: Displays the duration of the clip.

[Sequential Number]: Displays a sequential number on each thumbnail.

5-041-957-11(1)

262

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Camera Menu Configuration

When the [Menu] button in the GUI control panel or the MENU button on the infrared remote control is pressed, the

camera menu for configuring the various required settings for shooting and playback is displayed in the camera image

panel.

The menu comprises the following menus.

Menu configuration

[User] menu

Contains menu items configured by the user.

Can be edited using [Edit User Menu].

[Edit User] menu

Contains menu items for editing the [User] menu.

[Shooting] menu

Contains settings related to shooting.

[Project] menu

Contains basic project settings.

[Paint/Look] menu

Contains settings related to image quality.

[Pan-Tilt] menu

Contains settings related to the pan/tilt.

[TC/Media] menu

263

Contains settings related to timecodes and recording media.

[Monitoring] menu

Contains settings related to video output and the screen display.

[Audio] menu

Contains settings related to audio.

[Thumbnail] menu

Contains settings related to thumbnail display.

[Technical] menu

Contains settings for technical items.

[Network] menu

Contains settings related to networks.

[Maintenance] menu

Contains devices settings, such as the clock and language.

Camera menu configuration and hierarchy

Level 1 Level 2

User

(Factory settings)

Base Setting

Focus

S&Q Motion

LUT On/Off

Simul Rec

Proxy Rec

Interval Rec

Picture Cache Rec

Assignable Button

Scene File

Base Look

P/T Acceleration

Clip Name Format

Format Media

Video Signal Monitor

Marker

Zoom

Lens

Edit User Menu

Shooting ISO/Gain/EI

ND Filter

Shutter

Iris

264

Level 1 Level 2

Auto Exposure

White

White Setting

Offset White

Focus

S&Q Motion

LUT On/Off

Noise Suppression

Flicker Reduce

SteadyShot

Project

Base Setting

Rec Format

Cine EI Setting

Simul Rec

Proxy Rec

Interval Rec

Picture Cache Rec

SDI/HDMI Rec Control

Assignable Button

Paint/Look

Scene File

Base Look

Reset Paint Settings

Black

Knee

Detail

Matrix

Multi Matrix

Pan-Tilt P/T Acceleration

TC/Media Timecode

TC Display

Users Bit

HDMI TC Out

265

Level 1 Level 2

Clip Name Format

Update Media

Format Media

Media Life

Monitoring

Output Format

Display On/Off

Video Signal Monitor

Marker

Audio

Audio Input

Audio Output

Thumbnail

Display Clip Properties

Set Clip Flag

Lock/Unlock Clip

Delete Clip

Transfer Clip

Transfer Clip (Proxy)

Filter Clips

Customize View

Technical

Color Bars

Genlock

Tally

Rec Review

Zoom

Lens

APR

Network

Wired LAN

File Transfer

Maintenance

Language

Clock Set

Hours Meter

266

267

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Operating the Camera Menu

When the [Menu] button in the GUI control panel or the MENU button on the infrared remote control is pressed, the

camera menu for configuring the various required settings for shooting and playback is displayed in the camera image

panel.

The menu is operated using buttons in the GUI control panel.

[Menu] button: Press to display the camera menu. Press again while the camera menu is displayed to hide the menu.

Arrow buttons: Press the arrows buttons to move the cursor up/down/left/right in the camera menu to select menu

items or settings.

[Set] button: Press to apply the selected item.

[Cancel/Back] button: Press to return to the previous menu. An uncompleted change is canceled.

Note

Some items cannot be selected, depending on the state when the menu was displayed.

Setting Menu Items

Move the cursor to the item you want to set using the arrow buttons in the GUI control panel and press the [Set] button to

apply the setting.

The menu item selection area displays up to eight lines. If the available options for an item cannot be displayed at the

same time, scroll the display by moving the cursor up/down.

For sub-items with a large settings range (for example, −99 to +99), the settings area is not displayed. The current

setting is highlighted to indicate that the value can be changed.

Selecting [Execute] for a function will execute the corresponding function.

Selecting an item that requires confirmation before execution will temporarily hide the menu and display a

confirmation message. Check the message, and then select whether to execute or cancel the function.

5-041-957-11(1)

268

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Entering a Character String

When you select an item, such as a file name, which requires character entry, the character entry screen appears.

Press the arrow buttons in the GUI control panel to select the character type and apply the setting.

[ABC]: Uppercase alphabetic characters

[abc]: Lowercase alphabetic characters

[123]: Numeric characters

[!#$]: Special characters

Select a character and press the [Set] button to apply the setting.

The cursor moves to the next field.

[Space]: Enters a space character at the cursor position.

[←] [→]: Moves the position of the cursor.

[BS]: Deletes the character on the left of the cursor (backspace).

When finished, press the [Done] button to apply the setting.

The character string is confirmed and the character entry screen disappears.

269

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

User

This topic describes the function and settings of each menu item.

Note

You can add and remove menu items in the [User] menu using the [Edit User] menu. Up to 20 items can be configured.

5-041-957-11(1)

Item Description

Base Setting Project > Base Setting item

Focus Shooting > Focus item

S&Q Motion Shooting > S&Q Motion item

LUT On/Off Shooting > LUT On/Off item

Simul Rec Project > Simul Rec item

Proxy Rec Project > Proxy Rec item

Interval Rec Project > Interval Rec item

Picture Cache Rec Project > Picture Cache Rec item

Assignable Button Project > Assignable Button item

Scene File Project > Scene File item

Base Look Paint/Look > Base Look item

P/T Acceleration Pan-Tilt > P/T Acceleration item

Clip Name Format TC/Media > Clip Name Format item

Format Media TC/Media > Format Media item

Video Signal Monitor Monitoring > Video Signal Monitor item

Marker Monitoring > Marker item

Zoom Technical > Zoom item

Lens Technical > Lens item

Edit User Menu Displays the Edit User menu.

270

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Edit User

The [Edit User] menu is displayed at the top level when [Edit User Menu] is selected in the [User] menu.

5-041-957-11(1)

Item

Sub-item

setting

Factory

default

Description

Add Item

Add an item to the [User]

– – Adds a level 2 menu item to the [User] menu.

Customize Reset

Reset the items in the [User]

– –

Restores the menu items registered in the [User] menu

to the factory default.

Level 2 menu item selected

during editing

Delete –

Deletes the registered level 2 menu item from the [User]

menu.

Move –

Rearranges the registered menu items within the [User]

menu.

Edit Sub

Item

–

Edits (register/delete) the registered level 3 menu sub-

item in the [User] menu.

271

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

ISO/Gain/EI

Sets gain settings.

Item Sub-item setting Factory default Description

Mode ISO/dB dB

Selects the gain setting

mode.

ISO/Gain<L>

For details about settings, see

“ISO/Gain Settings and Default

Values.”

–

Sets the <L> gain preset

value.

Exposure

Index<L>

When Base ISO is set to ISO 800:

200EI / 4.0E

250EI / 4.3E

320EI / 4.7E

400EI / 5.0E

500EI / 5.3E

640EI / 5.7E

800EI / 6.0E

1000EI / 6.3E

1250EI / 6.7E

1600EI / 7.0E

2000EI / 7.3E

2500EI / 7.7E

3200EI / 8.0E

When Base ISO is set to ISO 12800:

3200EI / 4.0E

4000EI / 4.3E

5000EI / 4.7E

6400EI / 5.0E

8000EI / 5.3E

10000EI / 5.7E

12800EI / 6.0E

16000EI / 6.3E

20000EI / 6.7E

25600EI / 7.0E

32000EI / 7.3E

40000EI / 7.7E

51200EI / 8.0E

When Base ISO is set to

ISO 800: 800EI / 6.0E

When Base ISO is set to

ISO 12800: 12800EI / 6.0E

Sets the Exposure

Index<L> value.

Shockless

Gain

On / Off Off

Turns the shockless gain

function on/off.

Base

Sensitivity

High / Low Low

Sets the base sensitivity

for Custom mode.

Base ISO ISO 12800 / ISO 800 ISO 800

Sets the base ISO

sensitivity for Cine EI

mode.

272

273

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

ND Filter

Sets the preset values for the ND filter.

5-041-957-11(1)

Item Sub-item setting Factory default Description

Mode Preset / Variable Variable Selects the ND filter mode.

Preset1 1/4 / 1/8 / 1/16 / 1/32 / 1/64 / 1/128 1/4 Sets the preset 1 value for the ND filter.

Preset2 1/4 / 1/8 / 1/16 / 1/32 / 1/64 / 1/128 1/16 Sets the preset 2 value for the ND filter.

Preset3 1/4 / 1/8 / 1/16 / 1/32 / 1/64 / 1/128 1/64 Sets the preset 3 value for the ND filter.

274

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Shutter

Sets electronic shutter operation.

Item Sub-item setting

Factory

default

Description

Mode Speed / Angle Speed

Selects the operating mode

of the electronic shutter.

Speed: Mode for setting

the shutter speed in units

of seconds. Select for

shooting fast-moving

subjects clearly.

Angle: Mode for setting the

shutter speed as a shutter

angle.

Shutter

Speed

On/Off

On / Off Off

Sets whether the exposure

time when Speed mode is

selected follows the

[Shutter Speed] value or is

set for full exposure.

Shutter

Speed

64F to 1/8000

The available settings vary depending on the frame

frequency of the selected video format.

59.94P: 64F / 32F / 16F / 8F / 7F / 6F / 5F / 4F / 3F / 2F /

1/50 / 1/60 / 1/100 / 1/120 / 1/125 / 1/250 / 1/500 / 1/1000 /

1/2000 / 1/4000 / 1/8000

50P: 64F / 32F / 16F / 8F / 7F / 6F / 5F / 4F / 3F / 2F / 1/50

/ 1/60 / 1/100 / 1/120 / 1/125 / 1/250 / 1/500 / 1/1000 /

1/2000 / 1/4000 / 1/8000

29.97P: 64F / 32F / 16F / 8F / 7F / 6F / 5F / 4F / 3F / 2F /

1/30 / 1/40 / 1/50 / 1/60 / 1/100 / 1/120 / 1/125 / 1/250 /

1/500 / 1/1000 / 1/2000 / 1/4000 / 1/8000

25P: 64F / 32F / 16F / 8F / 7F / 6F / 5F / 4F / 3F / 2F / 1/25

/ 1/33 / 1/50 / 1/60 / 1/100 / 1/120 / 1/125 / 1/250 / 1/500 /

1/1000 / 1/2000 / 1/4000 / 1/8000

24P/23.98P: 64F / 32F / 16F / 8F / 7F / 6F / 5F / 4F / 3F /

2F / 1/24 / 1/32 / 1/48 / 1/50 / 1/60 / 1/96 / 1/100 / 1/120 /

1/125 / 1/250 / 1/500 / 1/1000 / 1/2000 / 1/4000 / 1/8000

59.94P:

1/60

50P: 1/50

29.97P:

1/30

25P: 1/25

24P/23.98P:

1/24

Sets the shutter speed

when Speed mode is

selected.

Shutter

Angle

64F / 32F / 16F / 8F / 7F / 6F / 5F / 4F / 3F / 2F / 360.0° /

300.0° / 270.0° / 240.0° / 216.0° / 210.0° / 180.0° / 172.8° /

150.0° / 144.0° / 120.0° / 90.0° / 86.4° / 72.0° / 45.0° / 30.0°

/ 22.5° / 11.25° / 5.6°

180.0°

Sets the shutter angle

when Angle mode is

selected.

ECS

On/Off

On / Off Off

Turns the Extended Clear

Scan function on/off.

275

Item Sub-item setting

Factory

default

Description

ECS

Frequency

23.99 to 8000

The available settings vary depending on the frame

frequency of the selected recording format.

59.94P:

60.00

50P: 50.00

29.97P:

30.00

23.98P:

23.99

25P: 25.02

24P: 24.02

Sets the ECS frequency

when Mode is set to ECS.

276

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Iris

Sets iris settings.

5-041-957-11(1)

Item Sub-item setting Factory default Description

Bokeh Control On / Off Off Turns the bokeh control function on/off.

277

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Auto Exposure

Sets automatic exposure adjustment settings.

Item Sub-item setting

Factory

default

Description

Level

+3.0 / +2.75 / +2.5 / +2.25 / +2.0 / +1.75 / +1.5 /

+1.25 / +1.0 / +0.75 / +0.5 / +0.25 / ±0 / −0.25 /

−0.5 / −0.75 / −1.0 / −1.25 / −1.5 / −1.75 / −2.0 /

−2.25 / −2.5 / −2.75 / −3.0

±0

Sets the brightness level for the

automatically detected exposure.

Mode Backlight / Standard / Spotlight Standard

Sets the operating mode of auto

exposure adjustment.

Backlight: Backlight mode (mode for

reduced darkening of a subject when the

subject is backlit)

Standard: Standard mode

Spotlight: Spotlight mode (mode for

reduced clipped whites when subject is lit

by spotlighting)

Speed −99 to +99 ±0

Sets the adjustment speed of auto

exposure adjustment.

AGC On / Off Off

Turns the AGC (auto gain control)

function on/off.

AGC

Limit

For details about settings, see “AGC Limit

Settings and Default Values.”

–

Sets the maximum gain of the AGC

function.

AGC

Point

F2.8 / F4 / F5.6 F2.8

Sets the F-stop value of the iris where

AGC operation starts when the AGC

function is On.

Auto

Shutter

On / Off Off

Turns the auto shutter control function

on/off.

A.SHT

Limit

1/100 / 1/150 / 1/200 / 1/250 / 1/2000 1/2000

Sets the fastest shutter speed of the auto

shutter function.

A.SHT

Point

F5.6 / F8 / F11 / F16 F11

Sets the F-stop value of the iris where

auto shutter operation starts.

Clip High

light

On / Off Off

Turns the function that ignores brightest

areas to provide a flatter response at high

luminance on/off.

278

Item Sub-item setting

Factory

default

Description

Detect

Window

1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 / Custom 1

Sets the light metering range for

automatically adjusting the exposure

according to the brightness of the subject.

(Not available when adjusting exposure

manually)

Detect

Window

Indication

On / Off Off

Turns the light metering range indication

on/off.

Custom

Width

40 to 999 500 Sets the width of the light metering range.

Custom

Height

70 to 999 500

Sets the height of the light metering

range.

Custom

Position

−479 to +479 ±0

Sets the horizontal position of the light

metering range.

Custom

Position

−464 to +464 ±0

Sets the vertical position of the light

metering range.

279

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

White

Sets white balance settings.

5-041-957-11(1)

Item

Sub-

item

setting

Factory

default

Description

Preset

White

2000K

15000K

3200K Sets the white balance preset value.

Color

Temp

<A>

2000K

15000K

3200K

Sets the white balance color temperature saved in memory A.

Note

Since Color Temp is clipped at 2000K and 15000K during R Gain/B Gain operation, it may

not be possible to display the correct color temperature value for the R Gain/B Gain value.

Tint<A>

−99 to

+99

±0

Sets the white balance tint value saved in white memory A.

Note

Since Tint is clipped at ±99 during R Gain/B Gain operation, it may not be possible to

display the correct tint value for the R Gain/B Gain value.

R Gain

<A>

−99.0

+99.0

±0.0 Sets the white balance R gain value saved in memory A.

B Gain

<A>

−99.0

+99.0

±0.0 Sets the white balance B gain value saved in memory A.

280

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

White Setting

Adjusts white balance settings.

5-041-957-11(1)

Item

Sub-item

setting

Factory

default

Description

Shockless

White

Off / 1 / 2 / 3 2

Sets the white balance response speed when switching white

balance mode.

Off: Switches instantaneously.

1 to 3: Switches more slowly the higher the number.

ATW Speed 1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 3

Sets the response speed in ATW mode.

The fastest response speed is 1, and the slowest response speed

is 5.

281

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Offset White

Sets white balance offset settings.

5-041-957-11(1)

Item

Sub-item

setting

Factory

default

Description

Offset White

<A>

On / Off Off

Selects whether to add (On) or not to add (Off) an offset value to the white

balance in memory A.

Offset Color

Temp<A>

−99 to

+99

±0

Sets the color temperature offset to be added to the white balance in

memory A when [Offset White <A>] is set to On.

Offset Tint<A>

−99 to

+99

±0

Sets the tint value offset to be added to the white balance in memory A

when [Offset White <A>] is set to On.

Offset

White<ATW>

On / Off On

Selects whether to add (On) or not to add (Off) an offset value to the ATW

white balance.

Offset Color

Temp<ATW>

−99 to

+99

±0

Sets the color temperature offset to be added to the ATW white balance

when [Offset White<ATW>] is set to On.

Offset

Tint<ATW>

−99 to

+99

±0

Sets the tint value offset to be added to the ATW white balance when

[Offset White<ATW>] is set to On.

282

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Focus

Sets focus settings.

5-041-957-11(1)

Item

Sub-item

setting

Factory

default

Description

Transition

Speed

1(Slow) / 2 / 3 /

4 / 5 / 6 /

7(Fast)

Sets the speed of the focus drive for when the subject changes during

auto focus.

AF Subj.

Shift

Sens.

1(Locked On) /

2 / 3 / 4 /

5(Responsive)

5(Responsive) Sets the sensitivity for changing subject focus during auto focus.

Focus

Area

Wide / Zone /

Flexible Spot

Wide

Sets the target area for auto focus and push auto focus (AF).

See “Adjusting the Focus Automatically (Auto Focus)” and

“Setting the Auto Focus Area/Position (Focus Area).”

Wide: Searches for a subject over a wide angle of the image when

focusing.

Zone: Automatically searches for a focus point within the specified

zone.

Flexible Spot: Focuses on a specified position in the image.

Focus

Area (AF-

Flexible Spot Flexible Spot Sets the target area for push auto focus (AF-S).

Face/Eye

Detection

Face/Eye Only

AF /

Face/Eye

Priority AF / Off

Face/Eye

Priority AF

Enables/disables face detection AF.

See “Tracking Using Face and Eye Detection (Face/Eye

Detection AF).”

Push AF

Mode

AF / Single-shot

AF(AF-S)

AF Sets the push auto focus mode.

Touch

Function

in MF

Tracking AF /

Spot Focus

Tracking AF

Sets the operation when the camera image screen is touched in MF

mode.

AF Assist On / Off On

When set to On, allows you to temporarily override auto focus and set

focus manually.

See “Setting the Auto Focus Target Manually (AF Assist) Using

the Web App” and “Focusing Manually During Auto Focus Using

the Supplied Infrared Remote Control.”

283

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

S&Q Motion

Sets Slow & Quick Motion mode settings (see “Slow & Quick Motion”).

5-041-957-11(1)

Item Sub-item setting

Factory

default

Description

Setting On / Off Off Turns the Slow & Quick motion mode on/off.

Frame

Rate

1fps to 60fps / 100fps / 120fps /

150fps / 180fps / 200fps / 240fps

–

Sets the frame rate for Slow & Quick Motion shooting.

Note

The available settings vary depending on the selected

system frequency, codec, and video format.

284

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

LUT On/Off

Sets LUT settings.

5-041-957-11(1)

Item Sub-item setting

Factory

default

Description

SDI MLUT On / MLUT Off MLUT Off

Selects whether to apply Monitor LUT to the SDI

output video.

HDMI/Stream MLUT On / MLUT Off MLUT Off

Selects whether to apply Monitor LUT to the HDMI

and streaming output video.

Proxy MLUT On / MLUT Off MLUT Off

Selects whether to apply Monitor LUT to the proxy

recording video.

Internal Rec MLUT On / MLUT Off MLUT Off

Selects whether to apply Monitor LUT to the main

recording video.

LUT On/Off

Button Target

SDI / HDMI/Stream / SDI &

HDMI/Stream

Sets the target output controlled by an assignable

button assigned with LUT On/Off.

285

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Noise Suppression

Sets noise suppression settings.

Hint

The [Setting(Custom)] and [Level(Custom)] settings are reflected in the [Target Display] setting.

5-041-957-11(1)

Item

Sub-item

setting

Factory

default

Description

Setting(Custom) On / Off On Turns the noise suppression function on/off in Custom mode.

Level(Custom) Low / Mid / High Mid Sets the noise suppression level in Custom mode.

Setting(Cine EI) On / Off Off Turns the noise suppression function on/off in Cine EI mode.

Level(Cine EI) Low / Mid / High Mid Sets the noise suppression level in Cine EI mode.

286

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Flicker Reduce

Sets flicker correction settings.

5-041-957-11(1)

Item

Sub-item

setting

Factory

default

Description

Mode Auto / On / Off Off Sets the flicker correction mode.

Frequency 50Hz / 60Hz 60Hz

Sets the frequency of the power source supplying the lighting that is

causing the flicker.

287

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

SteadyShot

Sets image stabilization settings.

5-041-957-11(1)

Item Sub-item setting

Factory

default

Description

Setting

Active / Standard

/ Off

Off

Sets the image stabilization function.

Note

Enabled when a compatible lens is attached.

When set to Active or Standard, unexpected behavior may occur during

pan/tilt operation.

288

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Base Setting

Sets base settings.

5-041-957-11(1)

Item Sub-item setting

Factory

default

Description

Shooting

Mode

Custom / Cine EI Custom

Sets the shooting mode.

See “Setting the shooting mode” in “Configuring Basic

Operation.”

Target

Display

SDR(BT.709) /

HDR(HLG)

SDR(BT.709)

Sets the color space of the recording/output in Custom

mode.

289

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Rec Format

Sets recording format settings.

[RAW Output Format] settings

Default values are shown in bold.

The conditions under which [RAW Output Format] cannot be set have been omitted.

[Video Format] settings

Item Sub-item setting

Factory

default

Description

Frequency 59.94 / 50 / 29.97 / 25 / 24 / 23.98 59.94 Selects the system frequency.

Imager

Scan

Mode

FF / S35 FF Selects the imager size.

Codec RAW / RAW & XAVC-I / XAVC-I / XAVC-L XAVC-I

Sets the clip recording/playback codec.

Note

When [Imager Scan Mode] is set to [S35],

[RAW] and [RAW & XAVC-I] cannot be

selected.

RAW

Output

Format

The available settings vary depending on

the [Frequency] setting.

See “[RAW Output Format] settings”

below.

–

Sets the size of the RAW image to output to an

external RAW recorder.

Note

When [Codec] is set to [RAW & XAVC-I], the

[Video Format] setting switches in link with

the [RAW Output Format] setting.

Video

Format

The available settings vary depending on

the [Frequency], [Imager Scan Mode], and

[Codec] settings.

See “[Video Format] settings” below.

– Sets the image size and bit rate.

Frequency Imager Scan Mode Codec Setting

59.94 / 50 / 29.97 / 25 / 23.98 FF RAW / RAW & XAVC-I

4096×2160

3840×2160

24 FF RAW / RAW & XAVC-I 4096×2160

Frequency Imager Scan Mode Codec Setting

290

Default values are shown in bold.

5-041-957-11(1)

Frequency Imager Scan Mode Codec Setting

59.94 / 50 / 29.97 / 25 / 23.98

RAW –

RAW & XAVC-I

4096×2160P

3840×2160P

XAVC-I

4096×2160P

3840×2160P

1920×1080P

XAVC-L

3840×2160P

1920×1080P 50

1920×1080P 35

S35

XAVC-I 1920×1080P

XAVC-L

1920×1080P 50

1920×1080P 35

24 FF

RAW –

RAW & XAVC-I / XAVC-I 4096×2160P

291

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Cine EI Setting

Sets Cine EI mode settings (see “Setting the shooting mode” in “Configuring Basic Operation”).

5-041-957-11(1)

Item Sub-item setting Factory default Description

Color

Gamut

S-Gamut3/SLog3 / S-

Gamut3.Cine/SLog3

S-

Gamut3.Cine/SLog3

Sets the color space in Cine EI

mode.

292

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Simul Rec

Sets 2-slot simultaneous recording mode settings (see “Recording to Memory Cards A and B Simultaneously (2-slot

Simul Rec)”).

5-041-957-11(1)

Item Sub-item setting Factory default Description

Setting On / Off Off

Turns 2-slot

simultaneous recording

mode on/off.

Rec

Button

Set

Rec Button: [SlotA SlotB] 2nd Rec Button: [SlotA SlotB] /

Rec Button: [SlotA] 2nd Rec Button: [SlotB] / Rec Button:

[SlotB] 2nd Rec Button: [SlotA]

Rec Button: [SlotA

SlotB] 2nd Rec

Button: [SlotA SlotB]

Assigns the record

buttons used to control

each recording media.

293

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Proxy Rec

Sets proxy recording mode settings (see “Proxy Recording”).

5-041-957-11(1)

Item Sub-item setting Factory default Description

Setting On / Off Off Turns proxy recording mode on/off.

Audio Channel CH1/CH2 / CH3/CH4 CH1/CH2 Selects the audio channel to record to proxy data.

294

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Interval Rec

Sets interval recording mode settings (see “Recording Video Intermittently (Interval Rec)”).

5-041-957-11(1)

Item Sub-item setting Factory default Description

Setting On / Off Off

Turns interval recording mode on/off.

(Setting this mode to On will set all

other special modes to Off.)

Interval

Time

1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 / 7 / 8 / 9 / 10 / 15 / 20

/ 30 / 40 / 50 (sec)

1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 / 7 / 8 / 9 / 10 / 15 / 20

/ 30 / 40 / 50 (min)

1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 6 / 12 / 24 (hour)

Sets the interval between recordings

in Interval Rec recording mode

(when Interval Rec is set to On).

Number

Frames

1frame / 2frames / 3frames /

6frames / 9frames / 12frames

The available settings vary depending

on the frame frequency of the selected

video format.

59.94P/50P: 2frames / 6frames /

12frames

29.97P/25P/24P/23.98P: 1frame /

3frames / 6frames / 9frames

59.94P/50P: 2frames

29.97P/25P/24P/23.98P:

1frame

Sets the number of frames to record

per take in Interval Rec recording

mode (when Interval Rec is set to

On).

295

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Picture Cache Rec

Sets picture cache recording mode settings (see “Recording Cached Pictures (Picture Cache Rec)”).

5-041-957-11(1)

Item Sub-item setting

Factory

default

Description

Setting On / Off Off Turns the picture cache function on/off.

Cache

Size

Short / Medium /

Long / Max

Max

Sets the time for accumulation of images in picture cache memory

(picture cache recording time).

Cache

Rec Time

– –

Displays the time for accumulation of images in picture cache memory

(picture cache recording time).

296

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

SDI/HDMI Rec Control

Sets SDI/HDMI recording control settings.

5-041-957-11(1)

Item

Sub-item

setting

Factory

default

Description

Setting

Off / SDI/HDMI

Remote I/F /

Parallel Rec

Off

Sets recording start/stop control of an external connected device via the

SDI/HDMI output signal.

Off: Do not use remote control.

SDI/HDMI Remote I/F: Record stop/start control of an external connected

device, when there is no media inserted in the unit. Not synchronized with

frame accuracy to media in the unit.

Parallel Rec: Record stop/start control of an external connected device, when

media is inserted in the unit. Synchronized with frame accuracy to media in the

unit.

Note

For control using the HDMI output signal, set [TC/Media] > [HDMI TC Out] >

[Setting] to [On] in the camera menu.

297

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Assignable Button

Sets function assignments to assignable buttons (<1> to <9>) and [Focus Hold Button].

The following functions can be assigned.

[Off]: No function assignment.

[Base ISO/Sensitivity]: Switches the base sensitivity of the image sensor.

[AGC]: Turns the AGC function on/off.

[Push AGC]: Enables the AGC function while the button is pressed.

[ND Filter]

In variable mode: Adjusts the ND filter transmittance. Press and hold to switch between Clear/Manual/Auto.

In preset mode: Press and hold to switch presets.

[ND Filter Position]: Switches ND filters.

[Auto ND Filter]: Turns the auto ND filter function on/off.

[Push Auto ND]: Enables the auto ND filter function while the button is pressed.

[Auto Iris]: Turns the iris function on/off.

[Push Auto Iris]: Enables the auto iris function while the button is pressed.

[Bokeh Control]: Turns the bokeh control mode on/off.

[Auto Shutter]: Turns the auto shutter function on/off.

[AE Level/Mode]: Adjusts the AE level. Press and hold to switch the AE mode.

[Backlight]: Switches between Backlight and Standard.

[Spotlight]: Switches between Spotlight and Standard.

[Preset White Select]: Switches the white balance preset mode value.

[ATW]: Turns the ATW function on/off.

[ATW Hold]: Pauses ATW function operation.

[AF Speed/Sens.]: Switches the AF transition speed setting and AF subject shift sensitivity setting.

[Focus Setting]: Sets the focus area.

[Face/Eye Detection AF]: Switches the face detection AF settings.

[Push AF Mode]: Switches the Push AF mode setting.

[Push AF/MF]: In MF focus mode, activates AF while the button is pressed. In AF focus mode, activates MF while the

button is pressed.

[Focus Hold]: In AF focus mode, focus is fixed while the button is pressed.

[S&Q Motion]: Turns the Slow & Quick Motion function on/off. Sets the shooting frame rate if pressed and held.

[LUT On/Off] Turns the LUT function on/off. The switching target is set using [Shooting] > [LUT On/Off] > [LUT On/Off

Button Target].

[SteadyShot]: Switches between Active, Standard, and Off.

[Crop Select]: Switches Imager Scan Mode. Switching enabled within the range without changing the recording format.

[Rec] Starts/stops recording.

[

Picture Cache Rec]: Turns picture cache recording mode on/off.

[Rec Review]: Turns the recording review function on/off.

[Clip Flag OK]: Executes Add OK. Press twice to execute Delete Clip Flag.

[Clip Flag NG]: Executes Add NG. Press twice to execute Delete Clip Flag.

[Clip Flag Keep]: Executes Add KEEP. Press twice to execute Delete Clip Flag.

[Slot Select] Switches between memory slot (A) and (B).

[Color Bars]: Turns the color bars on/off.

[DURATION/TC/U-BIT]: Switches between Time Code, Users Bit, and Duration.

[Display]: Turns the screen indicators on/off.

[Lens Info]: Switches the depth-of-field indicator.

[Video Signal Monitor]: Switches the video signal monitor (such as a waveform monitor).

[Marker]: Turns the marker function on/off.

298

[Thumbnail]: Displays/exits the thumbnail screen.

[Auto Upload (Proxy)]: Turns proxy file auto transfer on/off.

[Direct Menu]: Displays/exits the direct menu.

[User Menu]: Displays/exits the User menu.

5-041-957-11(1)

299

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Scene File

Sets settings related to scene files (see “Shooting with the Desired Look”).

5-041-957-11(1)

Item Sub-item setting

Factory

default

Description

Recall – –

Loads a scene file stored in internal

memory and applies the settings as the

current image quality settings.

Store – –

Saves the current image quality state as a

scene file in internal memory.

Delete – –

Deletes a scene file stored in internal

memory.

Preset

Recall

When Shooting Mode is set to Custom and

Target Display is set to SDR(BT.709): S-Cinetone /

Standard / Still / ITU709

When Shooting Mode is set to Custom and

Target Display is set to HDR(HLG): HLG Live /

HLG Natural

–

Applies preset image quality settings (non-

rewritable) as the current image quality

settings.

300

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Base Look

Sets settings related to the base look.

5-041-957-11(1)

Item Sub-item setting Factory default Description

Select

When Shooting Mode is set to Custom and

Target Display is set to SDR(BT.709): S-

Cinetone / Standard / Still / ITU709 / User1 to

User16

When Shooting Mode is set to Custom and

Target Display is set to HDR(HLG): HLG Live

/ HLG Natural / User1 to User16

When Shooting Mode is set to Cine EI: s709

/ 709(800) / S-Log3 / User1 to User16

When Shooting Mode is set

to Custom and Target Display

is set to SDR(BT.709): S-

Cinetone

When Shooting Mode is set

to Custom and Target Display

is set to HDR(HLG): HLG Live

When Shooting Mode is set

to Cine EI: s709

Selects a base look.

Delete – –

Deletes the selected

base look.

Delete

All

– – Deletes all base looks.

Input S-Gamut3/SLog3 / S-Gamut3.Cine/SLog3 S-Gamut3.Cine/SLog3

Sets the input gamut for

the base look selected

using [Select].

Output BT.709 / HLG BT.709

Sets the output color

gamut for the base look

selected using [Select].

Level

Offset

0EV / 1/3EV / 2/3EV / 1EV / 4/3EV / 5/3EV /

2EV

0EV

Sets the exposure

reference value for the

base look selected

using [Select].

301

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Reset Paint Settings

Resets the [Paint/Look] menu settings, excluding the base look.

5-041-957-11(1)

Item

Sub-item

setting

Factory

default

Description

Reset without Base

Look

Execute /

Cancel

–

Resets the [Paint/Look] menu settings, excluding the

base look.

Execute: Execute function.

302

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Black

Sets black settings.

5-041-957-11(1)

Item Sub-item setting Factory default Description

Master Black −99.0 to +99.0 ±0.0 Sets the master black level.

R Black −99.0 to +99.0 ±0.0 Sets the R black level.

B Black −99.0 to +99.0 ±0.0 Sets the B black level.

303

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Knee

Sets knee correction settings.

5-041-957-11(1)

Item Sub-item setting Factory default Description

Setting

When Target Display is set

to SDR(BT.709): On / Off / ---

When Target Display is set

to HDR(HLG): On / Off / ---

When Target Display

is set to

SDR(BT.709):Off

When Target Display

is set to HDR(HLG):Off

Turns the knee correction function on/off.

Note

Enabled only when [Base Look] > [Select] is set

to [Standard], [ITU709], [HLG Live], or [HLG

Natural].

Auto

Knee

When Target Display is set

to SDR(BT.709): On / Off / ---

When Target Display is set

to HDR(HLG): On / Off / ---

When Target Display

is set to

SDR(BT.709):On

When Target Display

is set to HDR(HLG):Off

Turns the auto knee function on/off.

Note

Enabled only when [Base Look] > [Select] is set

to [Standard] or [ITU709].

Point 75% to 109% 90% Sets the knee point.

Slope −99 to +99 ±0 Sets the knee slope.

304

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Detail

Sets detail adjustment settings.

5-041-957-11(1)

Item Sub-item setting

Factory

default

Description

Setting On / Off On Turns the detail function on/off.

Level −7 to +7 ±0 Sets the detail level.

Manual

Setting

On / Off / --- Off Turns the detail manual adjustment function on/off.

V/H

Balance

−2 to +2 ±0

Sets the balance between vertical (V) and horizontal (H) detail for detail

manual adjustment.

B/W

Balance

Type1 / Type2 /

Type3 / Type4 /

Type5

Type3

Sets the balance between black (B) detail for low-luminance areas and

white (W) detail for high-luminance areas for detail manual adjustment.

Limit 0 to 7 7 Sets the limit level of the detail for detail manual adjustment.

Crispening 0 to 7 0 Sets the crispening level for detail manual adjustment.

High Light

Detail

0 to 4 0

Sets the detail level of high-luminance areas for detail manual

adjustment.

305

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Matrix

Sets matrix correction settings.

5-041-957-11(1)

Item Sub-item setting Factory default Description

User Matrix On / Off Off Turns the user matrix correction function on/off.

User Matrix Level −99 to +99 ±0 Adjusts the color saturation of the entire image.

User Matrix Phase −99 to +99 ±0 Adjusts the color tone (phase) of the entire image.

User Matrix R-G −99 to +99 ±0 Sets a user-defined R-G user matrix.

User Matrix R-B −99 to +99 ±0 Sets a user-defined R-B user matrix.

User Matrix G-R −99 to +99 ±0 Sets a user-defined G-R user matrix.

User Matrix G-B −99 to +99 ±0 Sets a user-defined G-B user matrix.

User Matrix B-R −99 to +99 ±0 Sets a user-defined B-R user matrix.

User Matrix B-G −99 to +99 ±0 Sets a user-defined B-G user matrix.

306

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Multi Matrix

Sets multi matrix correction settings.

5-041-957-11(1)

Item Sub-item setting

Factory

default

Description

Setting On / Off Off

Turns the multi matrix correction function

on/off.

Reset Execute / Cancel –

Resets the hue and saturation of each

axis color to the default values.

Axis

B / B+ / MG− / MG / MG+ / R / R+ / YL− / YL /

YL+ / G− / G / G+ / CY / CY+ / B−

B Selects the axis.

Hue −99 to +99 ±0

Sets the hue of the color used for multi

matrix correction.

Saturation −99 to +99 ±0

Sets the saturation of the color used for

multi matrix correction.

307

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

P/T Acceleration

Sets settings related to acceleration for pan/tilt operations.

5-041-957-11(1)

Item

Sub-item

setting

Factory

default

Description

Ramp

Curve

1 to 9 8

Selects the acceleration/deceleration for pan/tilt operations. The larger the

number, the higher the acceleration.

308

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Timecode

Sets timecode settings.

5-041-957-11(1)

Item Sub-item setting

Factory

default

Description

Mode

Preset / Regen /

Clock

Preset

Sets the timecode running mode.

Preset: Starts running from a preset value.

Regen: Starts running from the timecode of the end of the

previous clip.

Clock: Uses the internal clock as the timecode.

Run Rec Run / Free Run Rec Run

Rec Run: Runs only when recording.

Free Run: Always running, regardless of recording operation.

Setting – –

Sets the timecode to an arbitrary value.

Set: Set the value.

Reset Execute / Cancel –

Resets the timecode to 00:00:00:00.

Execute: Execute function.

Format

DF / NDF DF

Sets the timecode format.

DF: Drop Frame

NDF: Non-Drop Frame

309

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

TC Display

Sets time data display settings.

5-041-957-11(1)

Item Sub-item setting Factory default Description

Display Select Timecode / Users Bit / Duration Timecode Switches the time data display.

310

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Users Bit

Sets settings related to user bits.

5-041-957-11(1)

Item Sub-item setting Factory default Description

Mode Fix / Time Fix

Sets the user bit mode.

Fix: Uses an arbitrary fixed value in user bits.

Time: Uses the current hour, minute, and second in user bits.

Setting – – Sets the user bits to an arbitrary value.

311

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

HDMI TC Out

Sets settings related to timecode output when using HDMI.

5-041-957-11(1)

Item

Sub-item

setting

Factory

default

Description

Setting On / Off Off

Sets whether to output the timecode to devices for other purposes, using

HDMI.

312

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Clip Name Format

Sets settings related to clip naming and deletion.

To set the title

5-041-957-11(1)

Item Sub-item setting

Factory

default

Description

Title

Prefix

nnn_ (nnn is the last 3

digits of the serial

number)

(Max. 7-digit display)

nnn

Sets the title part (4 to 46 characters) of the clip name.

Opens a character string entry screen.

For details about setting titles and the character entry screen, see

“To set the title” and “Character string entry screen structure”

below.

Number

Set

0001 to 9999 0001 Sets the 4-digit number suffix of the clip name.

Select the character to insert at the cursor position in the [Title Prefix] area from the character selection

area using the arrow buttons in the GUI control panel (character is highlighted), and press the [Set] button

in the GUI control panel.

The selected character is inserted, and the cursor moves to the right.

Repeat step 1 to set the title.

Use [BS] as required.

After setting the title, select [Done] to close the character entry screen.

For detail about operation on the character entry screen, see “Entering a Character String.”

The following characters can be selected.

!#$%()+,-.;=@[ ]^_~ space

0123456789

abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ

313

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Update Media

Updates the management file on memory cards (see “Restoring Memory Cards”).

5-041-957-11(1)

Item Sub-item setting Factory default Description

Media(A) Execute / Cancel –

Updates the management file on the memory card in slot A.

Execute: Execute function.

Media(B) Execute / Cancel –

Updates the management file on the memory card in slot B.

Execute: Execute function.

314

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Format Media

Formats (initializes) memory cards (see “Formatting (Initializing) Memory Cards”).

5-041-957-11(1)

Item Sub-item setting Factory default Description

Media(A) Full Format / Quick Format / Cancel – Formats the memory card in slot A.

Media(B) Full Format / Quick Format / Cancel – Formats the memory card in slot B.

315

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Media Life

Displays the remaining life of the memory cards.

Note

Requires memory cards that support remaining media life display.

5-041-957-11(1)

Item Sub-item setting Factory default Description

Media(A) – – Displays the remaining life of the memory card in slot A.

Media(B) – – Displays the remaining life of the memory card in slot B.

316

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Output Format

Sets output format settings.

5-041-957-11(1)

Item Sub-item setting

Factory

default

Description

SDI

For details about settings, see “Output Formats and

Limitations.”

–

Sets the SDI and HDMI output

resolution.

HDMI –

317

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Display On/Off

Sets display item settings.

To show a display item, select On. To hide a display item, select Off.

Item Sub-item setting Factory default

File Transfer Status On / Off On

Rec/Play Status On / Off On

RAW Output Control Status On / Off On

Tally On / Off On

Focus Mode On / Off On

Focus Position On / Off On

Focus Area Indicator On / Off On

Focus Area Ind.(AF-S) On / Off On

Face/Eye Detection Frame On / Off On

Lens Info On / Off Off

Imager Scan Mode On / Off On

Rec Format On / Off On

Frame Rate On / Off On

Zoom Position On / Off On

SteadyShot On / Off On

Base Look/Rec Look On / Off On

SDI/HDMI Rec Control On / Off On

Monitoring Look On / Off On

Proxy Status On / Off On

Base ISO/Sensitivity On / Off On

Media Status On / Off On

Clip Name On / Off On

White Balance On / Off On

Scene File On / Off On

Focus Indicator On / Off On

Auto Exposure Mode On / Off On

318

Item Sub-item setting Factory default

Auto Exposure Level On / Off On

Timecode On / Off On

ND Filter On / Off On

Iris On / Off On

ISO/Gain/EI On / Off On

Shutter On / Off On

Level Gauge On / Off On

Audio Level Meter On / Off On

Video Level Warning On / Off On

Clip Number On / Off On

Notice Message On / Off On

319

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Video Signal Monitor

Sets video signal monitor settings.

5-041-957-11(1)

Item Sub-item setting Factory default Description

Setting Off / Waveform / Vector / Histogram Off Sets the type of video signal monitor.

Level Marker 1 0% to 109% 70% Sets the level of luminance level marker 1.

Level Marker 2 0% to 109% 100% Sets the level of luminance level marker 2.

320

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Marker

Sets marker display settings.

Item Sub-item setting

Factory

default

Description

Setting On / Off On Turns the display of all markers on/off.

Color

White / Yellow / Cyan / Green / Magenta /

Red / Blue

White Selects the marker signal color.

Center

Marker

1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / Off Off Selects the center marker.

Safety

Zone

On / Off Off Turns the safety zone marker on/off.

Safety

Area

80% / 90% / 92.5% / 95% 90%

Selects the size of the safety zone marker

(as a percentage of total screen size).

Aspect

Marker

Line / Mask / Off Off Selects the type of aspect marker.

Aspect

Mask

0 to 15 12

Sets the level of the video signal outside

the marker.

Aspect

Safety

Zone

On / Off Off Turns the aspect safety zone marker on/off.

Aspect

Safety

Area

80% / 90% / 92.5% / 95% 90%

Selects the size of the aspect safety zone

marker (as a percentage of total screen

size).

Aspect

Select

1:1 / 4:3 / 13:9 / 14:9 / 15:9 / 16:9 / 17:9 /

1.66:1 / 1.85:1 / 2.35:1 / 2.39:1 / Custom

2.39:1

Sets the mode when displaying the aspect

marker.

Custom

Aspect

Ratio

Enter an arbitrary value. 01.00:01.00

Sets the aspect ratio to an arbitrary value.

Note

Enabled when [Aspect Select] is set to

[Custom].

Guide

Frame

On / Off Off Turns the guide frame display on/off.

100%

Marker

On / Off Off Turns the 100% marker on/off.

User Box On / Off Off Turns the user box marker display on/off.

321

Item Sub-item setting

Factory

default

Description

User Box

Width

3 to 479 240

Sets the user box marker width (distance

from the center to the left and right edges).

User Box

Height

3 to 269 135

Sets the user box marker height (distance

from the center to the top and bottom

edges).

User Box

H Position

−476 to +476 0

Sets the horizontal position of the center of

the user box marker.

User Box

V Position

−266 to +266 0

Sets the vertical position of the center of

the user box marker.

322

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Audio Input

Sets audio input settings.

Item Sub-item setting

Factory

default

Description

AUDIO IN

Select

MIC / LINE MIC Selects the type of device connected to the AUDIO IN connector.

Phantom

Power

+48V

On / Off Off Displays the status of the +48 V phantom power supply.

CH1 Input

Select

AUDIO IN CH1

AUDIO

IN CH1

Displays the input source for recording on channel 1.

CH2 Input

Select

AUDIO IN CH1 /

AUDIO IN CH2

AUDIO

IN CH2

Switches the input source for recording on channel 2.

CH3 Input

Select

Off / AUDIO IN CH1

AUDIO

IN CH1

Switches the input source for recording on channel 3.

CH4 Input

Select

Off / AUDIO IN CH1 /

AUDIO IN CH2

AUDIO

IN CH2

Switches the input source for recording on channel 4.

AUDIO IN

CH1 MIC

Ref.

−80dB / −70dB /

−60dB / −50dB /

−40dB / −30dB

−50dB

Sets the reference recording level for XLR microphone input from

AUDIO IN CH1.

AUDIO IN

CH2 MIC

Ref.

−80dB / −70dB /

−60dB / −50dB /

−40dB / −30dB

−50dB

Sets the reference recording level for XLR microphone input from

AUDIO IN CH2.

Line Input

Reference

+4dB / 0dB / −3dB /

EBUL

+4dB

Selects the reference input level when [AUDIO IN Select] is set to

LINE.

Reference

Level

−20dB / −18dB /

−16dB / −12dB /

EBUL

−20dB Selects the recording level of the 1 kHz reference tone signal.

CH1 Wind

Filter

On / Off Off Enables/disables the wind reduction filter for channel 1 recording.

CH2 Wind

Filter

On / Off Off Enables/disables the wind reduction filter for channel 2 recording.

CH3 Wind

Filter

On / Off Off Enables/disables the wind reduction filter for channel 3 recording.

CH4 Wind

Filter

On / Off Off Enables/disables the wind reduction filter for channel 4 recording.

323

Item Sub-item setting

Factory

default

Description

CH1 Level

Control

Auto / Manual Auto

Selects audio input level automatic adjustment or manual adjustment

for recording channel 1.

CH2 Level

Control

Auto / Manual Auto

Selects audio input level automatic adjustment or manual adjustment

for recording channel 2.

CH3 Level

Control

Auto / Manual Auto

Selects audio input level automatic adjustment or manual adjustment

for recording channel 3.

CH4 Level

Control

Auto / Manual Auto

Selects audio input level automatic adjustment or manual adjustment

for recording channel 4.

CH1 Input

Level

0 to 99 49 Sets the input level for recording channel 1.

CH2 Input

Level

0 to 99 49 Sets the input level for recording channel 2.

CH3 Input

Level

0 to 99 49 Sets the input level for recording channel 3.

CH4 Input

Level

0 to 99 49 Sets the input level for recording channel 4.

Master

Input

Level

0 to 99 99 Sets the master audio input level.

Limiter

Mode

Off / −6dB / −9dB /

−12dB / −15dB /

−17dB

Off

Selects the limiter characteristic for large input signals when adjusting

the audio input level manually.

CH1&2

AGC

Mode

Mono / Stereo Stereo

Sets the auto level adjustment mode for recording channel 1 and

channel 2. When set to Stereo, the AGC is linked between channels.

CH3&4

AGC

Mode

Mono / Stereo Stereo

Sets the auto level adjustment mode for recording channel 3 and

channel 4. When set to Stereo, the AGC is linked between channels.

AGC Spec

−6dB / −9dB / −12dB

/ −15dB / −17dB

−6dB Selects the AGC characteristic.

1kHz Tone

on Color

Bars

On / Off Off

Turns the 1 kHz reference tone signal on/off when displaying color

bars.

Note

When set to [On], the 1 kHz reference tone signal is set for recording

on channel 3 and channel 4, even if [CH3 Input Select] and [CH4 Input

Select] are set to [Off].

324

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Audio Output

Sets audio output settings.

5-041-957-11(1)

Item

Sub-item

setting

Factory

default

Description

HDMI/Stream

Output CH

CH1/CH2 /

CH3/CH4

CH1/CH2

Sets the combination of audio channels for the

HDMI/streaming output.

325

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Display Clip Properties

Displays the clip properties screen.

5-041-957-11(1)

Item Sub-item setting Factory default Description

Display Clip Properties – – Displays the clip properties screen.

326

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Set Clip Flag

Sets clip flag settings.

5-041-957-11(1)

Item Sub-item setting Factory default Description

Add OK – – Adds an OK flag.

Add NG – – Adds an NG flag.

Add KEEP – – Adds a KEEP flag.

Delete Clip Flag – – Deletes all flags.

327

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Lock/Unlock Clip

Sets clip protection settings.

5-041-957-11(1)

Item Sub-item setting Factory default Description

Select Clip – – Selects and locks/unlocks a clip.

Lock All Clips – – Locks all clips.

Unlock All Clips – – Unlocks all clips.

328

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Delete Clip

Deletes clips.

5-041-957-11(1)

Item Sub-item setting Factory default Description

Select Clip – – Deletes the selected clip.

All Clips – – Deletes all clips.

329

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Transfer Clip

Transfers clips.

5-041-957-11(1)

Item Sub-item setting Factory default Description

Select Clip – – Transfers selected clips.

All Clips – –

Transfers all clips.

Note

Up to 200 transfer jobs can be registered.

330

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Transfer Clip (Proxy)

Transfers proxy clips.

5-041-957-11(1)

Item Sub-item setting Factory default Description

Select Clip – – Transfers proxy clips corresponding to the selected clips.

All Clips – –

Transfers proxy clips corresponding to all the clips.

Note

Up to 200 transfer jobs can be registered.

331

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Filter Clips

Sets settings of clips to display.

5-041-957-11(1)

Item Sub-item setting Factory default Description

OK – – Display only clips that have an OK flag.

NG – – Display only clips that have an NG flag.

KEEP – – Display only clips that have a KEEP flag.

None – – Display only clips that have no flag.

All – – Displays all clips, regardless of whether there are any flags.

332

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Customize View

Switches the thumbnail screen view.

5-041-957-11(1)

Item Sub-item setting

Factory

default

Description

Thumbnail

Caption

Date Time / Time Code / Duration /

Sequential Number

Time Code

Switches the information displayed below

thumbnails.

333

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Color Bars

Sets color bar settings.

5-041-957-11(1)

Item Sub-item setting Factory default Description

Setting On / Off Off Turns the color bars on/off.

Type ARIB / 100% / 75% / SMPTE ARIB Selects the color bar type.

334

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Genlock

Configures the genlock status display (see “Synchronizing the Phase of the Video Signal (Genlock)).”

5-041-957-11(1)

Item Sub-item setting Factory default Description

Reference Internal / External(HD) / External(SD) – Displays the type of genlock reference signal.

335

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Tally

Sets recording/tally lamp settings (see “Connecting a Tally Signal”).

5-041-957-11(1)

Item

Sub-item

setting

Factory

default

Description

Tally Lamp

Brightness

High / Low /

Off

High Sets the brightness of the recording/tally lamp.

G Tally Lamp

Enable /

Disable

Enable Enables/disables the G tally lamp.

Tally Control

External /

Internal

Selects the target for accepting the recording/tally lamp control

information of the unit.

External: Tally control from outside the camera.

Internal: Control via camera recording operation.

336

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Rec Review

Sets recording review settings (see “Reviewing the Recording (Rec Review)”).

5-041-957-11(1)

Item Sub-item setting Factory default Description

Setting 3s / 10s / Clip 3s Sets the time for playback of clips just recorded for recording review.

337

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Zoom

Sets the zoom settings (“Adjusting the Zoom”).

5-041-957-11(1)

Item Sub-item setting Factory default Description

Zoom Type Optical Zoom Only / On(Clear Image Zoom) Optical Zoom Only Sets the type of zoom.

338

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Lens

Sets settings related to lenses.

5-041-957-11(1)

Item

Sub-item

setting

Factory default Description

Lens

Calibration

Execute /

Cancel

–

Executes the function that corrects for differences in the zoom

position due to differences in individual lenses when using a

power zoom lens.

Zoom Ring

Direction

Left(W)/Right(T)

Right(W)/Left(T)

Left(W)/Right(T)

Sets the direction of zoom ring operation.

Note

Enabled only when using an E-mount lens that supports zoom

ring direction switching.

Shading

Compensation

Auto / Off Auto Sets the automatic shading compensation.

Chroma

Aberration

Comp.

Auto / Off Auto Sets the automatic chromatic aberration compensation.

Distortion

Comp.

Auto / Off Auto Sets the automatic distortion compensation.

Breathing

Compensation

Auto / Off Off

Sets the lens breathing compensation.

See “Breathing Compensation.”

Distance

Display

Meter / Feet Meter Sets the display units for lens information and focus position.

Zoom Position

Display

Focal Length /

Number / Bar

Number Sets the display format for the zoom position.

339

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

APR

Executes APR.

5-041-957-11(1)

Item

Sub-item

setting

Factory

default

Description

APR

Execute /

Cancel

–

Runs APR (Automatic Pixel Restoration) for image sensor auto

adjustment.

Execute: Execute function.

Note

Always attach the lens cap before running APR.

340

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Wired LAN

Sets settings related to wired LAN connections.

5-041-957-11(1)

Item

Sub-item

setting

Factory

default

Description

HTTP Port – 80 Displays the HTTP access port.

Detail

Settings

– – Displays properties of the wired LAN connection.

DHCP

On / Off

On Displays whether DHCP is enabled (On) or disabled (Off).

IP Address – Displays the IP address of the unit when [DHCP] is set to [Off].

Subnet Mask –

Displays the subnet mask of the unit when [DHCP] is set to

[Off].

Gateway – Displays the default gateway when [DHCP] is set to [Off].

DNS Auto

On / Off

On Displays the DNS auto acquisition setting.

341

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

File Transfer

Sets settings related to file transfers (see “About File Transfer”).

5-041-957-11(1)

Item

Sub-item

setting

Factory

default

Description

Auto

Upload

(Proxy)

On / Off Off Turns proxy file auto upload on/off.

Default

Upload

Server

Settings1 to 3 >

Display Name

–

Selects the upload server for files. The server selected here becomes the

auto upload destination for proxy files, and the upload destination for files

from the thumbnail screen.

Displays the [Display Name] settings configured in [Server Settings1 to 3].

Clear

Completed

Jobs

Execute /

Cancel

–

Clears completed transfer jobs from the list.

Execute: Execute function.

Clear All

Jobs

Execute /

Cancel

–

Clears all transfer jobs from the list.

Execute: Execute function.

View Job

List

– – Displays the transfer job list.

342

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Language

Sets the display language.

5-041-957-11(1)

Item Sub-item setting Factory default Description

Select – –

Sets the display language.

Set: Set the value.

343

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Clock Set

Sets internal clock settings.

5-041-957-11(1)

Item Sub-item setting

Factory

default

Description

Time

Zone

UTC − 12:00 to UTC + 14:00 –

Sets the time difference from UTC in 30-minute

units.

Date

Mode

YYMMDD / MMDDYY /

DDMMYY

YYMMDD

Selects the display format for dates.

YYMMDD: Year, month, day

MMDDYY: Month, day, year

DDMMYY: Day, month, year

12H/24H 12H / 24H 24H

Selects the clock display format.

12H: 12-hour mode

24H: 24-hour mode

Date – –

Sets the current date.

Set: Set the value.

Time – –

Sets the current time.

Set: Set the value.

344

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Hours Meter

Displays the accumulated running time.

5-041-957-11(1)

Item Sub-item setting Factory default Description

Hours(System) – – Displays the accumulated hours of use (cannot be reset).

Hours(Reset) – – Displays the accumulated hours of use (can be reset).

Reset Execute / Cancel –

Resets the accumulated running time to 0.

Execute: Execute function.

345

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

ISO/Gain Settings and Default Values

The range of [ISO/Gain<L>] settings and default values vary depending on the [Mode], [Base Look] > [Select], and [Base

Sensitivity] settings.

Default values in the tables are shown in bold.

When [Mode] is set to [ISO]

When [Base Look] > [Select] is set to [S-Cinetone], [Standard], [ITU709], or [Still]

When [Base Look] > [Select] is set to [HLG Live] or [HLG Natural]

When [ISO/Gain/EI] > [Base Sensitivity] is set to

[Low]

When [ISO/Gain/EI] > [Base Sensitivity] is set to

[High]

ISO 320

ISO 400

ISO 500

ISO 640

ISO 800

ISO 1000

ISO 1250

ISO 1600

ISO 2000

ISO 2500

ISO 3200

ISO 4000

ISO 5000

ISO 6400

ISO 8000

ISO 10000

ISO 12800

ISO 16000

ISO 20000

ISO 25600

ISO 5000

ISO 6400

ISO 8000

ISO 10000

ISO 12800

ISO 16000

ISO 20000

ISO 25600

ISO 32000

ISO 40000

ISO 51200

ISO 64000

ISO 80000

ISO 102400

ISO 128000

ISO 160000

ISO 204800

ISO 256000

ISO 320000

ISO 409600

When [ISO/Gain/EI] > [Base Sensitivity] is set to

[Low]

When [ISO/Gain/EI] > [Base Sensitivity] is set to

[High]

346

When [Base Look] > [Select] is set to [User1] to [User16]

When [Mode] is set to [dB]

A value in the range −3dB to +30dB in 1dB increments can be configured.

The default value is 0dB.

5-041-957-11(1)

When [ISO/Gain/EI] > [Base Sensitivity] is set to

[Low]

When [ISO/Gain/EI] > [Base Sensitivity] is set to

[High]

ISO 800

ISO 1000

ISO 1250

ISO 1600

ISO 2000

ISO 2500

ISO 3200

ISO 4000

ISO 5000

ISO 6400

ISO 8000

ISO 10000

ISO 12800

ISO 16000

ISO 20000

ISO 25600

ISO 128000

ISO 16000

ISO 20000

ISO 25600

ISO 32000

ISO 40000

ISO 51200

ISO 64000

ISO 80000

ISO 102400

ISO 128000

ISO 160000

ISO 204800

ISO 256000

ISO 320000

ISO 409600

When [ISO/Gain/EI] > [Base Sensitivity] is set to

[Low]

When [ISO/Gain/EI] > [Base Sensitivity] is set to

[High]

ISO 800

ISO 1000

ISO 1250

ISO 1600

ISO 2000

ISO 2500

ISO 3200

ISO 4000

ISO 5000

ISO 6400

ISO 8000

ISO 10000

ISO 12800

ISO 16000

ISO 20000

ISO 25600

ISO 12800

ISO 16000

ISO 20000

ISO 25600

ISO 32000

ISO 40000

ISO 51200

ISO 64000

ISO 80000

ISO 102400

ISO 128000

ISO 160000

ISO 204800

ISO 256000

ISO 320000

ISO 409600

347

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

AGC Limit Settings and Default Values

The range of [AGC Limit] menu settings and default values vary depending on the [Mode], [Base Look] > [Select], and

[Base Sensitivity] settings.

Default values in the tables are shown in bold.

When [Mode] is set to [ISO]

When [Base Look] > [Select] is set to [S-Cinetone], [Standard], [ITU709], or [Still]

When [Base Look] > [Select] is set to [HLG Live] or [HLG Natural]

When [ISO/Gain/EI] > [Base Sensitivity] is set to

[Low]

When [ISO/Gain/EI] > [Base Sensitivity] is set to

[High]

ISO 400

ISO 500

ISO 640

ISO 800

ISO 1000

ISO 1250

ISO 1600

ISO 2000

ISO 2500

ISO 3200

ISO 4000

ISO 5000

ISO 6400

ISO 8000

ISO 10000

ISO 12800

ISO 16000

ISO 20000

ISO 25600

ISO 6400

ISO 8000

ISO 10000

ISO 12800

ISO 16000

ISO 20000

ISO 25600

ISO 32000

ISO 40000

ISO 51200

ISO 64000

ISO 80000

ISO 102400

ISO 128000

ISO 160000

ISO 204800

ISO 256000

ISO 320000

ISO 409600

When [ISO/Gain/EI] > [Base Sensitivity] is set to

[Low]

When [ISO/Gain/EI] > [Base Sensitivity] is set to

[High]

348

When [Base Look] > [Select] is set to [User1] to [User16]

When [Mode] is set to [dB]

Select from 3dB / 6dB / 9dB / 12dB / 15dB / 18dB / 21dB / 24dB / 27dB / 30dB.

The default value is 15dB.

5-041-957-11(1)

When [ISO/Gain/EI] > [Base Sensitivity] is set to

[Low]

When [ISO/Gain/EI] > [Base Sensitivity] is set to

[High]

ISO 1000

ISO 1250

ISO 1600

ISO 2000

ISO 2500

ISO 3200

ISO 4000

ISO 5000

ISO 6400

ISO 8000

ISO 10000

ISO 12800

ISO 16000

ISO 20000

ISO 25600

ISO 16000

ISO 20000

ISO 25600

ISO 32000

ISO 40000

ISO 51200

ISO 64000

ISO 80000

ISO 102400

ISO 128000

ISO 160000

ISO 204800

ISO 256000

ISO 320000

ISO 409600

When [ISO/Gain/EI] > [Base Sensitivity] is set to

[Low]

When [ISO/Gain/EI] > [Base Sensitivity] is set to

[High]

ISO 1000

ISO 1250

ISO 1600

ISO 2000

ISO 2500

ISO 3200

ISO 4000

ISO 5000

ISO 6400

ISO 8000

ISO 10000

ISO 12800

ISO 16000

ISO 20000

ISO 25600

ISO 16000

ISO 20000

ISO 25600

ISO 32000

ISO 40000

ISO 51200

ISO 64000

ISO 80000

ISO 102400

ISO 128000

ISO 160000

ISO 204800

ISO 256000

ISO 320000

ISO 409600

349

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Image Quality Settings Saved for Each Shooting Mode

The current status of configuration items related to image quality are saved for each of the following shooting modes.

When you change the shooting mode, the corresponding settings that are saved for the target shooting mode are

applied.

Custom mode SDR(BT.709) target display

Custom mode HDR(HLG) target display

Cine EI mode

The configuration items related to image quality which are saved for each shooting mode are shown in the following

tables.

“Yes” indicates a setting that is saved, and “No” indicates a setting that is not saved. “Yes” spanning multiple columns

indicates common settings.

Item

Shooting mode

Custom mode

Cine EI mode

SDR(BT.709) HDR(HLG)

Shooting menu

ISO/Gain/EI

ISO/Gain

Yes

Exposure Index No Yes

Base Sensitivity Yes No

Base ISO No Yes

White

Preset White Yes Yes

Other than above Yes

White Setting Yes

Offset White Yes No

LUT On/Off No Yes

Noise Suppression

Setting(Custom) Yes Yes No

Level(Custom) Yes Yes No

Setting(Cine EI) No Yes

Level(Cine EI) No Yes

Paint/Look menu

Base Look

Select Yes Yes Yes

Input

Yes

Output

Yes

AE Level Offset

Yes

350

Item

Shooting mode

Custom mode

Cine EI mode

SDR(BT.709) HDR(HLG)

Black Yes Yes No

Knee

Auto Knee Yes No No

Other than above Yes Yes No

Detail Yes Yes No

Matrix Yes Yes No

Multi Matrix Yes Yes No

Separate ISO sensitivity settings are saved for both Custom mode [SDR(BT.709)] and [HDR(HLG)].

Settings are saved for each [Base Look], and do not depend on the shooting mode.

351

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Web Menu Configuration

Press the [Settings] operation screen switching tab to display the settings screen.

Use the settings screen to configure the various setup items of the unit, including initial settings, network settings,

shooting/playback settings using the web menu.

The menu comprises the following menus.

Menu configuration and hierarchy

Level 1 Level 1 description Level 2

Shooting Contains settings related to shooting. Focus

Project Contains basic project settings. Base Setting

Rec Format

Simul Rec

Proxy Rec

Interval Rec

Picture Cache Rec

352

Level 1 Level 1 description Level 2

All File

Paint/Look Contains settings related to image quality. Base Look

Pan-Tilt Contains settings related to the pan/tilt.

P/T Speed

P/T Acceleration

P/T Range Limit

P/T Direction

P/T Preset

Monitoring Contains settings related to video output and the screen display.

Output Format

Output Display

Audio Contains settings related to audio. Audio

Technical Contains settings for technical items.

Tally

IR Remote

Network Contains settings related to networks.

Camera Name

User

Wired LAN

File Transfer

FTP Server 1

FTP Server 2

FTP Server 3

SSL

Referer Check

Brute Force Attack Protection

Stream Contains settings related to streaming.

Stream

Video Stream

Audio Stream

Maintenance Contains devices settings, such as the clock and language. Language

Accessibility

Clock Set

Reset

Information

System Log

HTTP Access Log

353

Note

[Accessibility] is only available on models for North America.

5-041-957-11(1)

Level 1 Level 1 description Level 2

Service

EULA

Software

354

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Web Menu Operations

Press the [Settings] operation screen switching tab to display the settings screen to configure the various setup items of

the unit, including initial settings, network settings, shooting/playback settings using the web menu.

Configure settings in the web menu on a tablet using touch operation or on a computer using mouse operation.

Press the menu for the items you want to configure to display the setup items and their settings in that menu.

Configuration method

Value selection

Press the radio button for an item. The radio button for a selected item is displayed in orange.

Menu (level 1)1.

Menu (level 2)2.

Settings3.

355

Item on/off

Press the switch to turn the item on/off. The switch is orange when the item is turned on, and white when turned off.

Value selection from a list

Press the drop-down button and select an item from the displayed list.

Numeric value selection

Press < or > to change the numeric value. If the numeric value is underlined, you can also enter a numeric value directly.

Character/number entry

Configuration on separate screen

Press the button to perform setup operations on a separate screen.

Guidance message

Information that helps you to configure some settings and messages that call attention to the user are displayed.

Saving a setting

When finished configuring a setting, press the [OK] button to save the setting.

Press the [Cancel] button to discard changes to a setting and revert to the previous setting.

Press the [Reload] button to update the screen display.

Note

If you press the [Reload] button before saving a setting, changes to the setting will be discarded.

If you move to a different page before saving a setting, changes to the setting will be discarded.

5-041-957-11(1)

356

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Focus

Sets focus settings.

5-041-957-11(1)

Item

Sub-item

setting

Factory

default

Description

Push AF

Mode

AF / Single-shot

AF(AF-S)

AF Sets the push auto focus mode.

Touch

Function in

Tracking AF /

Spot Focus

Tracking

Sets the operation when the camera image screen is touched in MF

mode.

AF Assist

Control

On / Off On

When set to [On], you can use the focus slider in the Web App during

auto focus to adjust the focus position.

For details, see “Setting the Auto Focus Target Manually (AF

Assist) Using the Web App.”

Note

This item is enabled only when [AF Assist] is set to [On] in the camera

menu.

357

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Base Setting

Sets base settings.

5-041-957-11(1)

Item Sub-item setting

Factory

default

Description

Shooting

Mode

Custom / Cine EI Custom

Sets the shooting mode.

See “Shooting mode” in “Configuring Basic

Operation.”

Target

Display

SDR(BT.709) /

HDR(HLG)

SDR(BT.709)

Sets the color space of the recording/output in Custom

mode.

358

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Rec Format

Sets recording format settings.

[RAW Output Format] settings

Item Sub-item setting

Factory

default

Description

Frequency 59.94 / 50 / 29.97 / 25 / 24 / 23.98 59.94

Selects the system frequency.

Note

If the frequency is changed, the camera will

reboot. After rebooting, reload the page in the

web browser.

Imager

Scan

Mode

FF / S35 FF Selects the imager size.

Codec RAW / RAW & XAVC-I / XAVC-I / XAVC-L XAVC-I

Sets the clip recording/playback codec.

Note

When [Imager Scan Mode] is set to [S35],

[RAW] and [RAW & XAVC-I] cannot be

selected.

RAW

Output

Format

The available settings vary depending on

the [Frequency] setting.

See “[RAW Output Format] settings”

below.

–

Sets the size of the RAW image to output to an

external RAW recorder.

Note

When [Codec] is set to [RAW & XAVC-I], the

[Video Format] setting switches in link with

the [RAW Output Format] setting.

Video

Format

The available settings vary depending on

the [Frequency], [Imager Scan Mode], and

[Codec] settings.

See “[Video Format] settings” below.

– Sets the image size and bit rate.

Frequency Imager Scan Mode Codec Setting

59.94 / 50 / 29.97 / 25 / 23.98 FF RAW / RAW & XAVC-I

4096×2160

3840×2160

24 FF RAW / RAW & XAVC-I 4096×2160

359

Default values are shown in bold.

The conditions under which [RAW Output Format] cannot be set have been omitted.

[Video Format] settings

Default values are shown in bold.

5-041-957-11(1)

Frequency Imager Scan Mode Codec Setting

59.94 / 50 / 29.97 / 25 / 23.98

RAW –

RAW & XAVC-I

4096×2160P

3840×2160P

XAVC-I

4096×2160P

3840×2160P

1920×1080P

XAVC-L

3840×2160P

1920×1080P 50

1920×1080P 35

S35

XAVC-I 1920×1080P

XAVC-L

1920×1080P 50

1920×1080P 35

24 FF

RAW –

RAW & XAVC-I / XAVC-I 4096×2160P

360

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Simul Rec

Sets 2-slot simultaneous recording mode settings (see Recording to Memory Cards A and B Simultaneously (2-slot

Simul Rec)”).

5-041-957-11(1)

Item Sub-item setting

Factory

default

Description

Setting On / Off Off

Turns the simultaneous recording function on/off and sets the

recording destination media.

Rec Button

SlotA / SlotB /

SlotA/SlotB

Displays the record button assignment for each recording media.

Set [Project] > [Simul Rec] > [Rec Button Set] in the camera menu.

2nd Rec

Button

SlotA / SlotB /

SlotA/SlotB

361

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Proxy Rec

Sets proxy recording mode settings (see “Proxy Recording”).

5-041-957-11(1)

Item Sub-item setting Factory default Description

Setting On / Off Off Turns proxy recording mode on/off.

362

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Interval Rec

Sets interval recording mode settings (see “Recording Video Intermittently (Interval Rec)”).

5-041-957-11(1)

Item Sub-item setting Factory default Description

Setting On / Off Off

Turns interval recording mode on/off.

(Setting this mode to On will set all

other special modes to Off.)

Interval

Time

1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 / 7 / 8 / 9 / 10 / 15 / 20

/ 30 / 40 / 50 (sec)

1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 / 7 / 8 / 9 / 10 / 15 / 20

/ 30 / 40 / 50 (min)

1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 6 / 12 / 24 (hour)

Sets the interval between recordings

in Interval Rec recording mode

(when Interval Rec is set to On).

Number

Frames

1frame / 2frames / 3frames / 6frames /

9frames / 12frames

The available settings vary depending

on the frame frequency of the selected

video format.

59.94P/50P: 2frames / 6frames /

12frames

29.97P/25P/24P/23.98P: 1frame /

3frames / 6frames / 9frames

59.94P/50P: 2frames

29.97P/25P/24P/23.98P:

1frame

Sets the number of frames to record

per take in Interval Rec recording

mode (when Interval Rec is set to

On).

363

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Picture Cache Rec

Sets picture cache recording mode settings (see “Recording Cached Pictures (Picture Cache Rec)”).

5-041-957-11(1)

Item Sub-item setting

Factory

default

Description

Setting On / Off Off Turns the picture cache function on/off.

Cache

Size

Short / Medium /

Long / Max

Max

Sets the time for accumulation of images in picture cache memory

(picture cache recording time).

Cache

Rec Time

– –

Displays the time for accumulation of images in picture cache memory

(picture cache recording time).

364

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

All File

Performs ALL file operations (see “Saving and Loading Configuration Data”).

5-041-957-11(1)

Item

Sub-item

setting

Factory

default

Description

Load All

File

– –

Load an ALL file into the unit from the device running the Web App.

Note

When an ALL file is loaded into the unit, the unit will reboot. After rebooting,

reload the page in the web browser.

Save All

File

– – Save the settings of the unit to the device running the Web App as an ALL file.

365

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Base Look

You can load a base look into the unit.

A list of available base looks is displayed on the screen. The currently applied base look is indicated by a ● marker on

the left of the base look number.

[No.]: Base look number

[Base Look Name]: Base look name

[Input]: Base look input signal

[Output]: Base look output signal

[AE Level Offset]: Base look exposure reference value

To add a base look

Press the [Import] button to import a new base look. Follow the on-screen instructions.

After importing, set appropriate values for [Input], [Output], and [AE Level Offset]. For details, see “Importing a Desired

Base Look.”

5-041-957-11(1)

366

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

P/T Speed

Sets settings related to the pan/tilt speed.

5-041-957-11(1)

Item

Sub-item

setting

Factory

default

Description

Speed

Step

Normal /

Extended

Sets the number of speed steps of the pan/tilt drive.

Normal: Speed can be specified using 24-step range. Use this setting for

compatibility with existing Sony remote cameras.

Extended: Speed can be specified using 50-step range.

Speed

Mode

Normal /

Slow

Normal

Sets the speed mode of the pan/tilt drive.

Enabled only when [Speed Step] is set to [Normal].

Normal: Operates in normal-speed range (minimum to maximum (60

degrees/second)).

Slow: Operates in low-speed range (minimum to maximum (40

degrees/second)).

367

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

P/T Acceleration

Sets settings related to the pan/tilt speed.

5-041-957-11(1)

Item

Sub-item

setting

Factory

default

Description

Acceleration 1 to 9 8

Selects the acceleration/deceleration for pan/tilt operations. The larger the

number, the higher the acceleration.

368

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

P/T Range Limit

Sets settings related to limiting the pan/tilt operating range.

Set the pan/tilt operating range limits using the following screen.

Note

When the unit is turned on or pan/tilt reset is executed, this range limit setting is ignored. This function cannot be used to avoid

obstacles near the unit.

Set the [Setting] switch to the on position.

The pan-tilt operating range limit function becomes enabled.

Check the image using the pan/tilt controls of the camera.

To set the positions at which to limit operation, press the [Left], [Right], [Up], [Down] > [Set Current Value]

button at those positions.

[Left]: Left side of camera

[Right]: Right side of camera

[Up]: Top side of camera

369

Note

Camera positions outside the limit positions cannot be saved as a preset.

If the [Pan-Tilt] > [P/T Direction] > [Ceiling] setting is changed, the configured limit position settings are returned to the factory

defaults.

The setting cannot be changed during playback, during thumbnail display, when a pan/tilt error occurs, when pan/tilt is not

initialized, and when pan/tilt is locked.

5-041-957-11(1)

[Down]: Bottom side of camera

The limit positions are set and are displayed as numeric values (angle).

To cancel a limit, press the [Reset] button for the individual positions.

Press the [OK] button.

The pan/tilt operation is restricted to stay within the configured limit positions.

370

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

P/T Direction

Sets settings related to the pan/tilt direction.

Note

When a changed [Ceiling] setting is applied, all preset positions are deleted since the pan/tilt coordinates would become inverted.

The pan/tilt drive range changes as shown in the following diagram depending on the [Ceiling] setting.

A: When [Ceiling] is set to [Off]

B: When [Ceiling] is set to [On]

5-041-957-11(1)

Item

Sub-

item

setting

Factory

default

Description

Ceiling On / Off Off

When the unit is mounted on a desktop, set to [Off]. When the unit is mounted on a

ceiling, set to [On]. When [Ceiling] is set to [On], [Pan Direction] is automatically set

to [Opposite].

Pan

Direction

Normal /

Opposite

Normal

Sets the pan drive direction. When the setting is changed, the drive direction

reverses.

Tilt

Direction

Normal /

Opposite

Normal

Sets the tilt drive direction. When the setting is changed, the drive direction

reverses.

371

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

P/T Preset

Sets settings related to camera presets.

5-041-957-11(1)

Item

Sub-item

setting

Factory

default

Description

Speed

Select

Separate /

Common

Separate

Sets whether preset speeds are configured separately or use a common

setting.

Common

Speed

1 to 50 50

Sets the common speed for presets.

Note

A maximum drive speed of 24 is used if a value of 25 or higher is set when [Pan-

Tilt] > [P/T Speed] > [Speed Step] is set to [Normal].

372

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Output Format

Sets output format settings.

5-041-957-11(1)

Item Sub-item setting

Factory

default

Description

SDI

For details about settings, see “Output Formats and

Limitations.”

–

Sets the SDI and HDMI output

resolution.

HDMI –

373

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Output Display

Sets settings related to output signals.

Note

This setting is also applied to the HDMI output signal image, streaming output image, and the image in the Web App camera

image panel.

5-041-957-11(1)

Item

Sub-item

setting

Factory

default

Description

SDI On / Off Off

Sets whether the menu and status are embedded in the SDI output

signal.

HDMI/Stream On / Off On

Sets whether the menu and status are embedded in the HDMI

output signal.

374

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Audio Input

Sets settings related to CH1 to CH4 audio input.

Sets the master audio input level. The master audio input level is used for all channels 1 to 4.

5-041-957-11(1)

Item Sub-item setting Factory default Description

Level

Control

Auto / Manual Auto

Selects audio input level automatic adjustment or

manual adjustment.

Level 0 to 99 49 Sets the input level.

Input

Select

AUDIO IN CH1 / AUDIO IN

CH2 / Off

CH1 and CH3: AUDIO

IN CH1

CH2 and CH4: AUDIO

IN CH2

Sets the audio input source.

Note

CH1 is [AUDIO IN CH1] (fixed).

Wind

Filter

On / Off Off Turns the wind noise reduction filter on/off.

Item Sub-item setting Factory default Description

Master 0 to 99 99 Sets the master input level.

375

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Audio Output

Sets settings related to audio output.

Note

This setting is also applied to the streaming output audio.

5-041-957-11(1)

Item

Sub-item

setting

Factory

default

Description

HDMI/Stream

Output CH

CH1/CH2 /

CH3/CH4

CH1/CH2

Sets the combination of audio channels for the

HDMI/streaming output.

376

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Tally

Sets recording/tally lamp settings (see “Connecting a Tally Signal”).

5-041-957-11(1)

Item

Sub-item

setting

Factory

default

Description

Tally Lamp

Brightness

High / Low /

Off

High Sets the brightness of the recording/tally lamp.

G Tally Lamp

Enable /

Disable

Enable Enables/disables the G tally lamp.

Tally Control

External /

Internal

Selects the target for accepting the recording/tally lamp control

information of the unit.

377

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

IR Remote

Sets settings related to the infrared remote control.

5-041-957-11(1)

Item

Sub-item

setting

Factory

default

Description

Setting On / Off On

Enables/disables operation of the unit from the infrared remote

control.

378

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Camera Name

Sets settings related to the camera name (unit name).

Up to eight (0 to 8) of the following characters can be entered for Camera Name.

Alphanumeric characters

Symbols (space !#$`*+-./;<=>?@[\]^_`{|})

5-041-957-11(1)

Item Sub-item setting Factory default Description

Camera Name – FR7 Sets the camera name.

379

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

User

Sets settings related to user access of the unit.

Settings related to administrator users (Administrator) (required)

Settings related to general users (User 1 to User 9) (optional)

5-041-957-11(1)

Item

Sub-item

setting

Factory

default

Description

User Name – admin Sets the user name.

Current Password – –

When changing the password, enter the current

password.

New Password – – Enter the new password.

Re-Type

Password

– – Enter the new password again for confirmation.

Item

Sub-item

setting

Factory

default

Description

User Name – – Sets the user name.

Current Password – –

When changing the password, enter the current

password.

New Password – – Enter the new password.

Re-Type

Password

– – Enter the new password again for confirmation.

380

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Wired LAN

Status

Displays the network status.

IPv4

Sets settings related to the IPv4 network.

IPv6

Sets settings related to the IPv6 network.

Item Sub-item setting Factory default Description

Host Name – – Displays the host name.

MAC Address – – Displays the MAC address of the unit.

Ethernet Status – – Displays the current communication speed.

IP Address – – Displays the IP address of the unit.

Subnet Mask – – Displays the subnet mask of the unit.

Gateway – – Displays the IPv4 default gateway of the unit.

Primary DNS Server – – Displays the primary DNS server of the unit.

Secondary DNS Server – – Displays the secondary DNS server of the unit.

IPv6 Address 1 – – Displays IPv6 address 1 of the unit.

IPv6 Address 2 – – Displays IPv6 address 2 of the unit.

IPv6 Gateway – – Displays the IPv6 default gateway of the unit.

Link-local IPv6 Address – – Displays the IPv6 link-local address of the unit.

Item Sub-item setting Factory default Description

DHCP On / Off On Turns the [DHCP] function on/off.

IP Address – – Sets the IPv4 address when [DHCP] is set to Off.

Subnet Mask – – Sets the subnet mask when [DHCP] is set to Off.

Gateway – – Sets the IPv4 default gateway when [DHCP] is set to Off.

Item

Sub-item

setting

Factory

default

Description

Obtain an IP Address

Automatically

On / Off On Turns auto IPv6 address acquisition on/off.

381

Common

Sets settings common to IPv4/IPv6 networks.

5-041-957-11(1)

Item

Sub-item

setting

Factory

default

Description

IP Address – –

Sets the IPv6 address when [Obtain an IP Address

Automatically] is set to Off.

Prefix Length – –

Sets the prefix when [Obtain an IP Address Automatically] is

set to Off.

Gateway – –

Sets the IPv6 default gateway when [Obtain an IP Address

Automatically] is set to Off.

Item

Sub-item

setting

Factory

default

Description

HTTP Port

80, 1024 to

65534

80 Sets the HTTP port number.

DNS Auto On / Off On

Sets whether to obtain the DNS addresses from the DHCP

server.

Primary DNS Server

IPv4/IPv6

address

– Sets the primary DNS server when [DNS Auto] is set to Off.

Secondary DNS

Server

IPv4/IPv6

address

–

Sets the secondary DNS server when [DNS Auto] is set to

Off.

382

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

File Transfer

Sets settings related to file transfers.

5-041-957-11(1)

Item

Sub-item

setting

Factory

default

Description

Auto

Upload

(Proxy)

On / Off Off Turns proxy file auto upload on/off.

Default

Upload

Server

Settings1 to 3 >

Display Name

Server

Settings1

Selects the upload server for files. The server selected here becomes the

auto upload destination for proxy files, and the upload destination for files

from the thumbnail screen.

Displays the [Display Name] settings configured in [Server Settings1 to 3].

383

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

FTP Server 1 to 3

Sets settings related to file FTP transfers.

The settings are common for FTP Server 1 to 3.

5-041-957-11(1)

Item

Sub-item

setting

Factory

default

Description

Display Name – –

Sets the display name shown in the transfer destination setup

menu.

Service – – Displays the type of server.

Host Name – – Sets the host name of the transfer destination server.

Port

21, 990, 1024 to

65534

21 Sets the port number of the transfer destination server.

User Name – –

Sets the user name for authentication of the transfer destination

server connection.

Password – –

Sets the authentication password of the transfer destination

server connection.

Passive Mode On / Off Off Turns passive mode on/off.

Destination

Directory

– – Sets the name of the transfer destination directory.

Using Secure

Protocol

On / Off Off Sets whether to use (On) or not use (Off) secure FTP transfer.

Root Certificate – –

Loads the root certificate for secure FTP transfer.

Press the [Load] and select a root certificate on the displayed

screen.

Press the [Delete] button to delete the loaded root certificate.

Root Certificate

Status

– – Displays the load status of the root certificate.

Reset – – Resets the [Server Settings] settings to the defaults.

384

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

SSL

Sets settings related to SSL.

SSL

Enables/disables the SSL function.

SSL Server Authentication

Sets settings related to SSL server authentication.

Item Sub-item setting

Factory

default

Description

Function

Disable / Enable / Enable (Allow HTTP connection for

some clients)

Disable

Enables/disables the SSL

function.

Item Sub-item setting

Factory

default

Description

Certificate

Options

Use a self-signed certificate

(For test use) / Use an

external certificate

– Sets the installation method of the SSL server certificate.

Status – –

Displays the validity of the SSL server certificate when

[Certificate Options] is set to [Use a self-signed certificate

(For test use)].

Issuer DN – –

Displays the distinguished name of the issuer of the SSL

server certificate when [Certificate Options] is set to [Use a

self-signed certificate (For test use)].

Subject DN – –

Displays the distinguished name of the subject of the SSL

server certificate when [Certificate Options] is set to [Use a

self-signed certificate (For test use)].

Available

Period

– –

Displays the valid period of the SSL server certificate when

[Certificate Options] is set to [Use a self-signed certificate

(For test use)].

Extended

Key Usage

– –

Displays the extended key usage method when [Certificate

Options] is set to [Use a self-signed certificate (For test use)].

Delete – –

This button is displayed when [Certificate Options] is set to

[Use a self-signed certificate (For test use)].

Deletes the installed SSL server certificate.

Import – –

Installs an external SSL server certificate from a list when

[Certificate Options] is set to [Use an external certificate].

385

Item Sub-item setting

Factory

default

Description

Private Key

Password

– –

Sets the password for the private key information of the SSL

server certificate when [Certificate Options] is set to [Use an

external certificate].

Reset – –

This button clears the private key password display for entry

of a new password.

Self-Signed

Certificate

Generation

– –

Press the [Generate] button to generate a self-signed

certificate when [Certificate Options] is set to [Use a self-

signed certificate (For test use)].

386

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Referer Check

Sets settings related to Referer checks.

Exception List

Sets settings related to the Referer check exception list.

Item Sub-item setting Factory default Description

Setting On / Off On Enables/disables the Referer check function.

Item

Sub-item

setting

Factory

default

Description

No. 1 to 10 – Sets the exception number from the list.

Host

Name

– – Sets the host name of the exception.

Port

Number

– – Sets the port number of the exception.

Set – – Press to register the configured exception in the exception list.

Delete – –

Select an exception that you want to delete and press the button to delete the

registered exception from the exception list.

387

388

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Brute Force Attack Protection

Sets settings related to brute force attack prevention.

When an attacker is detected, the attacker list information is displayed.

5-041-957-11(1)

Item

Sub-item

setting

Factory

default

Description

Setting On / Off On Turns the [Brute Force Attack Protection] function on/off.

Count 3 to 100 8

Sets the number of attempts that will be considered as an attack.

Enabled when [Setting] is set to On.

Release

Mode

Always /

Timer

Sets the release condition.

Enabled when [Setting] is set to On.

Always: Do not delete from attacker list.

Timer: Delete from attacker list after the release time set using [Release Time]

has elapsed.

Release

Time

30 to

86400 s

Sets the release time.

Enabled when [Setting] is set to On.

When Release Mode: is set to [Timer], entries are deleted from the attacker list

after the release time has elapsed.

389

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Stream

Sets streaming settings (see “About Streaming”).

Stream Setting

Sets settings related to the streaming protocol.

RTSP

The following items are displayed when [Stream Setting] is set to [RTSP].

Sets settings related to RTSP streaming.

SRT

The following items are displayed when [Stream Setting] is set to [SRT-Caller] or [SRT-Listener].

Sets settings related to SRT streaming.

Item Sub-item setting Factory default Description

Setting RTSP / SRT-Caller / SRT-Listener / NDI|HX / Off RTSP Selects the streaming protocol.

Item

Sub-item

setting

Factory

default

Description

Port Number

554, 1024 to

65534

554 Sets the RTSP port number.

Time Out 0 to 600 60

Sets the timeout of the [Keep Alive] command for RTSP

streaming.

Authentication On / Off On Turns the RTSP authentication function on/off.

Video Port

Number 1

1024 to 65534 51000

Sets the port number for sending video 1 for RTSP unicast

streaming.

Video Port

Number 2

1024 to 65534 53000

Sets the port number for sending video 2 for RTSP unicast

streaming.

Audio Port

Number

1024 to 65534 57000

Sets the port number for sending audio for RTSP unicast

streaming.

Item Sub-item setting

Factory

default

Description

Destination – –

Sets the connection destination URL when the unit is

operating as a caller.

Port

Number

1024 to 65534 4201

Sets the port number for listening when the unit is operating

as a listener.

Latency 20 to 8000 ms 120 Sets the latency.

390

NDI|HX

The following items are displayed when [Stream Setting] is set to [NDI|HX].

Sets settings related to NDI|HX.

5-041-957-11(1)

Item Sub-item setting

Factory

default

Description

TTL 1 to 255 64 Sets the TTL value.

Encryption Off / AES128 / AES256 Off

Enables/disables encryption and sets the encryption

method.

Passphrase

0 or string of 10 to 79

characters

Sets the passphrase used for encryption.

Press Reset to clear the entered passphrase.

ARC On / Off On Turns the [Adaptive Rate Control] on/off.

Item

Sub-item

setting

Factory

default

Description

License – – Displays the installation state of the NDI license key.

Source Name – – Displays the NDI source name.

Group On / Off Off Turns the NDI grouping function on/off.

Group Name – –

Displayed when the NDI grouping function is set to On.

Sets the group name.

Discovery Server

– – Sets NDI discovery server 1.

Discovery Server

– – Sets NDI discovery server 2.

Reliable UDP

Mode

On / Off On Turns Reliable UDP mode on/off.

Multicast Mode On / Off Off Turns multicast streaming on/off.

Multicast Prefix 239.255.0.0 239.255.0.0

Displayed when [Multicast Mode] is set to On.

Sets the prefix to use for multicast streaming.

Multicast Netmask 255.255.0.0 255.255.0.0

Displayed when [Multicast Mode] is set to On.

Sets the netmask that determines the multicast address

range.

Multicast TTL 1 to 256 3

Displayed when [Multicast Mode] is set to On.

Sets the TTL value for multicast streaming.

Multi-TCP Mode On / Off Off Turns Multi-TCP mode on/off.

Unicast UDP

Mode

On / Off On Turns Unicast UDP mode on/off.

391

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Video Stream

Sets settings related to the streaming video codecs.

Video Stream 1

Sets settings related to video codec 1.

Item Sub-item setting

Factory

default

Description

Codec 1 H.264 / H.265 H.264 Sets the codec of image 1.

Size 1

4096×2160 / 3840×2160 / 2048×1080 / 1920×1080 /

1280×720 / 640×360

1920×1080

Sets the picture size of image

Frame Rate

For details about supported frame rates, see

“Setting the Video Codec for Streaming.”

– Sets the frame rate of image 1.

I-Picture

Mode 1

Time / Frame Time

Sets the [IDR-Frame] insertion

interval for image 1 as a time or

number of frames.

I-Picture

Interval 1

1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 s 1

Displayed when [I-Picture

Mode 1] is set to Time.

Sets the IDR-Frame insertion

interval for H.264 and H.265 as

a time.

I-Picture

Ratio 1

15 to 300 frames 30

Displayed when [I-Picture

Mode 1] is set to Frame.

Sets the IDR-Frame insertion

interval for H.264 and H.265 as

a number of frames.

Profile 1

H.264: high / main / baseline

H.265: main / main10

H.264:

high

Sets the H.264 or H.265 profile.

Bit Rate

Compression

Mode 1

CBR / VBR VBR

Sets the bit rate compression

mode of image 1.

Bit Rate 1

512 / 768 / 1000 / 2000 / 3000 / 4000 / 5000 / 6000 /

7000 / 8000 / 16000 / 24000 / 32000 / 50000 / 64000 /

80000 kbps

16000

Displayed when [Bit Rate

Compression Mode 1] is set to

On.

Sets the bit rate target value

when the bit rate compression

mode is set to CBR.

Quality 1 1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 / 7 / 8 / 9 10 6

Sets the H.264 or H.265

quality.

392

Video Stream 2

Sets settings related to video codec 2.

Video Stream 3

Sets settings related to video codec 3.

Item Sub-item setting

Factory

default

Description

Codec 2 H.264 / H.265 / Off Off Sets the codec of image 2.

Size 2

4096×2160 / 3840×2160 / 2048×1080 /

1920×1080 / 1280×720 / 640×360 / 512×270

1920×1080 Sets the picture size of image 2.

Frame Rate

For details about supported frame rates, see

“Setting the Video Codec for Streaming.”

–

Displayed when [Codec 2] is not

set to Off.

Sets the frame rate of image 2.

I-Picture

Mode 2

Time / Frame Time

Displayed when [Codec 2] is not

set to Off.

Sets the IDR-Frame insertion

interval for image 2 as a time or

number of frames.

I-Picture

Interval 2

1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 s 1

Displayed when both [Codec 2] is

not set to Off and [I-Picture Mode

2] is set to [Time].

Sets the IDR-Frame insertion

interval for H.264 and H.265 as a

time.

I-Picture

Ratio 2

15 to 300 frames 30

Displayed when both [Codec 2] is

not set to Off and [I-Picture Mode

2] is set to [Frame].

Sets the IDR-Frame insertion

interval for H.264 and H.265 as a

number of frames.

Profile 2

H.264: high / main / baseline

H.265: main

– Sets the H.264 or H.265 profile.

Bit Rate

Compression

Mode 2

CBR / VBR VBR

Displayed when [Codec 2] is not

set to Off.

Sets the bit rate compression mode

of image 2.

Bit Rate 2

512 / 768 / 1000 / 2000 / 3000 / 4000 / 5000 /

6000 / 7000 / 8000 / 16000 / 24000 / 32000 /

50000 / 64000 / 80000 kbps

8000

Displayed when both [Codec 2] is

not set to Off and [Bit Rate

Compression Mode 2] is set to

[On].

Sets the bit rate target value when

the bit rate compression mode is

set to CBR.

Quality 2 1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 / 7 / 8 / 9 / 10 6

Displayed when both [Codec 2] is

set to H.264 and [Bit Rate

Compression Mode 2] is set to Off.

Sets the H.264 or H.265 quality.

393

Item Sub-item setting

Factory

default

DescriptionItem Sub-item setting

Factory

default

Description

Codec 3 JPEG JPEG

Sets the codec of

image 3.

Size 3 1280×720 / 1024×540 / 640×360 1280×720

Sets the picture size of

image 3.

Frame

Rate 3

For details about supported frame rates, see “Setting the

Video Codec for Streaming.”

–

Sets the frame rate of

image 3.

Quality 3 1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 / 7 / 8 / 9 / 10 6 Sets the quality.

394

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Audio Stream

Sets settings related to the streaming audio codec.

5-041-957-11(1)

Item Sub-item setting Factory default Description

Setting On / Off Off Turns audio streaming output on/off.

Codec AAC (128kbps) / AAC (256kbps) AAC (128kbps)

Displayed when [Setting] is set to On.

Sets the audio codec for streaming.

395

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Language

Sets the display language.

Note

The available languages may vary depending on the country or region.

5-041-957-11(1)

Item Sub-item setting Factory default Description

Language – – Sets the display language.

396

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Accessibility

Sets settings related to audio reading (text to speech).

Note

This function is only available on models sold in North America. The screen reader function can only be used when the language

is set to English (as of the release date).

Enable the screen reader function of the web browser on the device running the Web App.

5-041-957-11(1)

Item Sub-item setting

Factory

default

Description

Screen

Reader

On / Off

Off

Turns the screen reader function in the camera image

panel of the Web App on/off.

Speech

Rate

Slow2 / Slow1 / Normal / Fast1 /

Fast2 / Fast3 / Fast4

Normal

Sets the speed of the screen reader function.

A sample passage is read aloud at the configured

speed.

Speech

Volume

1 to 15 7

Sets the volume of the screen reader function of the

Web App.

A sample passage is read aloud at the configured

volume.

397

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Clock Set

Sets internal clock settings.

5-041-957-11(1)

Item Sub-item setting

Factory

default

Description

Current

Date &

Time

– – Displays the current time configured on the unit.

PC Clock – –

Displays the current time of the tablet or

computer used for configuration.

Date &

Time

Format

yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss / mm-dd-yyyy

hh:mm:ss / dd-mm-yyyy hh:mm:ss

yyyy-

mm-dd

Sets the display format of the date and time.

12 h / 24

12 h / 24 h 24 h Sets the time to 12-hour/24-hour display format.

Time

Setting

Keep current setting / Synchronize with PC

/ Manual setting / Synchronize with NTP

–

Sets the configuration method of the date and

time.

yy-mm-

hh:mm:ss

yy: 19 to 37

mm: 01 to 12

dd: 01 to 31

hh: 00 to 23

mm: 00 to 59

ss: 00 to 59 (seconds)

–

Displayed when [Time Setting] is set to Manual

setting.

Sets the date and time manually.

NTP Auto On / Off Off

Displayed when [Time Setting] is set to

Synchronize with NTP.

Sets whether to obtain the IP address of the NTP

server from the DHCP server.

NTP

Server

IPv4/IPv6 address or host name –

Displayed when both [Time Setting] is set to

[Synchronize with NTP] and [NTP Auto] is set to

Off.

Specifies the NTP server used for time

synchronization.

Time

Zone

UTC − 12:00 to UTC + 14:00 – Selects the time zone.

398

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Reset

Initializes the unit.

Reboot

Reboots the unit.

Reset

Resets the settings of the unit.

5-041-957-11(1)

Item Sub-item setting Factory default Description

Reboot Execute –

Reboots the unit.

Execute: Execute function.

Note

After rebooting, reload the page in the web browser.

Item

Sub-item

setting

Factory

default

Description

All Reset (except for

Network Settings)

Execute –

Resets the settings of the unit (excluding the network settings).

Execute: Execute function.

Note

Imported base looks and LUT files are note deleted.

Network Reset Execute –

Resets the network settings of the unit.

Execute: Execute function.

Note

After executing Network Reset, the unit will reboot. After

rebooting, reload the page in the web browser.

Factory Default Execute –

Returns the settings of the unit to the factory default state.

Execute: Execute function.

Note

After executing Factory Default, the unit will reboot. After

rebooting, reload the page in the web browser.

399

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Information

Displays camera and lens information. Also used to update software.

Camera

Displays camera information and updates software.

Lens

Displays lens information and updates software.

Item

Sub-item

setting

Factory

default

Description

Model

Name

– – Displays the model name of the camera.

Serial

Number

– – Displays the serial number of the camera.

Version

Number

– – Displays the software version of the camera.

Version Up – –

Press the [Choose File] button and follow the on-screen instructions to

update the camera software.

Note

After updating, the unit will reboot. After rebooting, reload the page in the

web browser.

Item

Sub-item

setting

Factory

default

Description

Model

Name

– – Displays the model name of the lens.

Serial

Number

– – Displays the serial number of the lens.

Version

Number

– – Displays the software version of the lens.

400

Item

Sub-item

setting

Factory

default

Description

Version Up – –

Press the [Choose File] button and follow the on-screen instructions to

update the lens software.

For details, see “Updating E-Mount Lens Software.”

Note

After updating the lens, the unit will reboot. After rebooting, reload the page

in the web browser.

401

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

System Log

Sets settings related to the system log.

The acquired log is displayed as shown below.

Item Sub-item setting

Factory

default

Description

Log Level

Critical, Warning & Info /

Critical & Warning / Critical

Critical,

Warning &

Info

Sets the level for adding a record to the system log.

Log Size 200 to 1024 1024 Sets the size of the log to save in the system log.

Download

as File

– –

Press the [Download] button and save the system log to a

tablet or computer from the displayed screen.

402

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

HTTP Access Log

Sets settings related to the HTTP access log.

5-041-957-11(1)

Item Sub-item setting

Factory

default

Description

Log Level

Critical, Warning & Info /

Critical & Warning / Critical

Critical,

Warning &

Info

Sets the level for adding a record to the HTTP access log.

Log Size 200 to 1024 1024 Sets the size of the log to save in the HTTP access log.

Download

as File

– –

Press the [Download] button and save the HTTP access log

to a tablet or computer from the displayed screen.

403

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Service

Obtains device information about the unit. Use when contacting your Sony service representative.

5-041-957-11(1)

Item

Sub-

item

setting

Factory

default

Description

I agree to download

device information.

– –

Place a check mark here to agree to acquire device information, and

press the [OK] button.

Press the displayed [Download] button. The web browser will

download a file named deviceinformation.dat momentarily.

Note

After downloading, the unit will reboot. After rebooting, reload the page

in the web browser.

404

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

EULA

Displays the End User License Agreement (EULA).

5-041-957-11(1)

405

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Software

Displays the software license.

5-041-957-11(1)

406

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Connecting External Monitors and Recording Devices

To display recorded/playback pictures on an external monitor, set the video output type for the external monitor and use

an appropriate cable for the monitor to be connected.

You can also connect an external recorder and record the output signal from the unit.

You can display the same information that is visible in the camera image panel, such as status information and menus,

on an external monitor. Set the desired system type for screen display to On using [Monitoring] > [Output Display] in the

web menu.

Note

If a monitor connected to the HDMI connector does not support the HDMI output format configured using the [Monitoring] menu in

the web menu or camera menu, the camera image will not be output to the Web App. Streaming video also cannot be output.

You can set both [Output Display] > [SDI] and [HDMI/Stream] to [Off], but that will prevent use of the camera menu and functions

that depend on the screen display. In addition, error notifications of the unit will be limited to the lamps (lit or blinking) of the unit

and the display of the notification mark at the top right in the Web App. To see the detailed status, set [Output Display] to [On].

Hint

[Output Display] > [SDI] is set to [Off] and [HDMI/Stream] is set to [On] by factory default. To use streaming as the main video, set

[SDI] to [On] and [HDMI/Stream] to [Off], and monitor the camera status on an SDI monitor.

SDI OUT connector (BNC type)

Set the output format using the [Monitoring] menu in the web menu or camera menu.

Use a commercially available 75 Ω coaxial cable for connection.

Note

Check that the connection between the unit and the external device is grounded before turning the devices on.

It is recommended that the unit and external device be turned on after connecting the 75 Ω coaxial cable.

If the external device must be connected to the unit while the unit is on, connect the 75 Ω coaxial cable to the external

device first and then connect it to the unit.

To start recording on the unit and external device simultaneously

With SDI signal output enabled, set [Project] > [SDI/HDMI Rec Control] > [Setting] to [SDI/HDMI Remote I/F] or [Parallel

Rec] in the camera menu to enable output of a REC trigger signal to the external device connected to the SDI OUT

connector. This will synchronize recording on the external device with the unit.

Note

If a connected external device does not support a REC trigger signal, the device cannot be operated.

When [Project] > [SDI/HDMI Rec Control] > [Setting] is set to [SDI/HDMI Remote I/F] in the camera menu, only the REC trigger

signal is output when there is no recording media currently inserted and the record START/STOP button is operated.

HDMI OUT connector (Type A connector)

Set the output On/Off setting and the output format in the [Monitoring] menu in the camera menu.

407

To start recording on the unit and external device simultaneously

With HDMI signal output enabled, set [TC/Media] > [HDMI TC Out] > [Setting] to [On] and [Project] > [SDI/HDMI Rec

Control] > [Setting] to [SDI/HDMI Remote I/F] or [Parallel Rec] in the camera menu to enable output of a REC trigger

signal to the external device connected to the HDMI OUT connector. This will synchronize recording on the external

device with the unit.

Note

If a connected external device does not support a REC trigger signal, the device cannot be operated.

When [Project] > [SDI/HDMI Rec Control] > [Setting] is set to [SDI/HDMI Remote I/F] in the camera menu, only the REC trigger

signal is output when there is no recording media currently inserted and the record START/STOP button is operated.

5-041-957-11(1)

408

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

About Operation Using an RM-IP500 Remote Controller (option)

You can operate the unit using a Sony RM-IP500 Remote Controller running software version 2.2 or later. The devices

communicate using VISCA over IP (LAN).

Depending on the target item to operate, you may need to view the screen display of the unit. Prepare a monitor that can

be used to check the screen display.

The following operations are supported from an RM-IP500 Remote Controller.

Selecting the target camera

Adjusting the framing (pan, tilt, zoom)

Adjusting the focus (excludes touch operation)

Registering and recalling preset positions

Operating the menu of the unit (excluding the web menu)

Adjusting the brightness

Adjusting the white balance

Adjusting the black balance

Adjusting the audio input level

Starting/stopping recording

Executing assignable button functions of the unit

For details about RM-IP500 operation, refer to the operating instructions for the RM-IP500.

Hint

When using an RM-IP500, use the panel sheet for this unit that is supplied with the RM-IP500.

RM-IP500 (using panel sheet for this unit)

409

410

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Connecting an RM-IP500 Remote Controller

For details about assigning functions, refer to the operating instructions for the RM-IP500.

5-041-957-11(1)

Set SETUP switch 3 of the unit to the ON position to enable VISCA over IP communication.

Note

The switch setting is applied when the unit is next turned on.

Connect the RM-IP500 to the same network as the unit.

Follow the procedure in the RM-IP500 operating instructions to configure VISCA over IP (LAN) connection

on the RM-IP500.

Assign this unit using RM menu > AUTO IP SETUP > ASSIGN CAM.

Assign functions of this unit to buttons and knobs, as required, using the following RM menu items of the

RM-IP500.

SW ASSIGN

AE CONFIG2

WB MODE

411

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

About Synchronizing with an External Device

When shooting using multiple units, the units can be synchronized to a specific reference signal or timecode via the

GENLOCK connector of the units.

For details about genlock, see “Synchronizing the Phase of the Video Signal (Genlock).”

For details about synchronizing timecodes, see “Locking the Timecode to Other Devices.”

5-041-957-11(1)

412

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Synchronizing the Phase of the Video Signal (Genlock)

You can supply a reference signal to the GENLOCK connector to enable genlock.

The input reference signals that can be used vary depending on the system frequency of the selected recording format.

You can check the external sync status using [Technical] > [Genlock] > [Reference] in the camera menu.

Note

If the reference signal is unstable, genlock cannot be achieved.

The subcarrier is not synchronized.

5-041-957-11(1)

System frequency of recording format Supported input reference signals

59.94P

1920×1080 59.94i

720×486 59.94i

50P

1920×1080 50i

720×576 50i

29.97P

1920×1080 59.94i

720×486 59.94i

25P

1920×1080 50i

720×576 50i

24P 1920×1080 24PsF

23.98P 1920×1080 23.98PsF

59.94i

1920×1080 59.94i

720×486 59.94i

50i

1920×1080 50i

720×576 50i

413

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Locking the Timecode to Other Devices

Set the unit that supplies the timecode to a mode in which the timecode output keeps running (such as Free Run or

Clock).

Note

Check that the supplied reference timecode and the reference video signal are in a phase relationship that complies with the

SMPTE timecode standard.

When operating with external lock, the timecode instantly acquires lock with the external timecode and the external timecode

value appears in the time data display area. However, do not start recording immediately. Wait for a few seconds until the

timecode generator stabilizes before recording.

If the frequency of the reference video signal and the frame frequency on the unit are not the same, lock cannot be acquired and

the unit will not operate properly. If this occurs, the timecode will not acquire successful lock with the external timecode.

If the external timecode source is disconnected, the timecode may shift by one frame per hour with respect to the reference

timecode.

To release external lock

Change the [TC/Media] > [Timecode] setting in the camera menu.

External synchronization is also released if the system frequency is changed and when you start recording in a special

recording mode (Slow & Quick Motion or Interval Rec).

5-041-957-11(1)

Set the following in [TC/Media] > [Timecode] in the camera menu.

Set [Mode] to [Preset].

Set [Run] to [Free Run].

Press an assignable button assigned with the [DURATION/TC/U-BIT] function to display the timecode on

the screen.

Supply an HD or SD reference video signal to the GENLOCK connector and the reference timecode to the

TC IN connector.

The timecode generator of the unit acquires lock with the reference timecode, and “EXT-LK” appears on the screen.

Once about ten seconds have elapsed after the timecode locks, the external lock state is maintained even if the

external reference timecode source is disconnected.

414

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Connecting an External Microphone or External Audio Device

You can input the signal from an external microphone or external audio device and embed the audio in the recorded

video or output video of the unit.

Connect an external microphone or external audio device using an XLR cable.

When the audio is set to [LINE] using [Audio] > [Audio Input] > [AUDIO IN Select] in the camera menu, the AUDIO

IN connector functions as the AUDIO IN CH-1 connector and AUDIO IN CH-2 connector.

Pin No. Function

1 GND

2 AUDIO IN CH-1+ (HOT)

3 AUDIO IN CH-1− (COLD)

4 AUDIO IN CH-2+ (HOT)

5 AUDIO IN CH-2− (COLD)

Turn off the unit and connect the XLR cable to the AUDIO IN connector.

Set SETUP switch 2 to enable the phantom power supply as required.

Switch the +48 V power supply (phantom power) as described below.

Switch 2

Sets whether the +48 V power supply (phantom power) is turned on/off when an audio input device is connected.

Setting Description

OFF

(default)

This turns off the +48 V phantom power supply and sets the LINE or MIC input as the CH-1 and CH-2

audio source.

415

Note

Setting this switch to the ON position and connecting a microphone that is not compatible with a +48 V source may damage

the connected device. Check the setting before connecting the device.

Setting Description

This turns on the +48V phantom power supply and sets the phantom power supply compatible

microphone as the CH-1 and CH-2 audio source.

Turn on the unit and set the type of connected device using [Audio] > [Audio Input] > [AUDIO IN Select] in

the camera menu.

416

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Managing/Editing Clips Using a Computer

You can manage/edit clips using a computer.

Importing clips using a card reader (option)

Connect a CFexpress Type A card reader or SD card reader to your computer and use software that supports the

recording format of this unit, such as Catalyst Browse, to import the clips.

Using a nonlinear editing system

In a nonlinear editing system, editing software (option) that supports the formats recorded by the unit is required.

5-041-957-11(1)

417

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Outputting an Optical Fiber Signal

You can output an SDI signal converted to an optical signal by connecting an SFP+ module (option) to the OPTICAL

connector of the unit. Use an SFP+ module that matches the signal band of each format.

Signal band

4K (59.94p, 50p): 12G

4K (other than 59.94p, 50p): 6G

HD (59.94p, 50p): 3G

HD (other than 59.94p, 50p): 1.5G

Note

Use a module that complies with the following standards.

SFF standards

SFF-8083/SFF-8418/SFF-8419*/SFF-8432/SFF-8433/SFF-8071/SFF-8472

SDI standards

ST297/ST292/ST424/ST425/ST2081/ST2082

The same signal as the SDI output connector is output to the SFP+ module.

The unit does not support optical fiber signal input.

Use an SFP+ module for optical fiber signal output. For details about verified SFP+ modules, contact your dealer or Sony service

representative.

5-041-957-11(1)

* Power Level I (1.0 W)

418

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Connecting a Tally Signal

This topic describes tally signal control.

Lighting the tally lamp using a signal from a remote controller

You can light up the tally lamp using a VISCA over IP command from an external device, such as the RM-IP500.

Set [Technical] > [Tally] > [Tally Control] to [External] in the web menu or camera menu.

Lighting the tally lamp from an external device

You can light up the tally lamp of the unit red or green from an external device, such as the RM-IP500 or a switcher. You

can control the tally using commands transmitted over the network or using a tally signal input on the OPTION connector

of the unit.

Set [Technical] > [Tally] > [Tally Control] to [External] in the web menu or camera menu.

When inputting a tally signal on the OPTION connector, short-circuit pin 7 to GND (either pin 4 or 5) to light up the tally

lamp green, or pin 8 to GND (either pin 4 or 5) to light up the tally lamp red.

Note

When [Tally Control] is set to [External], the recording status of the unit is not indicated by the tally lamp.

When a red tally and green tally are input simultaneously, the tally lamp of the unit lights up red.

OPTION connector pin specifications

Pin No. Signal direction Signal specifications

1 – Reserved

2 – Reserved

3 OUT

Green tally lamp output

Low-level output when green tally lamp is lit.

Hi-Z (open-drain output) when green tally lamp is not lit.

4 – GND (Ground)

5 – GND (Ground)

419

Lighting the tally lamp of an external device using a signal from the unit

You can light up the tally lamp of an external device using a signal from the unit by connecting pin 3 and pin 6 of the

OPTION connector as shown below.

OPTION connector pins 3 and 6 connection example

Note

Do not apply a voltage to pins 7 and 8.

Do not connect an external device that can apply voltage to the OPTION connector.

If an inrush or reverse voltage that exceeds the rating is applied to pin 3 or 6, it may cause a malfunction, smoke, or fire.

Set the output signal using [Technical] > [Tally] > [Tally Control] in the web menu or camera menu.

[Internal]: Recording operation status of the unit

[External]: Logical-AND of red/green tally signals received by the unit via the IN signals and remote controllers.

5-041-957-11(1)

Pin No. Signal direction Signal specifications

6 OUT

Red tally lamp output

Low-level output when red tally lamp is lit.

Hi-Z (open-drain output) when red tally lamp is not lit.

7 IN

Green tally external control input

Short-circuit to ground (pin 4 or 5) causes the tally lamp of the unit to light up green.

8 IN

Red tally external control input

Short-circuit to ground (pin 4 or 5) causes the tally lamp of the unit to light up red.

420

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Usage Precautions

Condensation

If the unit is suddenly taken from a cold to a warm location, or if ambient temperature suddenly rises, moisture may form

on the outer surface of the unit and/or inside of the unit. This is known as condensation. If condensation occurs, turn off

the unit and wait until the condensation clears before operating the unit. Operating the unit while condensation is present

may damage the unit.

Camera CMOS image sensor phenomena

Note

The following phenomena that may occur in images are specific to image sensors. They do not indicate a malfunction.

White flecks

Although the image sensors are produced with high-precision technologies, fine white flecks may be generated on the

screen in rare cases, caused by cosmic rays, etc.

This is related to the principle of image sensors and is not a malfunction.

The white flecks especially tend to be seen in the following cases:

When operating at a high environmental temperature

When you have raised the gain (sensitivity)

Flicker

If shooting under lighting produced by fluorescent lights, sodium lamps, mercury-vapor lamps, or LEDs, the screen may

flicker or colors may vary.

Lens and pan/tilt drive units

If the lens and pan/tilt drive mechanism is not operated for an extended period, the viscosity of the grease applied inside

may increase, preventing the mechanism from moving. Operate the lens and pan/tilt mechanism regularly.

On consumable parts

The fan and built-in rechargeable battery are consumable parts that will need periodic replacement.

When operating at room temperature, a normal replacement cycle will be about 5 years. However, this replacement

cycle represents only a general guideline and does not imply that the life expectancy of these parts is guaranteed.

For details on parts replacement, contact your dealer.

The life expectancy of the AC adaptor and the electrolytic capacitor is about 5 years under normal operating

temperatures and normal usage (8 hours per day; 25 days per month). If usage exceeds the above normal usage

frequency, the life expectancy may be reduced correspondingly.

Periodic inspections are recommended to keep the unit working properly and to prolong its usable lifetime. Contact a

Sony service representative for more information about inspections.

About the built-in rechargeable battery

The unit has a built-in rechargeable battery for storing the date, time, and other settings even when the unit is turned off.

The built-in rechargeable battery will be charged after 24 hours have elapsed if the unit is connected to a power outlet

using the AC adaptor or if powered via PoE++, regardless of whether the unit is turned on/off. The rechargeable battery

will be fully discharged in about 2 months if the AC adaptor is not connected to a power supply. Use your unit after

421

charging the battery. However, even if the rechargeable battery is not charged, the unit operation will not be affected as

long as you do not need to record the date.

Usage and storage locations

Store in a level, ventilated place.

Avoid using or storing the unit in the following places.

Locations exposed to rain or water (including under eaves)

Outdoors and locations that exceed 40 °C (104 °F)

Remember that in summer in warm climates the temperature inside a car with the windows closed can easily exceed

50 °C (122 °F).

Locations colder than 0 °C (32 °F).

In damp or dusty locations. Locations where the unit may be exposed to rain

Locations subject to vibration or shock

Locations where radiation, X-rays, and strong magnetic fields are generated.

Close to radio or TV transmitters producing strong electromagnetic fields.

In direct sunlight or close to heaters for extended periods

Note on laser beams

Laser beams may damage the CMOS image sensor. If you shoot a scene that includes a laser beam, be careful not to

let the laser beam be directed into the lens of the unit. Specifically, high-power laser beams from medical devices or

other devices may cause damage due to reflected light and scattered light.

To prevent electromagnetic interference from portable communications devices

The use of portable telephones and other communications devices near this unit can result in malfunctions and

interference with audio and video signals. It is recommended that the portable communications devices near this unit be

powered off.

Do not place this product close to medical devices

This product (including accessories) has magnet(s) which may interfere with pacemakers, programmable shunt valves

for hydrocephalus treatment, or other medical devices. Do not place this product close to persons who use such medical

devices. Consult your doctor before using this product if you use any such medical device.

Security precautions

SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES OF ANY KIND RESULTING FROM A FAILURE TO IMPLEMENT

PROPER SECURITY MEASURES ON TRANSMISSION DEVICES, UNAVOIDABLE DATA LEAKS RESULTING

FROM TRANSMISSION SPECIFICATIONS, OR SECURITY PROBLEMS OF ANY KIND.

Depending on the operating environment, unauthorized third parties on the network may be able to access the unit.

When connecting the unit to the network, be sure to confirm that the network is protected securely.

Communication content may be unknowingly intercepted by unauthorized third parties in the vicinity of the signals.

When using wireless LAN communication, implement security measures properly to protect the communication

content.

When connecting this product to a network, connect via a system that provides a protection function, such as a router

or firewall. If connected without such protection, security issues may occur.

Power supply

The unit is not equipped with a power switch. To turn off the unit, check that all operations have ended and the unit is

in power standby state, then disconnect the AC adaptor. When using PoE++ power delivery, disconnect the LAN

cable.

Where possible, use a power source from a place where it is easy to insert and remove the power plug.

If you use an outlet in a dusty place, clean the area around the outlet regularly to prevent tracking.

Precautions for moving parts

Make sure that foreign matter does not enter moving parts.

Do not apply an excessive load when moving parts by hand. Doing so may cause a malfunction.

Do not interfere with the operation of moving parts during movement. Doing so may cause an injury or malfunction.

422

Moving parts may not operate normally if the unit is not used for an extended period of time. Regularly operate the

pan/tilt functions of the unit.

Precautions for the recording function

Always make a test recording, and verify that it was recorded successfully. SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR

DAMAGES OF ANY KIND INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, COMPENSATION OR REIMBURSEMENT ON

ACCOUNT OF FAILURE OF THIS UNIT OR ITS RECORDING MEDIA OR ANY OTHER MEDIA OR STORAGE

SYSTEMS TO RECORD CONTENT OF ANY TYPE.

Always verify that the unit is operating properly before use. SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES OF ANY

KIND INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, COMPENSATION OR REIMBURSEMENT ON ACCOUNT OF THE

LOSS OF PRESENT OR PROSPECTIVE PROFITS DUE TO FAILURE OF THIS UNIT, EITHER DURING THE

WARRANTY PERIOD OR AFTER EXPIRATION OF THE WARRANTY, OR FOR ANY OTHER REASON

WHATSOEVER.

SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR CLAIMS OF ANY KIND MADE BY USERS OF THIS UNIT OR MADE BY THIRD

PARTIES.

SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR THE LOSS, REPAIR, OR REPRODUCTION OF ANY DATA RECORDED ON

THE INTERNAL STORAGE SYSTEM, RECORDING MEDIA OR ANY OTHER MEDIA OR STORAGE SYSTEMS.

SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR THE TERMINATION OR DISCONTINUATION OF ANY SERVICES RELATED

TO THIS UNIT THAT MAY RESULT DUE TO CIRCUMSTANCES OF ANY KIND.

5-041-957-11(1)

423

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Output Formats and Limitations

This topic describes the output formats and limitations.

Note

The resolution of the output format is limited by the [Project] > [Rec Format] > [Frequency], [Codec], and [Video Format] settings

in the web menu or camera menu.

The resolution of the output format is also limited by the combination with the S&Q frame rate. In addition to the table of SDI

OUT/HDMI OUT connector output formats below, the HDMI output changes to Full HD or lower when all the following conditions

are met.

[Shooting] > [S&Q Motion] > [Setting] is set to [On]

[Shooting] > [S&Q Motion] > [Frame Rate] is higher than 60fps

When the conditions above are met, the HDMI output 4096×2160P and 3840×2160P selection options for [Monitoring] > [Output

Format] > [SDI/HDMI] are grayed out and cannot be selected.

The image is not output if a higher resolution than the playback image resolution is configured.

SDI OUT/HDMI OUT connector output formats

When the system frequency is 50/59.94 Hz

Setting Selectable output format

Recording/playback

mode

RAW output resolution/

Internal recording

resolution

SDI HDMI

RAW

RAW & XAVC-I

4096×2160

(RAW)

(4096×2160 RAW)

4096×2160P

3840×2160P

1920×1080P (default)

1920×1080i

3840×2160

(RAW)

(3840×2160 RAW)

3840×2160P

1920×1080P (default)

1920×1080i

XAVC-I

XAVC-L

4096×2160

4096×2160 (2SI)

4096×2160P

1920×1080P

1920×1080i

3840×2160 (2SI)

3840×2160P

1920×1080P

1920×1080i

1920×1080P (Level A)

(default)

1920×1080P (default)

1920×1080i

1920×1080P (Level B)

1920×1080P

1920×1080i

424

When the system frequency is 25/29.97 Hz

Setting Selectable output format

Recording/playback

mode

RAW output resolution/

Internal recording

resolution

SDI HDMI

3840×2160

3840×2160 (2SI)

3840×2160P

1920×1080P

1920×1080i

1920×1080P (Level A)

(default)

1920×1080P (default)

1920×1080i

1920×1080P (Level B)

1920×1080P

1920×1080i

1920×1080i 1920×1080i

1920×1080

1920×1080P (Level A)

(default)

1920×1080P (default)

1920×1080i

1920×1080P (Level B)

1920×1080P

1920×1080i

1920×1080i 1920×1080i

(Output stopped)

720×480P

720×576P

When the system frequency is 59.94

When the system frequency is 50

Setting Output Format (output resolution)

Recording/playback mode

RAW output resolution/

Internal recording resolution

SDI HDMI

RAW

RAW & XAVC-I

4096×2160

(RAW)

(4096×2160 RAW)

4096×2160P

3840×2160P

1920×1080P

1920×1080i (default)

3840×2160

(RAW)

(3840×2160 RAW)

3840×2160P

1920×1080P

1920×1080i (default)

XAVC-I

XAVC-L

4096×2160

4096×2160 (2SI)

4096×2160P

1920×1080P

3840×2160 (2SI)

3840×2160P

1920×1080P

1920×1080P 1920×1080P

1920×1080PsF (default) 1920×1080i (default)

3840×2160

3840×2160 (2SI)

3840×2160P

1920×1080P

1920×1080P 1920×1080P

425

When the system frequency is 23.98 Hz

When the system frequency is 24 Hz

5-041-957-11(1)

Setting Output Format (output resolution)

Recording/playback mode

RAW output resolution/

Internal recording resolution

SDI HDMI

1920×1080PsF (default) 1920×1080i (default)

1920×1080

1920×1080P

1920×1080PsF

1920×1080P

1920×1080i

Setting Output Format (output resolution)

Recording/playback mode

RAW output resolution/

Internal recording resolution

SDI HDMI

RAW

RAW & XAVC-I

4096×2160

(RAW)

(4096×2160 RAW)

4096×2160P

3840×2160P

1920×1080P (default)

3840×2160

(RAW)

(3840×2160 RAW)

3840×2160P

1920×1080P (default)

XAVC-I

XAVC-L

4096×2160

4096×2160 (2SI)

4096×2160P

1920×1080P

3840×2160 (2SI)

3840×2160P

1920×1080P

1920×1080P (default) 1920×1080P (default)

3840×2160

3840×2160 (2SI)

3840×2160P

1920×1080P

1920×1080P (default) 1920×1080P (default)

1920×1080 1920×1080P (default) 1920×1080P (default)

Setting Output Format (output resolution)

Recording/playback mode

RAW output resolution/

Internal recording resolution

SDI HDMI

RAW

RAW & XAVC-I

4096×2160

(RAW)

(4096×2160 RAW)

4096×2160P

1920×1080P (default)

XAVC-I 4096×2160

4096×2160 (2SI)

1920×1080P (default)

4096×2160P

1920×1080P (default)

426

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Troubleshooting

Power supply

Image output

Symptom Cause Solution

Unit does

not power

on.

The AC adaptor is not connected to the DC IN

connector firmly.

Insert the power cord firmly as far as it will go.

The AC power cord is not inserted firmly into the AC

adaptor or the AC outlet.

Insert the power cord firmly as far as it will go.

The LAN cable is not connected firmly between the

PoE++ power delivery device and the unit.

Check that the cable is inserted until it locks.

The LAN cable is connected to the OPTION connector,

but not to the LAN connector.

Connect the LAN cable to the LAN connector

correctly.

The unit is connected to a power delivery device that

does not support PoE++ (IEEE802.3bt, Type 4, Class 8

compliant).

Connect to a power delivery device that

supports PoE++ (IEEE802.3bt, Type 4, Class

8 compliant).

The total power consumption exceeds the maximum

rating of the PoE++ power delivery device.

Refer to the operating instructions for the

PoE++ power delivery device.

A network cable with category rating that does not

support PoE++ power delivery is connected.

Use a Category 5e or higher network cable

connected to the LAN connector.

The camera, PoE++ power delivery device, and

peripheral devices are not connected to ground.

Connect the camera, PoE++ power delivery

device, and peripheral devices to ground.

Symptom Cause Solution

No image is

output.

Connected devices are not connected correctly.

Connect the connected

devices correctly.

Initial setup was not completed.

Complete the initial setup

using the Web App.

No image is output

from the HDMI

connector.

A signal that is not supported by the HDMI output destination device

is being output.

Change the HDMI output

format setting or use a

device that supports the

output signal.

A cable that does not support the output HDMI standard is being

used.

Use a cable that supports

the output HDMI standard

in use.

427

Remote controller

Infrared remote control

Symptom Cause Solution

No image is output

from the SDI

connector.

A cable that does not support the output SDI standard is being used.

Use a cable that supports

the output SDI standard

in use.

The monitor connected to the SDI connector does not support the

output signal.

Use a monitor that

supports the output SDI

standard.

The recording format is set for RAW output.

Change the recording

format to a setting other

than RAW output.

The HDMI output is set to SD resolution.

Set the HDMI output to a

resolution other than SD.

No image is output

from the optical

fiber or the image

is distorted.

The module being used does not comply with the SFF or SMPTE

standards, or does not satisfy Power Level I (1.0 W).

See “Outputting an

Optical Fiber Signal.”

No image is output

or is distorted

when using

external sync.

An external sync signal suitable for the configured video signal

format is not being input.

Input an external sync

signal suitable for the

configured video signal

format.

There is noise in

the audio.

The camera, PoE++ power delivery device, and peripheral devices

are not connected to ground.

Connect the camera,

PoE++ power delivery

device, and peripheral

devices to ground.

The unit is being used in an environment with devices that generate

strong electric and magnetic fields (such as TV/radio transmitter

antennas, amateur radio transmitters, air conditioner motors, power

supply transformers).

Keep away from devices

that generate strong

electric and magnetic

fields.

The lens, lens support, and drive unit are in contact with the unit or

an object in the surrounding environment and an abnormal noise is

emitted.

Attach the lens

correctly.

Check for any

obstacles near the

camera.

Symptom Cause Solution

Infrared remote control

does not function when

pressed.

Infrared remote control operation is

disabled.

Set [Technical] > [IR Remote] > [Setting] to [On] in

the web menu.

The battery has been discharged

or the battery polarity is incorrect.

Operate the infrared remote control near the IR

sensor of the unit. If the Power LED blinks,

replace the battery.

Initial setup was not completed. Complete the initial setup using the Web App.

428

RM-IP500

Web App

Symptom Cause Solution

Pan/tilt operating speed is

slow.

The pan/tilt speed from the infrared

remote control is set to normal

mode.

Set SETUP switch 4 to the ON position on the

rear panel.

Operation targeted a

camera other than the

intended camera.

The infrared signal was received

by a camera other than the

intended camera.

Set [Technical] > [IR Remote] > [Setting] to [Off] in

the web menu of the camera you do not want to

control.

Symptom Cause Solution

Camera cannot be operated from the

RM-IP500 Remote Controller.

The power supply for

the camera is not

connected.

Check that the POWER lamp of the camp lights

up green or orange.

The camera or remote

controller is not

connected to the

network.

Check the camera and remote controller

connections.

Initial setup of the

camera was not

completed.

Complete the initial setup using the Web App.

VISCA over IP

communication is not

enabled.

Set SETUP switch 3 to the ON position on the

camera connector panel and reboot the unit.

The IP address of the

camera changed.

Check the IP address of the camera using

[Network] > [Wired LAN] in the web menu or

camera menu.

The IP address of the camera was

changed using AUTO IP SETUP on the

RM-IP500 Remote Controller.

At least 20 minutes has

elapsed since the

camera was started.

Reboot the camera. The IP address can be

changed using AUTO IP SETUP within the first

20 minutes after starting the camera.

Symptom Cause Solution

Cannot connect using a web

browser.

A category 5e or higher

LAN cable is not

connected.

Connect a Category 5e or higher LAN cable.

Not connected to LAN

correctly or connected

network is not operating

normally.

Check that the LINK LED for the LAN connector is lit. If

the LINK LED is not lit, contact your network

administrator.

The power supply for

the camera is not

connected.

See the “Power supply” section above.

A valid IP address is not

configured for the unit.

Perform a network reset.

429

Symptom Cause Solution

The configured IP

address is in use on

another device.

Check that the IP addresses of peripheral devices are

unique.

The configured subnet

mask does not match

the used network

subnet.

Perform a network reset.

The unit is being

accessed on the same

local network via a

proxy.

Change the configuration so that a proxy server is not

used.

The configured default

gateway for the unit is

incorrect.

Perform a network reset.

The entered URL is

incorrect.

Enter the correct URL and try again.

The HTTP port is

incorrect.

Display the camera menu on an external monitor and

check the setting of [Network] > [Wired LAN] > [HTTP

Port]. If a value other than 80 is configured, add the

HTTP port number to the host name or IP address

entered in the web browser.

Example: If HTTP Port is set to 8080, enter http://<IP

Address>:8080

The HTTP port number

of the unit is being

filtered or blocked.

Change the HTTP port number of the unit to a port that

is not being filtered or blocked.

Old cache of the web

browser is having an

adverse effect.

Delete the cache from the web browser.

Cannot connect to the Web

App using the 2D code (QR

code).

The device being used

does not support

mDNS.

Use a device that supports mDNS.

If using a device that does not support mDNS, enter the

IP address directly into the web browser.

The tablet or computer

is connected to a

different network than

the camera.

Connect the tablet or computer to the same network as

the camera.

Cannot connect to the Web

App by manually entering the

URL.

The device being used

does not support

mDNS.

Use a device that supports mDNS.

The tablet or computer

is connected to a

different network than

the camera.

Connect the tablet or computer to the same network as

the camera.

The authentication screen is

displayed continuously.

The correct user name

or password was not

entered.

Enter the registered user name and password. If you

have forgotten the registered user information, see

“RESET switch” in “Connector Block” to initialize the

user information for network connection.

430

Symptom Cause Solution

The user name and

password may have

been changed by a user

logged in using another

web browser.

Check the correct user name and password with the

camera administrator.

Camera image is not displayed

in the Web App.

The HDMI output of the

camera is set to

720×480 or 720×576.

Change the resolution of the HDMI output of the camera.

An HDMI monitor that

does not support the

HDMI output signal of

the camera is

connected.

Remove the HDMI monitor or use an HDMI monitor that

supports the HDMI output signal.

The unit was rebooted

and the session was

disconnected.

Wait about one minute and reload the web browser.

Old cache of the web

browser is having an

adverse effect.

Delete the cache from the web browser.

Resolution of the camera

image displayed in the Web

App is low.

The resolution for video

stream 3 used by the

Web App is set low.

Increase the value using [Stream] > [Video Stream] >

[Size 3] in the web menu.

Camera menu does not appear

when you press the [MENU]

button.

The camera menu is

configured so that it is

not being embedded in

the HDMI output signal.

Set [Monitoring] > [Output Display] > [HDMI/Stream] to

[On] in the web menu.

Value of a setting on the

settings screen is not

updated/displayed properly.

The settings screen of

the Web App does not

automatically reflect the

settings changed in

another Web App.

Press the [Reload] button at the bottom of the settings

screen of the Web App. The values of the settings on

the displayed setup screen are reloaded and updated.

The settings of

temporary Internet files

are having an affect.

Delete the cache from the web browser.

Cannot download configuration

file or log.

The download file

function of the web

browser is disabled.

Enable the download file function of the web browser.

Settings screen of the Web App

is accessible, but cannot

perform operations on the live

operation screen and playback

operation screen.

The Web App operation

screen is locked.

Set the operation lock switch at the top right in the Web

App to the

(Operation Unlock) position.

Web App screen takes some

time to display.

The streaming image of

the unit is being viewed

by multiple users

simultaneously.

Reduce the number of users that can access the Web

App simultaneously.

431

Shooting

Camera

Pan/tilt

Symptom Cause Solution

Image looks distorted at the start

and end of pan/tilt operation.

The image may be distorted if the image

stabilization function of the lens is turned on.

Turn off the image

stabilization function of the

lens.

Angle of view changed without

user operation.

Lens breathing occurred.

See “Breathing

Compensation.”

Cannot operate the focus, zoom,

or iris.

The settings of switches on the lens may be

incorrect.

See “Checking the Lens

Switches.”

Symptom Cause Solution

Cannot reset the

pan/tilt.

The pan/tilt lock lever is in

the LOCK position.

Slide the pan/tilt lock lever to the UNLOCK position.

Camera does not

stop in the

expected position.

The camera block is out of

balance.

Move the camera block forward/rearward to an appropriate position

as described in “Attaching a Lens,” and then turn the unit on again.

A lens that does not

support pan/tilt is

attached.

Refer to the lens compatibility information and attach a lens that

supports pan/tilt, and then turn the unit on again.

Cannot execute pan/tilt

reset.

Execute a pan/tilt reset as described in “Resetting the Pan/Tilt.”

An unexpected force was

applied to the camera

head, causing a pan/tilt

control error.

Camera does not

return to the front

when the [Pan-Tilt

Home] button is

pressed.

Ceiling mount mode has

been activated.

Set [Pan-Tilt] > [P/T Direction] > [Ceiling] in the web menu

according to the actual installation, and then turn the unit on again.

When mounted on a ceiling, the connector block will be at the front

of the camera.

Pan/tilt operation

is restricted.

Pan/tilt range limit is

configured.

Clear the pan/tilt range limit settings, as required, as described in

“P/T Range Limit.”

An unexpected force was

applied to the camera

head, causing a pan/tilt

error.

Execute a pan/tilt reset as described in “Resetting the Pan/Tilt.”

Pan/tilt operation

moved in the

opposite direction.

The ceiling mount mode

setting is different than the

actual mounting state.

Set [Pan-Tilt] > [P/T Direction] > [Ceiling] in the web menu

according to the actual installation.

Settings related to the

pan/tilt direction were

changed.

Check the [Pan-Tilt] > [P/T Direction] settings in the web menu.

432

Symptom Cause Solution

Image does not

move smoothly at

the start and end

of pan/tilt

operation.

The pan/tilt operation

acceleration/deceleration

setting is too high.

Reduce the pan/tilt operation acceleration/deceleration setting to

make the motion at the start and end of pan/tilt operation smoother

using [Pan-Tilt] > [P/T Acceleration] > [Ramp Curve] in the web

menu or camera menu. Note that this will mean that the lens takes

longer to reach the maximum speed.

Pan/tilt operation

stopped.

The camera block is out of

balance.

Move the camera block forward/rearward to an appropriate position

as described in “Attaching a Lens,” and then turn the unit on again.

The ramp curve

(acceleration/deceleration)

setting is too high for the

attached lens.

If a large lens is attached, reduce the value of [Pan-Tilt] > [P/T

Acceleration] > [Ramp Curve] in the web menu or camera menu.

A large lens is being used. Contact your Sony support representative.

Unit is obstructed

when the pan/tilt is

operated.

The lens support pedestal

attachment screw clamp

lever hits the camera.

Turn the lens support pedestal attachment screw clamp lever so

that it is pointing up.

The lens support clamp

lever hits the camera.

Turn the lens support clamp lever so that it is pointing up.

The camera head lock

lever hits the camera.

Check that the camera head lock lever is fully in the LOCK

position.

Abnormal noise

occurs during

pan/tilt operation.

The camera is out of

balance.

Move the camera head forward/rearward to an appropriate position

so that the slide base is horizontal.

The ramp curve

(acceleration/deceleration)

setting is too high for the

attached lens.

If a large lens is attached, reduce the value of [Pan-Tilt] > [P/T

Acceleration] > [Ramp Curve] in the web menu or camera menu.

The camera head is not

fixed in position and there

is a moving noise during

operation.

Set the camera head lock lever to the LOCK position.

Cannot save or

load a preset.

Saving and loading a

preset is not available

when [Zoom Type] is set

to [On(Clear Image

Zoom)].

Set [Technical] > [Zoom] > [Zoom Type] to [Optical Zoom Only] in

the camera menu.

The framing

control panel of

the Web App is

grayed out and

cannot be

operated.

The pan/tilt operation is

unavailable while the

thumbnail screen is

displayed and during

playback.

Exit the thumbnail screen display or stop playback.

The pan/tilt operation is

unavailable when the

camera image cannot be

displayed in the Web App.

See “Web App” in “Troubleshooting.”

The pan/tilt lock lever is in

the LOCK position.

Slide the pan/tilt lock lever to the UNLOCK position.

433

Recording / playback

File transfer

IP streaming

Symptom Cause Solution

“Execute Pan-Tilt

Reset” is displayed

below the framing

control panel in the

Web App.

An unexpected force was

applied to the camera

head, causing a pan/tilt

error.

Execute a pan/tilt reset as described in “Resetting the Pan/Tilt.”

Symptom Cause Solution

Recording does not start

when you press the

record START/STOP

button.

The memory card is full.

Replace the memory card with one having

sufficient space.

The memory card needs restoration.

Restore the memory card as described in

“Restoring Memory Cards.”

Unit is running using on PoE++ power.

Supply power to the DC IN connector using the

AC adaptor.

The recording/tally lamp is configured

as a tally lamp, so the recording status

cannot be determined by the lamp.

Configure the recording/tally lamp to function

as a recording lamp as described in

“Connecting a Tally Signal.”

Audio recording is not

possible.

A microphone is not connected.

Connect a microphone or audio device to the

AUDIO IN connector on the connector block.

The [Master Input Level] setting is at

the minimum value.

Adjust [Master Input Level].

Recorded sound is

distorted.

The audio input level setting is too high.

Adjust [CH1 Input Level] to [CH4 Input Level]

and [Master Input Level].

Recorded sound has a

high noise level.

The audio input level setting is too low.

Adjust [Audio Input Level] and [Audio] > [Audio]

> [Audio Input] > [AUDIO IN CH1 MIC Ref.] or

[AUDIO IN CH2 MIC Ref.] settings.

Clips cannot be played

back.

The clip is being edited.

Clips cannot be played back if you have

modified file names or folders, or if the clip is in

use on a computer. This is not a malfunction.

The clip was recorded using a camera

other than this unit.

Clips recorded using a camera other than this

unit may not be played back, or displayed in

incorrect size. This is not a malfunction.

Symptom Cause Solution

File

uploading

fails.

The user name and password on the

server are not correct.

The user name and password on the server may not be

correct. Enter the correct entries.

Symptom Cause Solution

434

Symptom Cause Solution

Streaming not

available.

The user name or password

entered in the client app to

view streaming from the unit is

incorrect.

If the streaming format of the unit is set to [RTSP], [SRT-

Listener], or [NDI|HX], it is necessary to enter the user name

and password set for this unit in the client app. Enter the

correct user name and password.

The streaming protocol is not

configured when the

streaming mode is set to

[RTSP/SRT] or [Listener/NDI].

Select the target protocol using [Stream] > [Stream Setting] in

the web menu.

Six or more RTSP sessions

have been set.

Set the number of sessions to five or fewer.

UDP port number is not set

correctly.

Set the port number and other settings for the target protocol

using [Stream] > [Stream] > [Stream Setting] in the web

menu.

UDP communication is

blocked.

Check the security software settings.

Audio is not being

streamed.

Audio output streaming is set

to [Off].

Set [Stream] > [Audio Stream] > [Setting] to [On] in the web

menu.

Streaming was

disconnected.

The protocol setting or

streaming codec settings were

changed during streaming.

Set the protocol setting and streaming codec settings before

starting streaming.

Picture size of [Video

Stream 1] cannot be

set to 4096×2160 or

3840×2160.

The picture size is 1920×1080

when [Output Format] is set to

HDMI.

The picture size for streaming cannot be set higher than the

HDMI picture size. Change the HDMI picture size using

[Monitoring] > [Output Format] in the web menu.

Frame rate of [Video

Stream 1] cannot be

set to 60 FPS or 50

FPS.

The streaming frame rate is

set to 29.97 or lower.

The frame rate used for streaming is limited by the system

frequency. Change the system frequency using [Rec Format]

> [Frequency] in the web menu.

[Video Stream 3]

stream cannot be

accessed.

[Video Stream 3] does not

support RTSP/SRT/NDI.

Use [Video Stream 1] or [Video Stream 2].

RTSP/SRT screen is

not

updated/displayed

properly.

The port number used for

RTSP or SRT is being filtered

or blocked.

Change the RTSP or SRT port number to a port that is not

being filtered or blocked by devices receiving the stream. Or

change the port number used for RTSP or SRT on the unit.

Image is distorted or

jerky.

The video information is not

transmitted properly due to

congestion in the

communications path.

Reduce the streaming bit rate or set the [Video Stream 2]

codec ([Codec 2]) to [OFF] to create a margin in the

communications band.

The order of video packets

has changed within the

communications channel.

Use the same Internet service provider on both the camera

side and the receiver side.

Not detected as NDI

device.

The streaming protocol is not

set to NDI|HX.

The streaming protocol must be set to NDI|HX in order to

detect the unit as an NDI device. Set [Stream] > [Stream

Setting] to [NDI|HX] in the web menu.

435

Connection with external devices

External synchronization

Tally

5-041-957-11(1)

Symptom Cause Solution

Cannot be used as

an NDI device.

An NDI|HX license is not

installed.

Install an NDI|HX license. You can check whether there is an

NDI|HX license using [Stream] > [Stream] > [Stream Setting]

> [NDI|HX] > [License] in the web menu.

Symptom Cause Solution

Cannot

synchronize to

external source.

An external sync signal suitable for the

configured video signal format is not

being input.

Input an external sync signal suitable for the

configured video signal format.

Unit is double-terminated.

The unit has a built-in 75 Ω terminator. Connect

directly to a signal source (one-to-one) or use a

distributor (splitter).

Symptom Cause Solution

Tally lamp

does not

light up.

The tally lamp brightness is set to Off.

Set the appropriate brightness using [Technical] >

[Tally] > [Tally Lamp Brightness] in the web menu.

The recording/tally lamp is configured as a

recording lamp.

Configure the recording/tally lamp to function as a

tally lamp as described in “Connecting a Tally

Signal.”

RM-IP500 is connected and VISCA over IP is

disabled.

Set SETUP switch 3 to the ON position on the

connector block.

The OPTION connector connection is incorrect

or the target pin is not short-circuited to GND.

Short-circuit pin 7 or pin 8 of the OPTION connector

to GND as described in “Connecting a Tally Signal.”

436

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Error/Warning Messages

If a warning, caution, or operating condition that requires confirmation occurs on the unit, a message is displayed in the

camera image panel, and the POWER lamp and NETWORK lamp on the front panel and the recording/tally lamp start

blinking.

Note

The recording/tally lamp blinking indication is enabled only when both [Technical] > [Tally] > [Tally Control] is set to [Internal] and

[Tally Lamp Brightness] is set to [Off] in the web menu or camera menu.

Error messages

If the POWER lamp and NETWORK lamp are blinking as described below, take the following measures.

The unit will stop operation when the following display occurs.

Warning messages

Follow the instructions provided if the following display occurs.

POWER

lamp

NETWORK

lamp

Cause and solution

Blinking

orange

slowly

Blinking

green

slowly

The unit cannot operate normally. For details, see [Maintenance] > [System Log] in the web

menu. If the problem persists even after putting the unit in standby mode or turning the

power off and then on again, contact your Sony service representative.

Blinking

orange

rapidly

Blinking

green

rapidly

A malfunction occurred on the unit. Contact your Sony service representative.

Message

display

Recording/tally

lamp

Cause and solution

E + error

code

High-speed

blinking

Indicates an abnormality in the unit. Recording stops, even if ●REC is displayed in the

camera image panel.

Turn off the unit, and check for any problem with connected devices, cables, or media.

If the error persists when the unit is turned on again, contact your Sony service

representative. An error display or warning sound may not occur depending on the

status of the unit.

Message

display

Recording/tally

lamp

Cause and solution

Temperature

High

Blinking

The internal temperature is high.

Turn off the camcorder and allow it to cool down before operating it again.

437

Caution and operation messages

The following caution and operation messages may appear in the center of the screen. Follow the instructions provided

to resolve the issue.

Message

display

Recording/tally

lamp

Cause and solution

Media

Temperature

High

Blinking

The temperature of the CFexpress card is high.

Replace the card or allow it to cool down before using it again.

Voltage Low Blinking The DC IN voltage is low (level 1). Check the power source.

Insufficient

Voltage

High-speed

blinking

The DC IN voltage is too low (level 2). Recording is disabled.

Connect a different power source.

Media Near Full Blinking

The remaining capacity on the memory card is getting low.

Replace at the earliest convenience.

Media Full

High-speed

blinking

Clips could not be recorded or copied because there is no remaining capacity

on the memory card.

Replace immediately.

Clips Near Full Blinking

The number of additional clips that can be recorded on a memory card is

getting low.

Replace at the earliest convenience.

Clips Full

High-speed

blinking

The maximum number of clips that can be recorded on the memory card has

been reached.

Recording or copying more clips is not possible. Replace immediately.

Last Clip

Recording

Blinking

The clip currently recording is the last clip that can be recorded, as the

maximum number of clips has been reached.

Prepare a new memory card.

Media(A) Life

Near End

Blinking

The memory card is approaching the end of its life. Replace at the earliest

convenience.

Media(A) Life

End

High-speed

blinking

The memory card has reached the end of its life. Replace immediately.

Media(A) Near

Full

Blinking When using the Simul Rec function

Media(A) Full

High-speed

blinking

When using the Simul Rec function

Media(A) Clips

Near Full

Blinking When using the Simul Rec function

Media(A) Clips

Full

High-speed

blinking

When using the Simul Rec function

Media(A) Last

Clip Rec

Blinking When using the Simul Rec function

“(B)” is displayed for the card in slot B.

Display message Cause and Solution

438

Display message Cause and Solution

Backup Battery End

Please Change

The remaining capacity of the backup battery is insufficient.

Charge the backup battery.

Unknown Media(A)

Please Change

A memory card that has been partitioned or a memory card

containing more clips that can be handled by the unit was inserted.

The card cannot be used in the unit, and must be replaced.

Cannot Use Media(A)

Unsupported File System

A card using a different file system or an unformatted card was

inserted.

The card cannot be used in the unit, and must be replaced or

formatted using the unit.

Media Error

Media(A) Needs to be Restored

An error occurred on the memory card, and the card must be

restored.

Restore the memory card.

Media Error

Cannot Record to Media(A)

The memory card may be damaged, and can no longer be used

for recording.

Playback is possible, so making a copy and replacing the memory

card is recommended.

Media Error

Cannot Use Media(A)

The memory card may be damaged, and can no longer be used

for recording or playback.

The card cannot be used in the unit, and must be replaced.

Media(A) Error

Recording Halted

Playback Halted

Recording and playback was stopped because an error occurred

while using the memory card.

If the problem persists, replace the memory card.

Media Reached Rewriting Limit

Change Media(A)

The memory card has reached the end of its life.

Make a backup, and replace the card immediately. If you continue

using the card, the card may not be able to record or play.

For details, refer to the operating instructions for the memory card.

The specified address is invalid.

Check that the setting is correct.

Cannot Use Specified Port Number

The specified port number is invalid.

Check that the setting is correct.

Lens I/F Error(xx:xx)

A lens error was detected in the lens I/F communication when an

E-mount lens was attached.

Check the status of the connection with the E-mount lens.

If the problem persists, contact your Sony service representative

with the error code (five characters in parentheses).

Cannot add auto upload job of Proxy file

because maximum number of upload jobs was

reached.

The maximum number of transfer jobs has been reached.

Clear any unwanted jobs. The auto upload destination setting for

proxy files may also be incorrect. Check that the setting is correct.

Fan Stopped

Fan has stopped running.

Check that there is no dust or foreign matter.

If the error persists after removing any dust or foreign matter,

contact your Sony service representative.

“(B)” is displayed for the card in slot B.

439

440

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

List of Menu Items

The following tables list the menu items of the unit.

Legend

“Camera menu” and “web menu”

●: Available

▲: Some items available

–: Not available

“All File” and “Scene File”

Yes: Item saved in an ALL file or scene file

No: Item not saved

“All Reset (except for Network Settings)”

When [Reset]> [Reset] > [All Reset (except for Network Settings)] in the web menu is executed:

Yes: Initialized item (excludes network settings)

No: Not applicable

“Network Reset”

When [Reset]> [Reset] > [Network Reset] in the web menu is executed:

Yes: Initialized item (network setting)

No: Not applicable

“Factory Default”

Yes: Item reset to factory default

No: Not applicable

Shooting

Item

(level 2)

Camera

Web

All

File

Scene

File

All Reset (except for Network

Settings)

Network

Reset

Factory

Default

ISO/Gain/EI ● – Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

ND Filter ● – Yes

Yes

Yes No Yes

Shutter ● – Yes Yes Yes No Yes

Iris ● – Yes Yes Yes No Yes

Auto

Exposure

● – Yes

Yes

Yes No Yes

White ● – Yes

Yes

Yes No Yes

White Setting ● – Yes No Yes No Yes

Offset White ● – Yes No Yes No Yes

Focus ● ▲ Yes No Yes No Yes

S&Q Motion ● – Yes No Yes No Yes

441

Project

Paint/Look

Item

(level 2)

Camera

Web

All

File

Scene

File

All Reset (except for Network

Settings)

Network

Reset

Factory

Default

LUT On/Off ● – Yes No Yes No Yes

Noise

Suppression

● – Yes Yes Yes No Yes

Flicker

Reduce

● – Yes No Yes No Yes

SteadyShot ● – Yes No Yes No Yes

[Mode] not applicable

[Clip High light], [Detect Window], [Average Peak Level Ratio], [Custom Width], [Custom H Position], [Custom V Position] not applicable

[Preset White] not applicable

Item

(level 2)

Camera

Web

All

File

Scene

File

All Reset (except for

Network Settings)

Network

Reset

Factory

Default

Base Setting ● ● Yes No Yes No Yes

Rec Format ● ● Yes No

Yes

No Yes

Cine EI Setting ● – Yes No Yes No Yes

Simul Rec ● ● Yes No Yes No Yes

Proxy Rec ● ▲ Yes No Yes No Yes

Interval Rec ● ●

Yes

No Yes No Yes

Picture Cache

Rec

● ●

Yes

No Yes No Yes

SDI/HDMI Rec

Control

● – Yes No Yes No Yes

Assignable

Button

● – Yes No Yes No Yes

All File – ● No No No No No

[Frequency] not applicable

[Setting] not applicable

Item

(level 2)

Camera

Web

All

File

Scene

File

All Reset (except for

Network Settings)

Network

Reset

Factory

Default

Scene File ● – No No No No No

Base Look ● ▲

Yes

Reset Paint

Settings

● – No No No No No

Black ● – Yes Yes Yes No Yes

442

Pan-Tilt

TC/Media

Item

(level 2)

Camera

Web

All

File

Scene

File

All Reset (except for

Network Settings)

Network

Reset

Factory

Default

Knee ● – Yes Yes Yes No Yes

Detail ● – Yes No Yes No Yes

Matrix ● – Yes Yes Yes No Yes

Multi Matrix ● –

Yes

Yes No Yes

LUT data imported as base look not applicable

[Axis] not applicable

Item

(level 2)

Camera

Web

All

File

Scene

File

All Reset (except for Network

Settings)

Network

Reset

Factory

Default

P/T Speed – ● No No Yes No No

P/T

Acceleration

● ● No No Yes No No

P/T Range

Limit

– ● No No Yes No No

P/T

Direction

– ● No No Yes No No

P/T Preset – ● No No Yes No No

Item

(level 2)

Camera

Web

All

File

Scene

File

All Reset (except for

Network Settings)

Network

Reset

Factory

Default

Timecode ● –

Yes

No Yes No Yes

TC Display ● – Yes No Yes No Yes

Users Bit ● –

Yes

No Yes No Yes

HDMI TC

Out

● – Yes No Yes No Yes

Clip Name

Format

● – *2 No Yes No Yes

Update

Media

● – No No No No No

Format

Media

● – No No No No No

Media Life ● – No No No No No

[Setting] not applicable

[Auto Naming] applicable, [Camera ID] not applicable

443

Monitoring

Audio

Thumbnail

Technical

Item

(level 2)

Camera

Web

All

File

Scene

File

All Reset (except for

Network Settings)

Network

Reset

Factory

Default

Output Format ● ● Yes No Yes No Yes

Output Display – ● Yes No Yes No Yes

Display On/Off ● – Yes No Yes No Yes

Video Signal

Monitor

● – Yes No Yes No Yes

Marker ● – Yes No Yes No Yes

Item

(level 2)

Camera

Web

All

File

Scene

File

All Reset (except for Network

Settings)

Network

Reset

Factory

Default

Audio

Input

● ▲ Yes No Yes No Yes

Audio

Output

● ▲ Yes No Yes No Yes

Item

(level 2)

Camera

Web

All

File

Scene

File

All Reset (except for

Network Settings)

Network

Reset

Factory

Default

Display Clip

Properties

● – No No No No No

Set Clip Flag ● – No No No No No

Lock/Unlock

Clip

● – No No No No No

Delete Clip ● – No No No No No

Transfer Clip ● – No No No No No

Transfer Clip

(Proxy)

● – No No No No No

Filter Clips ● – No No No No No

Customize View ● – Yes No Yes No Yes

Item

(level 2)

Camera

Web

All

File

Scene

File

All Reset (except for Network

Settings)

Network

Reset

Factory

Default

Color

Bars

● – *1 No *1 No Yes

444

Network

Stream

Item

(level 2)

Camera

Web

All

File

Scene

File

All Reset (except for Network

Settings)

Network

Reset

Factory

Default

Genlock ● – No No No No No

Tally ● ● Yes No Yes No Yes

Rec

Review

● – Yes No Yes No Yes

Zoom ● – Yes No Yes No Yes

Remote

– ● No No Yes No Yes

Lens ● – Yes No Yes No Yes

APR ● – No No No No No

[Type] applicable, [Setting] not applicable

Item

(level 2)

Camera

Web

All

File

Scene

File

All Reset (except for

Network Settings)

Network

Reset

Factory

Default

Camera Name – ● No No No No Yes

User – ● No No No Yes Yes

Wired LAN

▲ ● No No No Yes No

File Transfer ● ▲ Yes No Yes Yes Yes

FTP Server 1 – ● No No Yes No Yes

FTP Server 2 – ● No No Yes No Yes

FTP Server 3 – ● No No Yes No Yes

SSL – ● No No No Yes Yes

Referer Check – ● No No No Yes Yes

Brute Force Attack

Protection

– ● No No No Yes Yes

Not configurable using the camera menu (display only)

Item

(level 2)

Camera

Web

All

File

Scene

File

All Reset (except for Network

Settings)

Network

Reset

Factory

Default

Stream

Setting

– ● No No

Yes

Video

Stream

– ● Yes No Yes No Yes

445

Maintenance

5-041-957-11(1)

Item

(level 2)

Camera

Web

All

File

Scene

File

All Reset (except for Network

Settings)

Network

Reset

Factory

Default

Audio

Stream

– ● Yes No Yes No Yes

[NDI|HX] > [License] not applicable

Item

(level 2)

Camera

Web

All

File

Scene

File

All Reset (except for Network

Settings)

Network

Reset

Factory

Default

Language ● ● Yes No Yes No Yes

Accessibility – ● Yes No No No Yes

Clock Set ● ●

Yes

No Yes

Reset – ● No No No No No

Hours Meter ● – No No No No No

Information – ● No No No No No

System Log – ● No No No No Yes

HTTP

Access Log

– ● No No No No Yes

Service – ● No No No No No

EULA – ● No No No No No

Software – ● No No No No No

Date and time information not applicable

[Time Zone], date, and time information not applicable

446

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Preset Position Saved Items

“Yes” indicates a setting that is saved for the preset position, and “No” indicates a setting that is not saved.

Pan/tilt items

Zoom items

Focus items

Display location Item Save target

Framing control panel of live operation screen

Pan/tilt position Yes

[Pan-Tilt Speed]

[Pan-Tilt] in the web menu

[P/T Speed] No

[P/T Acceleration] No

[P/T Range Limit] No

[P/T Direction] No

[P/T Preset] No

Can be configured separately for each preset position. For details, see [Pan-Tilt] > [Preset] in the web menu.

Display location Item Save target

Framing control panel of live operation screen

Zoom position (focus distance) Yes

[Zoom Speed]

[Technical] > [Zoom] in the camera menu [Zoom Type] No

Moves at maximum speed when restoring a preset position.

Display location Item

Save

target

Camera image panel of live operation

screen

Tracking target specified for realtime tracking AF No

Specified coordinates for spot focus No

(Focus) tab of live operation screen [Touch Focus] switch No

[Auto Focus] switch Yes

[Focus Hold] button state No

[Push AF/MF] button state No

[Face/Eye Detection AF] Yes

447

Display location Item

Save

target

[AF Subj. Shift Sens.] Yes

[AF Transition Speed] Yes

Focus position

Yes

[Shooting] > [Focus] in the web menu

[Push AF Mode] (including settings using assignable

buttons)

[Touch Function in MF] No

[AF Assist Control] No

[Shooting] > [Focus] in the camera menu

Focus size and focus position set using [Focus Area] Yes

Focus position set using [Focus Area (AF-S)] Yes

Not restored when the [Auto Focus] switch is set to the on position. Restored when set to off.

448

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Block Diagrams

Audio Input

Audio Output

449

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Updating E-Mount Lens Software

You can update the software of an E-mount lens using the unit.

Refer to the web site for the lens for lenses that can be updated and the corresponding software.

Software is updated using the web menu.

Note

Do not perform the following actions until the update has been completed.

Disconnecting the network

Removing a lens

Turning off the power

If a message indicating that the update failed is displayed, check the displayed description and try to update again.

5-041-957-11(1)

Attach an E-mount lens to the unit.

Check [Maintenance] > [Information] > [Lens] > [Model Name] and [Version Number] in the web menu.

The software version number of the E-mount lens is displayed on the side.

Check the software version number and then update the software as required.

Download the lens software update file for Windows (.exe extension) to the device running the Web App.

In [Maintenance] > [Information] > [Lens] > [Version Up], press the [Choose File] button and select the

downloaded update file.

Follow the on-screen instructions.

450

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Attaching the Lens Release Button Cover

You can prevent unintentional removal of the lens by attaching the lens release button cover supplied with the CIB-PCM1

Ceiling Bracket (option) to the lens release button.

Note

This does not prevent the lens from completely being removed.

5-041-957-11(1)

Attach a lens.

For details about attaching a lens, see “Attaching a Lens.”

Slide the pan/tilt lock lever to the LOCK position to lock the pan/tilt of the camera head.

Move the camera block to a position so the lens eject cover can be attached.

Attach the lens eject cover so that it covers the lens release button.

Secure the lens eject cover using the lens eject cover retaining screw.

451

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Licenses

MPEG-4 AVC Patent Portfolio License

THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL USE OF A

CONSUMER OR OTHER USES IN WHICH IT DOES NOT RECEIVE REMUNERATION TO

(i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC VIDEO”) AND/OR

(ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL ACTIVITY AND/OR

WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO.

NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE

OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM

Obtaining Software Under the GPL/LGPL License

This product uses software to which the GPL/LGPL applies. This informs you that you have a right to have access to,

modify, and redistribute source code for these software programs under the conditions of the GPL/LGPL.

The source code is provided on the internet. Use the following URL and follow the download instructions.

https://oss.sony.net/Products/Linux/

We would prefer that you do not contact us about the contents of the source code.

μT-Kernel source code

This product uses the source code of μT-Kernel under T-License 2.1 granted of TRON Forum (www.tron.org).

5-041-957-11(1)

452

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Specifications

General

Mass

Approx. 4.6 kg (10 lb 2.3 oz) (body only)

Approx. 6.0 kg (13 lb 3.6 oz) (including SELP28135G lens)

Dimensions

See “External dimensions.”

Power requirements

19.5 V DC

PoE++ (IEEE802.3bt Type 4 Class 8 compliant)

Power consumption

19.5 V DC: 80.0 W (max)

PoE++: 71.3 W (max)

Operating temperature

0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F)

Storage temperature

−20 °C to +60 °C (−4 °F to +140 °F)

Recording format (video)

XAVC Intra

XAVC-I 4K/QFHD mode: VBR, 600 Mbps (max) bit rate, MPEG-4 AVC/H.264

XAVC-I HD mode: CBG, 223 Mbps (max), MPEG-4 AVC/H.264

XAVC Long

XAVC-L QFHD mode: VBR, 150 Mbps (max) bit rate, MPEG-4 H.264/AVC

XAVC-L HD 50 mode: VBR, 50 Mbps (max), MPEG-4 H.264/AVC

XAVC-L HD 35 mode: VBR, 35 Mbps (max), MPEG-4 H.264/AVC

Recording format (audio)

LPCM 24-bit, 48 kHz, 4-channel

Recording frame rate

XAVC Intra

XAVC-I 4K mode: 4096×2160/59.94P, 50P, 29.97P, 25P, 24P, 23.98P

XAVC-I QFHD mode: 3840×2160/59.94P, 50P, 29.97P, 25P, 23.98P

XAVC-I HD mode: 1920×1080/59.94P, 50P, 29.97P, 25P, 23.98P

XAVC Long

XAVC-L QFHD mode: 3840×2160/59.94P, 50P, 29.97P, 25P, 23.98P

XAVC-L HD 50 mode: 1920×1080/59.94P, 50P, 29.97P, 25P, 23.98P

453

XAVC-L HD 35 mode: 1920×1080/59.94P, 50P, 29.97P, 25P, 23.98P

Recording/playback time

XAVC Intra

XAVC-I QFHD mode: 59.94P, Approx. 30 minutes (using CEA-G160T)

XAVC-I HD mode: 59.94P, Approx. 78 minutes (using CEA-G160T)

XAVC Long

XAVC-L QFHD mode: 59.94P, Approx. 115 minutes (using CEA-G160T)

XAVC-L HD 50 mode: 59.94P, Approx. 155 minutes (using CEA-G80T)

XAVC-L HD 35 mode: 59.94P, Approx. 210 minutes (using CEA-G80T)

Note

The recording/playback time may vary due to usage conditions and memory characteristics. The recording and playback times

are for a continuous recording as a single clip. The actual times may be shorter, depending on the number of clips recorded.

Pan/tilt drive section

Minimum pan speed: 0.02 deg./s

Minimum tilt speed: 0.02 deg./s

Maximum pan speed: 60 deg./s

Maximum tilt speed: 60 deg./s

Pan range: −170 deg. to + 170 deg.

Tilt range: −30 deg. to +195 deg.

Noise criterion rating: NC35 or lower

Preset positions: 100

Camera section

Imaging device

35mm full frame (35.6 × 23.8 mm), Exmor R CMOS sensor

Number of pixels

Approx. 12.9 megapixels (total pixels)

Approx. 10.3 megapixels (effective pixels)

Auto focus

Detection method: Phase detection/contrast detection

Internal ND filters

CLEAR: OFF

1: 1/4ND

2: 1/16ND

3: 1/64ND

Linearly variable ND: 1/4ND to 1/128ND

ISO sensitivity

ISO 800/12800 (Cine EI mode, D55 Light source)

Lens mount

E-mount

Latitude

15+ stop

454

Shutter speed

64F to 1/8000 sec. (23.98P)

Shutter angle

5.6° to 360°, 2 to 64 frames

Slow & Quick Motion

XAVC QFHD: 1 fps to 120 fps

XAVC HD: 1 fps to 240 fps

XAVC 4K: 1 fps to 60 fps

XAVC HD (S35): 1 fps to 120 fps

White balance

2000 K to 15000 K

Gain

−3 dB to +30 dB (1 dB increments)

Base look

S-Cinetone, Standard, Still, ITU709, s709, 709(800%), S-Log3, HLG Live, HLG Natural

Audio section

Sampling frequency

48 kHz

Quantization

24-bit

Frequency response

XLR input MIC mode: 20 Hz to 20 kHz (±3 dB or less)

XLR input LINE mode: 20 Hz to 20 kHz (±3 dB or less)

Dynamic range

XLR input MIC mode: 80 dB (Typical)

XLR input LINE mode: 90 dB (Typical)

Distortion

XLR input MIC mode: 0.08% or lower (−40 dBu input level)

XLR input LINE mode: 0.08% or lower (+14 dBu input level)

Input/output section

Inputs

DC IN

EIAJ compliant, 19.5 V DC

AUDIO IN

XLR type, 5-pin, female

LINE / MIC / MIC+48V switchable

MIC: Reference −30 dBu to −80 dBu

455

GENLOCK IN

BNC connector, 1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω

TC IN

BNC connector

Outputs

SDI OUT

BNC connector, 12G-SDI, 6G-SDI, 3G-SDI (Level A/B), HD-SDI

HDMI

Type-A connector

OPTICAL output connector

SFP+ compliant

* The unit does not support optical signal input.

Input/output

LAN connector

RJ-45, 1000BASE-T

OPTION connector

RJ-45 tally input/output connector

Media slot section

CFexpress Type A / SD card slot (2)

Supplied accessories

AC adaptor (1)

Power cord (1)

Infrared remote control (1)

Body cap (1) (attached to the unit)

HDMI cable retaining plate (1)

Before Using This Unit (1)

Warranty booklet (1)

External dimensions

Dimensions are approximate values.

Unit: mm (inches)

456

Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.

5-041-957-11(1)

457

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FR7 / ILME-FR7K

Trademarks

is a trademark of Sony Group Corporation.

XAVC and

are registered trademarks of Sony Group Corporation.

The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered

trademarks of HDMI Licensing Administrator, Inc. in the United States and other countries.

Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or

other countries.

Mac and macOS are registered trademarks of Apple Inc. in the U.S. and other countries.

The “Catalyst Browse” logo is a trademark or registered trademark of Sony Group Corporation.

IOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and is used under license.

iPadOS, Safari, and iPad are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries and regions.

Android and Google Chrome are trademarks or registered trademarks of Google LLC.

Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance.

SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.

CFexpress and the CFexpress Type A logo are trademarks of the CompactFlash Association.

NewTek™ and NDI® are trademarks or registered trademarks of NewTek, Inc.

JavaScript is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its affiliates.

Intel, the Intel logo, and Intel Core are trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries.

QR Code is a trademark of Denso Wave Inc.

All other company names and product names are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective owners.

Trademarked items are not indicated by ™ or ® symbols in this document.

5-041-957-11(1)

458

Sony ILME-FR7K Fr7 Cinema Line Full-frame Ptz Robotic Camera With Selp28135g Lens

Product's Documents

User Manual

Specifications

Sony ILME-FR7K Questions and Answers